PE-DESIGN

Ver.
6
Instruction Manual
PE-DESIGN
Personal Embroidery Design Software System

Instruction Manual
Manual
Ver. 6
Instruction

ENGLISH
XC8871-001
Printed in Japan

<< PE-Design Ver.6.0 >> cover 1-4

Frontcover.fm Page 1 Thursday, July 8, 2004 1:48 PM

IMPORTANT INFORMATION: REGULATIONS

Federal Communications Commissions (FCC) Declaration of Conformity

(For USA Only)
Responsible Party: Brother International Corporation
100 Somerset Corporate Boulevard
Bridgewater, NJ 08807-0911 USA

declares that the product

Product Name: Brother USB Writer

Model Number: PE-Design

complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class B digital device, pursu-
ant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will
not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
– Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer or local sales distributor
could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

Canadian Department of Communications Compliance Statement

(For Canada Only)
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emission from a digital appa-
ratus as set out in the interference-causing equipment standard entitled “Digital Apparatus”, ICES-
003 of the Department of Communications.

Radio Interference
(Other than USA and Canada)
This machine complies with EN55022 (CISPR Publication 22) /Class B.
Frontcover.fm Page 2 Thursday, July 8, 2004 1:48 PM

Congratulations on choosing our product!

Thank you very much for purchasing our product. To obtain the best performance from this unit
and to ensure safe and correct operation, please read this Instruction Manual carefully, and then
keep it in a safe place together with your warranty.

Please read before using this product

For designing beautiful embroidery patterns
• This system allows you to create a wide variety of embroidery patterns and supports a wider
range of sewing attribute settings (thread density, sewing pitch, etc.). However, the final result
will depend on your particular sewing machine model. We recommend that you make a trial
sewing sample with your sewing data before sewing on the final material.
For safe operation
• Avoid dropping a needle, a piece of wire or other metallic objects into the unit or into the card
slot.
• Do not store anything on the unit.
For a longer service life
• When storing the unit, avoid direct sunlight and high humidity locations. Do not store the unit
close to a heater, iron or other hot objects.
• Do not spill water or other liquids on the unit or cards.
• Do not drop or hit the unit.
For repairs or adjustments
• In the event that a malfunction occurs or adjustment is required, please consult your nearest
service center.
Notice
This Instruction Manual does not explain how to use your computer under Windows. Please refer
to the Windows manuals.
Copyright acknowledgment
MS-DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corp.
IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machine Corporation.
Important
Using this unit for unauthorized copying of material from embroidery cards, newspapers and mag-
azines for commercial purpose is an infringement of copyrights which is punishable by law.
Caution
The software included with this product is protected by copyright laws. This software can be used
or copied only in accordance with the copyright laws.

SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

This product is intended for household use.

For additional product information and updates, visit our web site at:
www.brother.com
Frontcover.fm Page 3 Thursday, July 8, 2004 1:48 PM

New Features of Version 6.0

Stitch generating
• Improved variable functions for satin stitch and fill stitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173, 174
• Color gradation function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96, 179
• Variations for region sewing:
piping stitch, concentric circle stitch, radial stitch, spiral stitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95, 177, 178
• Variations for line sewing:
E-stitch, V-stitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
• Added the Stamp function and expanded the programmable fill stitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 98, 165, 176
• Automatic running pitch adjustment for running stitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91, 172
• Half stitch for satin stitch, manual-punching object, etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91, 92, 93, 172, 174, 175
• Selectable stitch path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92, 93, 174, 175
• Selectable edge pattern (turning point) for fill stitch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92, 94, 174, 176

Editing functions

Layout & Editing

• Creates patterns larger than the hoop size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 108, 189, 194, 196, 198
• Enlarges/reduces while maintaining the density and stitching pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132, 133
• Selects an object from the Sewing Order/Color dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
• Monogramming function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
• Automatically eliminates the background with the Cross Stitch and Photo
Stitch functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116, 120, 122, 124, 125
• Improved Auto Punch function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
• Improved stitch editing (selecting entry and exit points for each color, inserting or deleting feeds) . . . 141
• Improved point editing:
Transforms lines to straight lines or curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Selects points with arrow keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Edits points without cancelling hole sewing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
• Edits regions without ungrouping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
• Split function for printing at actual size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
• Split off parts of stitch data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

User interface
• Changed grid interval range (1–10 mm → 0.1–25.4 mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105, 202
• Provides edit commands on the menu that appeared by right-clicking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236, 242, 249, 253
• Added the Reference window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 70, 107
• Improved the dialog box for setting sewing attributes (Beginner and Expert mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . 89, 171

Design Center
• Added the stitch simulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
• Allows the sewing order to be changed from the Sewing Order dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Layout & Editing

• Automatically creates appliqué data (material, position, basting, sewing). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
• Improved Sewing Order/Color dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
• Improved stitch simulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Others
• Added the .phc file format to those that can be imported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
• Organizes embroidery patterns in the Design Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
• Added more sample files for images, embroidery patterns and stitch patterns
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page i Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Table of Contents

Basic Operation
Before Use ................................................... 1 Step8 Quitting Layout & Editing...................... 24
What You Can Do With This Software.............. 1 Using a Photo Stitch Function......................... 25
Automatically Create an Embroidery Pattern Step1 Starting up Layout & Editing ................. 25
From an Image........................................................ 1 Step2 Opening an image file............................. 26
Automatically Create an Embroidery Pattern Step3 Adjusting the size and position of the

Advanced Opreation
Design Center
From a Photo .......................................................... 1 image ...................................................... 27
Easily Create Large-Size Embroidery Designs ...... 2 Step4 Automatically converting the image
Have Fun Creating Embroidery Patterns to an embroidery pattern......................... 27
Manually................................................................. 2 Creating and Editing Embroidery
Create Embroidery Patterns Using All Three Patterns ...................................................... 30
Applications............................................................ 2 Using Design Center ....................................... 30

Advanced Opreation
Layout & Editing
Overview of the Manual .................................... 3 Step1 Starting up Design Center....................... 30
Structure of the manual .......................................... 3 Step2 Opening an image file............................. 31
List of terms used ................................................... 3 Step3 Continuing to stage 2 (Line Image
Introduction ....................................................... 4 stage)....................................................... 31
Applications of the software................................... 4 Step4 Editing lines ............................................ 32
Step5 Continuing to stage 3 (Figure Handle
Package contents .................................................... 5
stage)....................................................... 33

Advanced Opreation
Programmable
Optional supplies .................................................... 6

Stitch Creator
Step6 Continuing to stage 4 (Sew Setting
Principal parts......................................................... 6 stage)....................................................... 34
Installation......................................................... 7 Step7 Specifying sewing attributes................... 34
Installation procedure ............................................. 7 Step8 Previewing the image ............................. 37
System requirements .............................................. 8 Step9 Saving the file ......................................... 38
[STEP 1] Installing the software ............................ 8 Using Layout & Editing.................................... 39

Advanced Opreation
Design Database
[STEP 2] Installing the driver for the card writer Step1 Importing embroidery patterns from
module .................................................................. 10 Design Center ......................................... 39
[STEP 3] Upgrading the USB card writer Step2 Adjusting the size and position of the
module .................................................................. 12 embroidery pattern.................................. 40
Online registration ................................................ 13 Step3 Adding shapes......................................... 41
Uninstallation ....................................................... 13 Step4 Adding text ............................................. 43
Technical support ................................................. 13 Step5 Fitting the text around the oval............... 44
Step6 Adding a circle for the center of the

Design Center
Tips and Techniques for Creating Embroidery sun........................................................... 45

Reference
Patterns........................................................... 14 Step7 Selecting a programmable fill stitch....... 46
Sew Types ...................................................... 15 Step8 Adding a closed broken line for the sun’s
rays.......................................................... 48
Chapter 1 Step9 Changing the sewing order of sun and
rays.......................................................... 49
Basic Operation ........................ 17
Layout & Editing

Step10 Adjusting the rays................................... 50

Step11 Setting hole sewing................................. 50
Reference

Getting Started .......................................... 18 Step12 Previewing the embroidery pattern......... 51

About This Chapter ......................................... 18 Step13 Transferring the pattern to an original
card ......................................................... 52
Automatically Creating Embroidery Step14 Saving the file ......................................... 53
Patterns...................................................... 19 Step15 Quitting Layout & Editing...................... 53
Programmable
Stitch Creator

Using the Auto Punch Function ...................... 19 Using Programmable Stitch Creator ............... 54
Reference

Step1 Starting up Layout & Editing ................. 19 Step1 Starting up Programmable Stitch
Step2 Opening an image file ............................ 20 Creator .................................................... 54
Step3 Adjusting the size and position of the Step2 Opening a programmable stitch pattern.. 55
image ...................................................... 21 Step3 Drawing lines to edit the stitch pattern ... 56
Step4 Automatically converting the image to an Step4 Applying embossing/engraving effects .. 57
embroidery pattern.................................. 21 Step5 Saving the edited stitch pattern............... 58
Design Database

Step5 Displaying a preview of the embroidery Step6 Quitting Programmable Stitch Creator ... 58
Reference

pattern ..................................................... 22
Step6 Saving the embroidery pattern................ 23 Creating Large-Size Embroidery
Step7 Transferring the pattern to an original Patterns ...................................................... 59
card ......................................................... 24 Designing a large-size embroidery pattern........... 59

i
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page ii Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Table of Contents

Step1 Starting up Layout & Editing ................. 59 Specifying sewing attributes ............................... 89
Step2 Specifying a Design Page size................ 60 Creating a gradation ............................................ 96
Step3 Creating the embroidery pattern ............. 60 Moving the center point of the concentric circle
Step4 Checking the embroidering order ........... 61 stitch and radial stitch.......................................... 97
Step5 Saving the pattern ................................... 61 Specifying hole sewing ....................................... 97
Step6 Transferring the pattern to an original
card ......................................................... 62 Applying and Editing Stamps .......................... 98
Step7 Quitting Layout & Editing...................... 63 Applying a stamp ................................................ 98
Embroidering large-size embroidery patterns ...... 63 Editing a stamp.................................................... 99
Step1 Attaching stabilizer to the fabric ............ 63 Viewing and Modifying the Sewing Order ..... 100
Step2 Marking the embroidering position ........ 63
Step3 Hooping the fabric .................................. 65 Checking the Stitching .................................. 101
Step4 Embroidering .......................................... 65 Previewing the Sewing Image....................... 102
Changing realistic preview settings .................. 102
Chapter 2 Viewing Patterns in the Reference Window .. 103
Advanced Operation ................ 67 Zooming ............................................................ 103
Moving the display area frame.......................... 103
Advanced Operations ............................... 68 Redrawing the display area frame..................... 103
Scaling the display area frame .......................... 104
About This Chapter ......................................... 68
Saving ........................................................... 104
Design Center............................................ 69
Overwriting ....................................................... 104
Main Window .................................................. 70 Saving with a new name ................................... 104
Stage 1 (Original Image Stage) ..................... 71
Changing Software Settings.......................... 105
Importing Image Data ..................................... 71 Changing the grid settings................................. 105
Using the wizard ................................................. 71 Changing the measurement units ...................... 105
Importing image data from a TWAIN device ..... 72
Stage 2 (Line Image Stage) ........................... 73 Layout & Editing ......................................106
Continuing to Stage 2 (Line Image Stage)...... 73 Main Window................................................. 107
Creating a new Design Page in stage 2 Inputting Images and Embroidery
(Line Image stage)............................................... 74 Patterns ......................................................... 108
Drawing and erasing outlines.............................. 74 Creating a Design Page ................................ 108
Stage 3 (Figure Handle Stage) ...................... 76 Creating a new Design Page ............................. 108
Continuing to Stage 3 (Figure Handle Stage) . 76 Specifying the Design Page .............................. 108
Specifying the Design Page size ......................... 77 Opening a Layout & Editing file....................... 109
Creating a new Design Page in stage 3 (Figure Importing Image Data.................................... 111
Handle stage)....................................................... 78 Importing image data ........................................ 111
Editing Outlines............................................... 78 Importing image data from a TWAIN device,
Selecting outlines ................................................ 78 such as a scanner ............................................... 111
Moving outlines .................................................. 78 Creating a portrait image................................... 112
Scaling outlines ................................................... 79 Importing image data from the Clipboard......... 113
Flipping outlines horizontally or vertically......... 79 Changing the display settings of images ........... 113
Rotating outlines ................................................. 79 Changing the Size and Position of the
Deleting outlines ................................................. 80 Image ............................................................. 114
Editing Points in Outlines ................................ 81 Saving the Image Data.................................. 114
Moving points ..................................................... 81 Automatically Converting Image Data Into an
Inserting points.................................................... 81 Embroidery Pattern ....................................... 115
Deleting points .................................................... 81 Importing Embroidery Patterns ..................... 127
Drawing a Broken Line.................................... 82 Importing embroidery patterns from a file........ 127
Stage 4 (Sew Setting Stage) .......................... 83 Importing embroidery patterns from Design
Center ................................................................ 128
Continuing to Stage 4 (Sew Setting Stage) .... 83
Importing embroidery patterns from an
Specifying display colors .................................... 83
embroidery card ................................................ 128
Applying Sewing Attributes to Lines and Editing Embroidery Patterns ....................... 130
Regions........................................................... 84
Editing Embroidery Patterns ......................... 130
Region sewing..................................................... 84
Selecting patterns .............................................. 130
Line sewing ......................................................... 85
Moving patterns ................................................ 131
Using the Sewing Attributes bar ......................... 87
Scaling patterns ................................................. 132

ii
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page iii Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Table of Contents

Flipping patterns horizontally or vertically....... 133 Specifying the Sewing Area .......................... 183
Rotating patterns ............................................... 133 Checking and Editing the Sewing Order/
Grouping embroidery patterns .......................... 134

Basic Operation
Color.............................................................. 184
Editing Points in Embroidery Patterns .......... 135 Zooming ........................................................ 186
Selecting points ................................................. 135 Zooming in ........................................................ 186
Moving points ................................................... 135 Zooming out ...................................................... 186
Inserting points.................................................. 136 Zooming to actual size ...................................... 186
Deleting points .................................................. 137 Zooming on selected objects ............................. 186

Advanced Opreation
Transforming straight lines into curves or curves Zooming Design Page to window ..................... 186

Design Center
into straight lines ............................................... 137 Previewing the Sewing Image....................... 187
Moving entry/exit points and the center point .. 138 Changing realistic preview settings .................. 187
Editing Stitch Data ........................................ 140 Checking the Stitching .................................. 188
Converting objects to stitch data ....................... 140
Checking Embroidery Pattern Information .... 189
Editing stitch points of stitch data..................... 140
Editing User Thread Color Lists .................... 190

Advanced Opreation
Changing colors of stitch data........................... 142

Layout & Editing

Converting stitch data to blocks........................ 142 Viewing Patterns in the Reference Window .. 193
Splitting off parts of stitch data......................... 143 Zooming ............................................................ 193
Moving the display area frame.......................... 193
Drawing Circles and Arcs.............................. 145
Redrawing the display area frame..................... 193
Drawing a circle or an oval ............................... 145
Scaling the display area frame .......................... 193
Drawing an arc .................................................. 145
Saving and Printing ...................................... 194

Advanced Opreation
Drawing a fan shape.......................................... 146

Programmable
Stitch Creator
Drawing an arc & string.................................... 147 Saving ........................................................... 194
Specifying the geometric attribute .................... 147 Overwriting ....................................................... 194
Saving with a new name ................................... 194
Drawing a Rectangle..................................... 148
Outputting data in a different format ................ 195
Specifying the geometric attribute .................... 148
Writing an embroidery pattern to an original
Drawing Straight Lines and Curves .............. 149 card.................................................................... 195

Advanced Opreation
Design Database
Specifying the geometric attribute .................... 150 Writing multiple embroidery files to an original
Creating Manual Punching Data ................... 151 card.................................................................... 196
Entering Text................................................. 153 Adding comments to saved .pes files ................ 199
Specifying text attributes................................... 154 Printing .......................................................... 200
Editing entered text ........................................... 156 Specifying print settings.................................... 200
Selecting characters........................................... 157 Checking the print image .................................. 201
Specifying text attributes................................... 157

Design Center
Printing.............................................................. 201

Reference
Specifying text arrangement ............................. 158 Changing Software Settings ....................... 202
Transforming text.............................................. 160 Changing the Settings................................... 202
Specifying TrueType text attributes.................. 161 Changing the grid settings................................. 202
Converting text to outline data.......................... 161 Changing the measurement units ...................... 202
Entering Monograms..................................... 162 Information for Optional Large-Size Hoop
Layout & Editing

Specifying monogram attributes ....................... 163 Users ............................................................. 203

Reference

Editing monograms ........................................... 163 Creating Patterns for Multi-Position Hoops ... 203
Editing monogram characters and the decorative Selecting the Design Page size.......................... 203
pattern................................................................ 164 Creating the pattern ........................................... 204
Applying and Editing Stamps ........................ 165 Optimizing hoop changes.................................. 204
Applying a stamp .............................................. 165 Checking the pattern ......................................... 205
Programmable

Editing a stamp.................................................. 166 Saving the pattern.............................................. 206

Stitch Creator
Reference

Applying Sewing Attributes to Lines and Writing the pattern to an original card .............. 206
Regions......................................................... 167 Printing a Design Page for a multi-position
Setting the thread color and sew type ............... 168 hoop................................................................... 207
Specifying sewing attributes ............................. 171 Programmable Stitch Creator................. 208
Creating a gradation .......................................... 179
Main Window................................................. 208
Design Database

Specifying hole sewing ..................................... 180

Using the Applique Wizard............................... 181 Opening a Pattern File .................................. 209
Reference

Checking Embroidery Patterns ................... 182 Creating a new pattern ...................................... 209
Opening a pattern file........................................ 209
Measuring the Distance Between Two
Opening an image in the background................ 210
Points ............................................................ 182

iii
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page iv Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Table of Contents

Selecting a Pattern To Be Created ............... 210 Outputting a Catalog of Embroidery

Viewing the Stitch Pattern While Patterns......................................................... 231
Creating It ..................................................... 212 Printing.............................................................. 231
Drawing a Stitch Pattern in Fill/Stamp Outputting as an HTML file.............................. 231
Mode ............................................................. 212 Outputting as a CSV file ................................... 232
Editing a Stitch Pattern in Fill/Stamp Mode... 213
Selecting patterns .............................................. 213 Chapter 3
Moving patterns ................................................ 213 Reference ................................ 233
Scaling patterns ................................................. 214
Deleting patterns ............................................... 214 Design Center .......................................... 234
Cutting out patterns ........................................... 214 List of Tool Box Buttons ................................ 234
Copying patterns ............................................... 214 Stage 2 (Line Image stage) ................................. 234
Duplicating patterns .......................................... 214 Stage 3 (Figure Handle stage) ............................ 234
Pasting a cut or copied pattern .......................... 214 Stage 4 (Sew Setting stage) ................................ 235
Flipping patterns vertically ............................... 215
List of Menus................................................. 236
Flipping patterns horizontally ........................... 215
File menu ............................................................ 236
Rotating patterns ............................................... 215
Edit menu............................................................ 237
Editing Points in Fill/Stamp Mode ................. 216 Sew menu ........................................................... 238
Moving points ................................................... 216 Display menu...................................................... 238
Inserting points.................................................. 216 Option menu ....................................................... 239
Deleting points .................................................. 217 Stage menu ......................................................... 239
Creating a Stamp .......................................... 217 Help menu .......................................................... 240
Creating a Stitch Pattern in Motif Mode ........ 218 Layout & Editing ......................................241
Editing a Stitch Pattern in Motif Mode........... 219 List of Tool Box Buttons ................................ 241
Moving and deleting several points at a time.... 219 List of Menus................................................. 242
Scaling patterns ................................................. 220 File menu ............................................................ 242
Flipping a pattern horizontally or vertically...... 220 Edit menu............................................................ 243
Saving ........................................................... 221 Image menu ........................................................ 245
Overwriting ....................................................... 221 Text menu........................................................... 246
Saving with a new name ................................... 221 Sew menu ........................................................... 246
Changing the Settings................................... 222 Display menu...................................................... 247
Changing the display of the background image 222 Option menu ....................................................... 248
Changing the grid settings................................. 222 Help menu .......................................................... 248

Design Database ..................................... 223 Programmable Stitch Creator................. 249

Main Window ................................................ 223 List of Tool Box Buttons ................................ 249
Starting Up Design Database ....................... 224 List of Menus................................................. 249
File menu ............................................................ 249
Organizing Embroidery Patterns................... 224
Mode menu......................................................... 250
Creating new folders ......................................... 224
Edit menu............................................................ 250
Moving/copying embroidery patterns to a different
Display menu...................................................... 251
folder ................................................................. 224
Help menu .......................................................... 252
Changing the name of the embroidery pattern.. 225
Deleting an embroidery pattern......................... 225 Design Database......................................253
Changing the contents pane display.................. 226 List of Menus................................................. 253
Opening Embroidery Patterns....................... 227 File menu ............................................................ 253
Opening embroidery patterns with Layout & Edit menu............................................................ 254
Editing............................................................... 227 Display menu...................................................... 254
Importing embroidery patterns into Layout & Option menu ....................................................... 255
Editing............................................................... 227 Help menu .......................................................... 255
Checking Embroidery Patterns ..................... 227 Index .........................................................256
Previewing embroidery patterns ....................... 227 Read the following before opening the CD-ROM
Checking embroidery pattern information ........ 228 package
Searching for an Embroidery Pattern............ 229 Product Agreement
Converting Embroidery Patterns to Different
Formats......................................................... 230

iv
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 1 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Before Use

What You Can Do With This Software

This software provides digitizing and editing capabilities, allowing you the creative freedom to design original
embroidery. Easily turn illustrations, photos and lettering into custom embroidery designs.

Automatically Create an Embroidery Pattern From an Image

c For more details, refer to “Using the Auto Punch Function” on page 19.

Automatically Create an Embroidery Pattern From a Photo

c For more details, refer to “Using a Photo Stitch Function” on page 25.

1
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 2 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Before Use

Easily Create Large-Size Embroidery Designs

c For more details, refer to “Creating Large-Size Embroidery Patterns” on page 59.

Have Fun Creating Embroidery Patterns Manually

You can combine embroidery patterns or apply stitching to drawings and text. In addition, you can design a
wider variety of embroidery patterns by using the many sew types available.

c For more details, refer to “Creating and Editing Embroidery Patterns” on page 30.

Create Embroidery Patterns Using All Three Applications

■ Design Center
c Refer to “Using Design Center” on page 30.

c For more details, refer to pages 69 through 105.

■ Layout & Editing

c Refer to “Automatically Creating Embroidery Patterns” on page 19.

c Refer to “Using Layout & Editing” on page 39.

c For more details, refer to pages 106 through 207.

■ Programmable Stitch Creator

c Refer to “Using Programmable Stitch Creator” on page 54

c For more details, refer to pages 208 through 222.

2
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 3 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Before Use

Overview of the Manual

Structure of the manual
This manual consists of three main sections: Basic Operation, Advanced Operation, and Reference.

■ Basic Operation
By following the step-by-step instructions contained in this section, you can create basic embroidery
patterns. For first time users, this is a good way to become familiar with the various functions.

■ Advanced Operation
This section separately outlines the capabilities and use for each application, allowing you to create more
advanced and original embroidery patterns than those created in Basic Operation.

■ Reference
This section contains an explanation of the Tool Box and a summary of the menu for each application. You
can use this section to clarify the purpose and use of any icon or menu command.

List of terms used

The following terms are used throughout this manual, as described below.
Embroidery pattern: An embroidery design
Object: A component of the embroidery pattern
Multi-position hoop: An embroidery frame that can be attached to the embroidery machine at various positions
so that large-size patterns can be sewn
Sew type: A type of stitching (for example, zigzag stitch, running stitch and satin stitch)
Stitching: A series of stitches

3
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 4 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Before Use

Introduction
Applications of the software
This package consists of four applications.

■ Design Center
Design Center is used to manually create embroidery patterns from images. The images may come from
scanning a printed image or can be created with an application like Paint®. The extension of the image files
must be .bmp, .tif, .jpg, .j2k, .pcx, .wmf, .png, .eps, .pcd, or .fpx. Design Center automatically detects outlines
in the image and replaces them with broken lines that can be edited and assigned sewing attributes.
The procedure is divided into four stages:
❏ Stage 1 (Original Image stage): Open an image file and select one or more colors that the application
will use to trace the outlines.
❏ Stage 2 (Line Image stage): The original color image is replaced with a black-and-white image (the
colors selected in stage 1 (Original Image stage) become black, and all other colors become white).
This image can be edited using pens and erasers of different thicknesses. (You can also start with this
step to draw a black-and-white image by hand.)
When the image is ready, start the automatic tracing process.
❏ Stage 3 (Figure Handle stage): The black-and-white image is replaced with a set of outlines made of
editable broken lines. You can edit the broken lines by moving, inserting or deleting editing points.
❏ Stage 4 (Sew Setting stage): In this final step, apply sewing attributes (thread color and sew type) to
the outlines and the inside regions.
At any stage, you can save your work to retrieve it later. In stage 1 (Original Image stage) and stage 2 (Line
Image stage), the file will be saved with the .pel extension. In stage 3 (Figure Handle stage) and stage 4 (Sew
Setting stage), the file will be saved with the .pem extension. In addition, if the imported image has not yet
been saved, it can be saved with the .bmp extension.
Saving your work as you move through the stages will be helpful if you make changes, then later decide to use
the original pattern.
When your image has reached stage 4 (Sew Setting stage), you can import it into Layout & Editing, where the
image can be moved and scaled as a single object.

■ Layout & Editing

Layout & Editing is used to automatically create embroidery patterns from images, and to combine images and text to
create embroidery patterns that can be written to an original card. The images may come from scanning a printed image
or can be created with an application like Paint®. The extension of the image files must be .bmp, .tif, .jpg, .j2k, .pcx, .wmf,
.png, .eps, .pcd, or .fpx. In addition, the following types of embroidery patterns can be incorporated into the embroidery
pattern.
❏ Embroidery patterns created with Design Center
❏ Embroidery patterns on embroidery cards purchased from your dealer (Some patterns cannot be read.)
❏ Embroidery patterns in the Tajima (.dst), Melco (.exp), Pfaff (.pcs), Husqvarna (.hus) and embroidery
sewing machine (.phc) formats
❏ Embroidery patterns created within Layout & Editing itself (These patterns include text, circular shapes,
boxes, polygons, curves and manual punching patterns.)
After gathering the different parts of your embroidery pattern, you can use the layout functions to adjust their
relative position, orientation and scale.
When an embroidery pattern is complete, you can save it (with the .pes file extension) and write it to an original card.
The original card can then be inserted into your sewing machine for the embroidery pattern to be sewn.

4
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 5 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Before Use

■ Programmable Stitch Creator

Programmable Stitch Creator allows you to create, edit and save fill/stamp and motif stitch patterns that can
be applied as a programmable fill stitch or motif stitch, or as a stamp to the enclosed regions of embroidery
patterns both in Design Center and Layout & Editing. The fill/stamp stitch patterns are saved as .pas files, and
the motif stitch patterns are saved as .pmf files. The application comes with a number of .pas and .pmf files
that you can use as they are or edit to enhance your embroidery patterns.

■ Design Database
Design Database allows you to easily preview the embroidery pattern files on your computer so that you can
find the desired pattern, which can be opened with or imported into Layout & Editing. From Design Database,
you can also convert the files to other formats (.pes, .dst., .exp., .pcs or .hus), or print or output as an HTML
file images of the embroidery patterns in a selected folder. In addition, the sewing information for the
embroidery patterns in a selected folder can be outputted as a CSV file for use in other database applications.

Package contents
Check that the following items are included. If anything is missing or damaged, contact your service
representative.

Version 6.0 or version 6.0 upgrade for versions 1.0 through 4.0:

USB card writer module

CD-ROM Original card Instruction manual Template

Version 6.0 upgrade for version 5.0:

CD-ROM Instruction manual Template

a Note:
The USB card writer module and the original card are not included in the kit provided for upgrading from
version 5.0.

5
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 6 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Before Use

Optional supplies
Original card

a Note:
The only original cards that can be used with this USB card writer module are those like the one enclosed
or optional original cards of the same type.

Principal parts

LED indicator
This indicator lights up when the unit is turned on,
and flashes when the USB card writer module is
communicating with the computer.

a Note:
Never remove an original card or unplug the
USB cable while this indicator is flashing.
Card slot
Insert an original card/embroidery
card here. USB connector
Connect to the computer.

b Memo:
• Since power is supplied to the USB card writer module through the USB connection to the computer,
there is no power supply cable or power switch.
• Be sure to keep original cards away from high humidity, direct sunlight, static electricity and strong
shocks. Furthermore, do not bend the cards.

6
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 7 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Before Use

Installation
Installation procedure
The installation procedure is different depending on whether the full version or an upgrade of the software is
being installed. Be sure to perform the installation procedures listed below.

Installing version 6.0 (full version)

[STEP 1] Installing the software c page 8
[STEP 2] Installing the driver for the card writer module c page 10

Upgrading from version 1.0 through 4.0

[STEP 1] Installing the software c page 8
[STEP 2] Installing the driver for the card writer module c page 10

Upgrading from version 5.0 or 5.01

[STEP 1] Installing the software c page 8
[STEP 2] Installing the driver for the card writer module c page 10
[STEP 3] Upgrading the USB card writer module c page 12

Upgrading from version 5.02 or later

[STEP 1] Installing the software c page 8
b Memo:
When upgrading from version 5.02 or later, STEP 2 is not performed.

[STEP 3] Upgrading the USB card writer module c page 12

a Note:
• If the installation is interrupted or not performed as described, the software will not be installed correctly.
• Before turning on the computer, be sure to disconnect the USB card writer module. If the
computer is turned on while the card writer is connected, the installation may not be completed
correctly when upgrading from version 5.0 or 5.01.
• In order to upgrade the USB card writer module, you must be able to connect to the Internet. If you
cannot connect to the Internet, contact your nearest service representative.

7
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 8 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Before Use

System requirements
Before installing the software on your computer, make sure that the computer meets the following
requirements.

Computer IBM-PC or compatible computer originally equipped with a USB port

Operating system Windows 98, ME, XP or 2000
Processor Pentium 500 MHz or higher
Memory Minimum 64 MB (256 MB or more is recommended.)
Hard disk free space Minimum 100 MB
Monitor SVGA (800 × 600), 16-bit color or higher
Port USB Ver. 1.1 or higher
Printer A graphic printer that is supported by your system (if you wish to print your images)
CD-ROM drive Required for installation

a Note:
• Power is supplied to the USB card writer module through the USB connection. Connect the USB card
writer module to a USB connector on the computer or to a self-powered USB hub that can supply
enough power to the card writer module. If the card writer module is not connected in this way, it may
not operate correctly.
• This product may not operate correctly with some computers and USB expansion cards.

[STEP 1] Installing the software

This section describes how to install the application software.

a Note:
• If the installation is interrupted or not performed as described, the software will not be installed correctly.
• Before turning on the computer, be sure to DISCONNECT the USB card writer module.

b Memo:
The following installation procedure includes descriptions and dialog boxes for Windows XP. The
procedure and dialog boxes for other operating systems may be slightly different.

1. Insert the enclosed CD-ROM into the → After a short while, the Choose Setup
computer’s CD-ROM drive. Language dialog box automatically ap-
pears.

8
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 9 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Before Use

b Memo: b Memo:
If the installer does not automatically start To install the application into a different
up: folder:
1) Click the Start button. 1) Click Browse.
2) Click Run. 2) In the Choose Folder dialog box that
→ The Run dialog box appears. appeared, select the drive and folder. (If
3) Type in the full path to the installer, and necessary, type in the name of a new
then click OK to start up the installer. folder.)
For example: D:\setup.exe (where “D:” 3) Click OK.
is the name of the CD-ROM drive) → The Choose Destination Location
dialog box of the InstallShield Wizard
shows the selected folder.
2. Select the desired language, and then click 4) Click Next to install the application into
OK. the selected folder.
→ The InstallShield Wizard starts up, and • To return to the previous step, click Back.
the first dialog box appears. • To quit the installation, click Cancel.

4. Click Next to install the application into the

default folder.
→ When the installation is completed, the di-
alog box shown below appears.

3. Click Next to continue with the installation.

→ A dialog box appears, allowing you to se-
lect the folder where the software will be
installed.

5. Click Finish to complete the installation of the

software.

a Note:
Even though the installation is completed, do
not remove the CD-ROM from the
computer’s CD-ROM drive.

9
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 10 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Before Use

[STEP 2] Installing the driver for the card writer module

This section describes how to install the driver for the card writer module.

a Note:
If you upgrading from version 5.02 or later, skip this section and continue with the procedure described in
“[STEP 3] Upgrading the USB card writer module” on page 12.

1. Plug the USB connector into the USB port on Select Search removable media (floppy,
the computer. CD-ROM...), and then click Next.
Make sure that the connector is fully inserted.

For Windows 98: Select Search for the best

driver for your device. (Recommended),
For Windows XP users connected to the and then click Next.
Internet:
→ The installation of the driver is completed
automatically.
For all other users:
→ After a short while, the Found New Hard-
ware Wizard (or Add New Hardware
Wizard) dialog box appears.

2. For Windows XP: Select Install from a list or

specific location [Advanced], and then click
Next.
Select CD-ROM drive, and then click Next.

10
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 11 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Before Use

For Windows Me: Select Specify the location 3. Follow the instructions of the Found New
of the driver [Advanced], and then click Hardware Wizard (or Add New Hardware
Next. Wizard) to complete the installation of the
driver.

4. Remove the CD-ROM from the computer’s

CD-ROM drive.

Select Removable Media (Floppy, CD-

ROM...), and then click Next.

For Windows 2000: Select Search for a

suitable driver for my device
[recommended], and then click Next.

Select CD-ROM drives, and then click Next.

11
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 12 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Before Use

[STEP 3] Upgrading the USB card writer module

This section describes how to upgrade the USB card writer module for version 6.0. Users upgrading from
version 5.0 or later must upgrade the card writer. After installing version 5.0 or later, immediately follow the
procedure below to upgrade the card writer for version 6.0.

a Note:
• If the USB card writer module is not upgraded, Design Center and Layout & Editing of version 6.0 can
no longer be used after the specified number of trial uses has been reached.
• In order to upgrade the USB card writer module, you must be able to connect to the Internet. If you
cannot connect to the Internet, contact your nearest service representative.

1. Start up Layout & Editing. 4. Type in the 15-digit product ID on the label
→ The dialog box shown below appears. attached to the CD-ROM case, and then click
Next.
→ The entered product ID and the serial
number automatically retrieved from the
USB card writer module is displayed.

2. To begin the upgrade, click Upgrade now.

→ The Upgrade wizard starts up, and the
first dialog box shown below appears.

5. Click Next to access our server through the

Internet and retrieve the upgrade key.
→ If the upgrade key has been successfully
retrieved, the dialog box shown below ap-
pears.

3. Click Next.

6. Click Next to begin upgrading the USB card

writer module.

12
BeforeUsing.fm Page 13 Thursday, July 8, 2004 2:57 PM

Before Use

→ If the upgrade has been completed suc-

cessfully, the dialog box shown below ap- a Note:
pears. If a warning appears at any time, follow the
instructions that are displayed.

Online registration
If you wish to be contacted about upgrades and provided with important information such as future product
developments and improvements, you can register your product online by following a simple registration
procedure.
Click Online Registration on the Help menu of Layout & Editing to start up the installed Web browser and
open the online registration page on our Web site.

a Note:
Online registration may not be available in some areas.

Uninstallation
1. Turn on the computer and start up Windows.

2. Click the Start button in the task bar, and then click Control Panel.

3. In the Control Panel window, double-click Add or Remove Programs.

a Note:
With an operating system other than Windows XP, point to Settings in the Start menu, and then click
Control Panel. In the Control Panel window, double-click Add/Remove Programs.

4. In the dialog box that appeared, select this software, and then click Change/Remove.

Technical support
Contact Technical Support if you have a problem. Please check the company web site (www.brother.com) to
find the Technical Support in your area.

a Note:
Have the following information ready before contacting Technical Support.
• The make and model of the computer that you are using as well as the Windows version (Refer to
page 8 and check the system requirements for this product again.)
• Information on any error messages that appear

13
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 14 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Before Use

Tips and Techniques for Creating

Embroidery Patterns
■ Sewing wide areas
When satin stitching is sewn in a wide area, the stitched area may shrink after sewing, depending on the
material and the type of thread used. If this happens, switch to this alternate method: Select the fill stitch and
use stabilizer material on the reverse side of the fabric.

Pattern
After sewing

a Note:
When using the satin stitch in a wide area, the needle may move out of position by about 10 mm with some
machines. In order to avoid this, use the above-mentioned alternate method.

■ Sewing direction
In order to limit shrinking, select a stitch direction perpendicular to the larger edge of the area.

Shrinking more likely to occur Shrinking less likely to occur

■ Sewing order
After creating an embroidery pattern made of several different parts (in Design Center or Layout & Editing), be
sure to check the sewing order and correct it if necessary.
With Design Center, the default sewing order is the order in which the sewing attributes are applied.
With Layout & Editing, the default sewing order is the order in which the elements are drawn.

■ Enlarging/reducing embroidery patterns

There are several ways of enlarging or reducing an imported embroidery pattern in Layout & Editing. You may
choose to scale your pattern with the pointer, or apply the Stitch to Block function, then scale the pattern.
When you normally scale an imported pattern, the number of stitches that will be sewn remains the same,
resulting in a change of embroidery quality if the size of the pattern is greatly changed. However, by holding
down the Ctrl key while scaling the imported embroidery pattern, the original embroidery quality can be
maintained, since the stitch density and fill pattern automatically adapts to the new size.
Another method of maintaining the original embroidery quality of the pattern is to select the Sew – Stitch to
Block command, then scale the pattern. When a pattern is scaled only moderately, it may not be necessary
to apply the Stitch to Block function.

This system allows you to create a wide variety of embroidery patterns and supports wider ranges for the
setting of the sewing attributes (thread density, sewing pitch, etc.). However, the final result also depends
on your particular sewing machine model. We recommend that you make a trial sewing sample with your
sewing data before sewing on the final material. Remember to sew your trial sample on the same type of
fabric as your final material and to use the same needle and the same machine embroidery thread.

14
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 15 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Before Use

Sew Types
The sewing attributes for each sew type are first set to their default settings; however, by changing the settings
of the sewing attributes, you can create custom stitching. (For details, refer to pages 91 through 95 and
pages 172 through 178.)

■ Line sew types

Zigzag stitch Running stitch

Motif stitch E/V stitch

b Memo:
The stitching for the programmable fill stitch and the motif stitch depends on the selected stitch pattern.
For details, refer to “Programmable fill stitch” on page 93 and 175 and “Motif stitch” on page 95 and 177.

■ Region sew types

Satin stitch Fill stitch

15
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 16 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Before Use

Programmable fill stitch Motif stitch

b Memo:
The stitching for the programmable fill stitch and the motif stitch depends on the selected stitch pattern.
For details, refer to “Programmable fill stitch” on page 93 and 175 and “Motif stitch” on page 95 and 177.

Cross stitch Concentric circle stitch

Radial stitch Spiral stitch

Piping stitch

16
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 17 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Chapter 1
Basic Operation

17
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 18 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Getting Started

About This Chapter

This chapter is organized as a tutorial to provide you with a hands-on introduction to the basic features of the
applications.

1. Automatically Creating Embroidery Patterns

1-1. Using the Auto Punch Function c page 19
In this section, we will use the Auto Punch function in Layout & Editing to automatically convert an
image to an embroidery pattern.
1-2. Using a Photo Stitch Function c page 25
In this section, we will use one of the Photo Stitch functions to create a more realistic embroidery
pattern from a image.

2. Creating and Editing Embroidery Patterns

2-1. Using Design Center c page 30
In this section, we will use Design Center to manually create an embroidery pattern from an image
using a four-stage procedure.
2-2. Using Layout & Editing c page 39
In this section, the embroidery pattern created in Design Center will be imported into Layout & Editing,
where a few objects will be added and the layout will be rearranged.
2-3. Using Programmable Stitch Creator c page 54
In this section, we will learn how to use Programmable Stitch Creator to edit a stitch in order to create
a custom stitch pattern.

3. Creating Large-Size Embroidery Patterns

3-1. Designing a large-size embroidery pattern c page 59
In this section, we will design an embroidery pattern that is too large to be sewn in a normal
embroidery hoop and therefore must be divided into sections.
3-2. Embroidering large-size embroidery patterns c page 63
In this section, we will sew the separate sections of the embroidery pattern to create large-size
embroidery.

18
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 19 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Automatically Creating Embroidery Patterns

Basic Operation
Using the Auto Punch Function
In this section, we are going to automatically create an embroidery pattern from an image.
Follow the instructions in this section step by step. If you have to interrupt this exercise for any reason, it is
recommended to save the file (refer to Step 6, “Saving the embroidery pattern”, on page 23). You will be able
to retrieve it later and resume your work.
The complete procedure will take you through the different steps of a normal working session using the Auto
Punch function.

Step 1 Starting up Layout & Editing page 19

Step 2 Opening an image file page 20
Step 3 Adjusting the size and position of the image page 21
Step 4 Automatically converting the image to an embroidery pattern page 21
Step 5 Displaying a preview of the embroidery pattern page 22
Step 6 Saving the embroidery pattern page 23
Step 7 Transferring the pattern to an original card page 24
Step 8 Quitting Layout & Editing page 24

Step 1
Starting up Layout & Editing
1. Click , select All Programs, then
PE-DESIGN Ver.6. Select Layout & Editing
to open the Layout & Editing window.

b Memo:
If a shortcut for Layout & Editing was
created, for example, on the desktop,
double-click it to start up the application.

→ The Layout & Editing window appears.

b Memo:
• To fill the entire screen with the Layout &
Editing window, click the maximize button
on the right end of the title bar.
• At this time, you can change the Design
Page properties by using the menu
command Option – Design Page
Property. (For more details, refer to
page 77.) For this example, we will not
change the Design Page settings.

19
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 20 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Automatically Creating Embroidery Patterns

Title bar Close button

Menu bar
Maximize button
Toolbar
Minimize button
Sewing Attributes bar
Tool Box

Work area

Design Page

Reference Window

Status bar

3. Select the sample file tulip.bmp in the ClipArt

Step 2 folder.
Opening an image file
First, we need to open the image that will be b Memo:
converted into the embroidery pattern. If the Preview check box is selected, the
contents of the selected file will appear in the
1. Click Image on the menu bar, point to Input, Preview box.
and then click from File on the submenu.
4. Click Open to open the image file and to close
the dialog box.

b Memo:
Double-clicking the file name also adds the
image to the work area and closes the dialog
box.

→ The image appears in the work area.

→ An Open an image file dialog box similar

to the one shown below appears.

2. Double-click the ClipArt folder to open it.

20
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 21 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Automatically Creating Embroidery Patterns

5. Drag the image to the desired location.

Step 3
Adjusting the size and position

Basic Operation
of the image
1. Click Image on the menu bar, and then click
Modify.
→ Handles appear around the image.

Handles
Step 4
Automatically converting the
image to an embroidery pattern
1. Click Image on the menu bar, and then click
Status bar Image to Stitch Wizard.

b Memo:
The status bar shows the dimensions (width
and height) of the image.

2. Move the pointer over a handle.

→ The shape of the pointer changes to
, , , or , depending
on the handle that the pointer is over.

b Memo:
An alternate method is to click the Toolbar
button indicated below.
• is for scaling the width.
• is for scaling the height. Image to Stitch Wizard

• and are for scaling both → The Select Stitch Method for Image dia-
dimensions at the same time. log box appears.

3. Drag the handle to adjust the selected image

to the desired size.

4. Move the pointer over the selected image.

→ The shape of the pointer changes to .

2. Select Auto Punch, and then click Next.

→ The image is analyzed, and the resulting
image is displayed in the Image Analysis
dialog box.

21
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 22 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Automatically Creating Embroidery Patterns

→ The image is converted to an embroidery

b Memo: pattern, which is displayed in the Design
The following stitch methods are also Page.
available.
• Photo Stitch 1 (Color and Mono)
Refer to page 116 for more details on the
Color setting and to page 120 for more
details on the Mono setting.
• Photo Stitch 2 (Color and Mono)
Refer to page 122 for more details on the
Color setting and to page 124 for more
details on the Mono setting.
• Cross Stitch
For more details, refer to page 125.
• Design Center
For more details, refer to “Using Design
Center” on page 30.

Step 5
Displaying a preview of the
embroidery pattern
You can display a preview of the embroidery
pattern in order to see how the stitching is
connected, or you can display a realistic preview
of the embroidery pattern in order to see how the
pattern will appear once it is sewn.

1. Click Display on the menu bar, and then click

Preview.
An alternate method is to click the Toolbar
button indicated below.

Preview

→ A preview of the embroidery pattern ap-

b Memo:
pears.
• Various settings are available for
converting the image to an embroidery
pattern. (For more details on the various
settings, refer to page 115.) After changing
the settings, click Retry to display the
image with the new settings applied.
• Areas of the image that will not be
converted to the embroidery pattern
appear with a crosshatch pattern. Click
each area to select whether or not it should
be converted.

3. Click Finish.

22
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 23 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Automatically Creating Embroidery Patterns

b Memo: Step 6
Saving the embroidery pattern

Basic Operation
• To zoom in (or out), click (or ) on
the Tool Box, and then click the desired Once the embroidery pattern is finished, you may
area of the embroidery pattern. want to save it in order to retrieve it later.
• To display, hide, or display a faded copy of
the original image, which remains in the 1. Click File on the menu bar, and then click
work area, click Image on the menu bar, Save.
point to Display Image, and then click the
An alternate method is to click the Toolbar
desired display setting.
button indicated below.
• To display the original image, click
On.
• To display a faded copy of the image, Save
click Faded.
• To hide the original image, click Off. → If the pattern has already been saved at
least once, the file is saved immediately.
2. To display a realistic preview of the entire
embroidery pattern, click Display on the menu
b Memo:
bar, and then click Realistic Preview. To save the file with a different name, use the
An alternate method is to click the Toolbar menu command File – Save As instead.
button indicated below.
→ If no file name has been specified or if the
file cannot be found, the Save As dialog
Realistic Preview box appears.
→ A realistic preview of the embroidery pat-
tern appears.

2. Select the drive and the folder, and then type

in the file name.

3. Click Save to save the pattern.

b Memo:
b Memo: • To quit the operation, click Cancel.
• If a file already exists with the name
To zoom in (or out), click (or ) on the specified in the Save As dialog box, the
Tool Box, and then click the desired area of following message appears.
the embroidery pattern.

a Note:
The embroidery pattern cannot be edited
while the realistic preview is displayed.
• To overwrite the file, click Yes. The
new file name appears in the title bar
3. To leave the realistic preview display, repeat of the Layout & Editing window.
step 2., or press the Esc key. • If you do not want to overwrite the
existing file, click No. You can then
enter a different file name.

23
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 24 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Automatically Creating Embroidery Patterns

3. Click OK.
Step 7
Transferring the pattern to an → The following message appears.
original card
Before you can actually sew the embroidery
pattern, you must transfer the pattern to a sewing
machine. Transfer the embroidery pattern to the
sewing machine using media of the type used by
your machine, for example, original cards, floppy
disks, CompactFlash cards, or USB media. For
this example, we will transfer the pattern to an b Memo:
original card. To quit the operation, click Cancel.

1. Insert an original card into the USB card writer

module. a Note:
If the card writer module is not correctly
a Note: connected or powered, or if the original card
is not inserted or is defective, an error
The original card is inserted correctly when
message will appear. For more details, refer
you hear it snap into place.
to “Writing an embroidery pattern to an
original card” on page 195.
2. Click File on the menu bar, point to Write to
Card, and then click Current Design on the 4. Click OK to close the message.
submenu.
An alternate method is to click the Toolbar
button indicated below. Step 8
Quitting Layout & Editing
Write to Card 1. Click File on the menu bar, and then click Exit.

→ The following message appears. → The Layout & Editing window closes.

b Memo:
Layout & Editing can also be closed by
clicking the close button on the right end of
the title bar.

a Note:
If the original card is not brand new, make
sure that the patterns already stored on the
card are no longer needed.

24
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 25 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Automatically Creating Embroidery Patterns

Using a Photo Stitch Function

Basic Operation
In this section, we are going to automatically create a more realistic embroidery pattern from a photo.
Follow the instructions in this section step by step. If you have to interrupt this exercise for any reason, it is
recommended to save the file (refer to Step 6, “Saving the embroidery pattern”, on page 23). You will be able
to retrieve it later and resume your work.
The complete procedure will take you through the different steps of a normal working session using one of the
Photo Stitch functions.

Step 1 Starting up Layout & Editing page 25

Step 2 Opening an image file page 26
Step 3 Adjusting the size and position of the image page 27
Step 4 Automatically converting the image to an embroidery pattern page 27

Step 1
Starting up Layout & Editing
1. Click , select All Programs, then
PE-DESIGN Ver. 6. Select Layout & Editing
to open the Layout & Editing window.

b Memo:
If a shortcut for Layout & Editing was
created, for example, on the desktop,
double-click it to start up the application.

→ The Layout & Editing window appears.

b Memo:
• To fill the entire screen with the Layout &
Editing window, click the maximize button
on the right end of the title bar.
• At this time, you can change the Design
Page properties by using the menu
command Option – Design Page
Property. (For more details, refer to
page 77.) For this example, we will not
change the Design Page settings.

25
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 26 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Automatically Creating Embroidery Patterns

Title bar Close button

Menu bar
Toolbar Maximize button
Sewing Attributes bar Minimize button

Tool Box
Work area

Design Page
Reference Window

Status bar

3. Select the sample file girl.bmp in the Photo

Step 2 folder.
Opening an image file
First, we need to open the image that will be b Memo:
converted into an embroidery pattern. If the Preview check box is selected, the
contents of the selected file will appear in the
1. Click Image on the menu bar, point to Input, Preview box.
and then click from File on the submenu.
4. Click Open to open the image file and to close
the dialog box.

b Memo:
Double-clicking the file name also adds the
image to the work area and closes the dialog
box.

→ The image appears in the work area.

→ The Open an image file dialog box ap-

pears.

2. Double-click the Photo folder to open it.

26
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 27 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Automatically Creating Embroidery Patterns

Step 3 Step 4
Adjusting the size and position Automatically converting the

Basic Operation
of the image image to an embroidery pattern
1. Click Image on the menu bar, and then click 1. Click Image on the menu bar, and then click
Modify. Image to Stitch Wizard.
→ Handles appear around the image.

Handles

An alternate method is to click the Toolbar

Status bar button indicated below.

b Memo: Image to Stitch Wizard

The status bar shows the dimensions (width
and height) of the image. → The Select Stitch Method for Image dia-
log box appears.

2. Adjust the selected image to the desired size,

and move it to the desired location.

c For more details, refer to , “Changing the

Size and Position of the Image”, on page
114.

27
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 28 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Automatically Creating Embroidery Patterns

2. Select Photo Stitch 1, then Color, and then 4. In the image preview box, move the handles of
click Next. the mask until it surrounds the desired part of
→ The Select Mask dialog box appears. the image to be converted to an embroidery
pattern.

b Memo:
b Memo:
The following stitch methods are also
available. Any part of the image that is outside of the
• Auto Punch mask will not be converted to an embroidery
For more details, refer to page 115. pattern.
• Photo Stitch 1 (Mono)
For more details on the Mono setting, refer 5. Click Next.
to page 120.
• Photo Stitch 2 (Color and Mono) → The image is analyzed, and the Check
Refer to page 122 for more details on the Mask Shape dialog box appears.
Color setting and to page 124 for more
details on the Mono setting.
• Cross Stitch
For more details, refer to page 125.
• Design Center
For more details, refer to “Using Design
Center” on page 30.

3. From the list at the bottom of the dialog box,

select the desired shape that the image will be
trimmed to.

28
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 29 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Automatically Creating Embroidery Patterns

6. If the shape and position of the mask are as 8. Click Finish.

desired, click Next. → The embroidery pattern is displayed in the

Basic Operation
→ The Photo Stitch 1 Parameters dialog Design Page.
box appears.

c For details on previewing the embroidery

pattern, refer to Step 5, “Displaying a
preview of the embroidery pattern”, on
page 22.

c For details on saving the embroidery

pattern as a file, refer to Step 6, “Saving
the embroidery pattern”, on page 23.

c For details on transferring the embroidery

pattern to an original card, refer to Step 7,
“Transferring the pattern to an original
b Memo: card”, on page 24.
Various settings are available for converting
the image to an embroidery pattern. (For
more details on the various settings, refer to
page 116.)

7. Click Next.
→ The image is converted to an embroidery
pattern, which is displayed in the Preview
dialog box.

29
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 30 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Creating and Editing Embroidery Patterns

Using Design Center

In this section, we are going to manually create an embroidery pattern from an image using a four-stage
procedure. This pattern will be used later as the stepping stone to create a more complex embroidery pattern.
Follow the instructions in this section step by step. If you have to interrupt this exercise for any reason, it is
recommended to save the file (refer to Step 9, “Saving the file”, on page 38). You will be able to retrieve it later
and resume your work.
The complete procedure will take you through the different steps of a normal working session with Design
Center and will introduce you to its most important features.

Step 1 Starting up Design Center page 30

Step 2 Opening an image file page 31
Step 3 Continuing to stage 2 (Line Image stage) page 31
Step 4 Editing lines page 32
Step 5 Continuing to stage 3 (Figure Handle stage) page 33
Step 6 Continuing to stage 4 (Sew Setting stage) page 34
Step 7 Specifying sewing attributes page 34
Step 8 Previewing the image page 37
Step 9 Saving the file page 38

→ The How do you want to produce em-

Step 1 broidery? dialog box and the Design
Starting up Design Center Center window appear.

1. Click , select All Programs, then

PE-DESIGN Ver.6. Select Design Center to
open the Design Center window.

b Memo:
If a shortcut for Design Center was created,
for example, on the desktop, double-click it to
start up the application.

b Memo:
To fill the entire screen with the Design
Center window, click the maximize button on
the right end of the title bar.

30
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 31 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Creating and Editing Embroidery Patterns

4. Click Open to open the image file and to close

Step 2 the dialog box.
Opening an image file

Basic Operation
First, we need to open the image that will be used b Memo:
to create the embroidery pattern. Double-clicking the file name also adds the
image to the work area and closes the dialog
1. In the How do you want to produce box.

embroidery? dialog box, click . → The image appears in the Design Page
and in the Cut out to Line Image dialog
→ The From Image dialog box appears. box.

2. Click .
Step 3
→ The Open dialog box appears. Continuing to stage 2 (Line
Image stage)
After opening the image, we will continue to stage
2 (Line Image stage), where we will select the
color(s) that will be used to create the line image
(outline of the image).

b Memo:
If the wizard is not being used, click Stage on
the menu bar, and then click To Line Image.
b Memo: An alternate method is to click the Toolbar
button indicated below.
The Open dialog box can also be displayed
by selecting the menu command Open – File
in Design Center.
To Line Image

3. Select the sample file Flower.bmp in the Data

folder. 1. Move the pointer over the image in the Cut
out to Line Image dialog box.
b Memo: → The shape of the pointer changes to .
If the Preview check box is selected, the
contents of the selected file will appear in the
Preview box.
b Memo:
To display the image enlarged (or reduced),
move the ZOOM slider up (or down). When
the image is enlarged, you can scroll through
it to display different parts.

31
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 32 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Creating and Editing Embroidery Patterns

2. Click any part of the outline.

Step 4
→ The selected color appears in the top box Editing lines
under Pick Colors, and appears in the
check box to show that the color is selected. At this time, you might need to correct a few lines
in the line image. You should make sure that
regions are completely enclosed by either a single
closed line or intersecting lines. You may also
want to edit the line image and either add or
remove some details. You can do this at this time
using the pens and erasers in the Tool Box.

In this example, we are going to display the line

image enlarged to make editing easier, then use
an eraser to remove some of the outline.

1. Click .

b Memo: → When the pointer is moved over the work

area, the shape of the pointer changes to
• If the image contains outlines of different
colors, you can repeat step 2. to select up .
to five colors. If more than five colors are
selected, only the last five colors selected 2. Click the line image.
remain in the list.
• To deselect a color, clear the
corresponding check box. b Memo:
• To adjust the color tone and reduce image • To further enlarge the line image, repeat
noise (distortions), click Image Tune. (For step 2.
more details, refer to page 74.) • To zoom in on a specific area, move the
pointer near the desired area, and then
3. Click Preview to preview the line image in the drag the pointer diagonally over the
desired area. A dotted box appears as you
Design Page. drag the pointer, and the selected area is
enlarged when the mouse button is
b Memo: released.
To quit the operation and go back to stage 1 For more details on the Zoom buttons in
(Original Image stage), click Cancel. the Tool Box, refer to page 234.

4. When the line image appears as desired, click

OK. 3. Click on the Tool Box.
→ The line image is displayed in the Design
Page.

→ When the pointer is moved over the work

area, the shape of the pointer changes to

b Memo: .
At this time, the pattern can be saved as a .pel file. For
details, refer to Step 9, “Saving the file”, on page 38.

32
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 33 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Creating and Editing Embroidery Patterns

4. Move the pointer over the line that you want to

erase, and then hold down the right mouse
b Memo:

Basic Operation
button. To select how the reduced line image is
displayed:
→ The shape of the pointer changes to
1) Click on the Tool Box.
. → When the pointer is moved over the
work area, the shape of the pointer
5. Carefully drag the pointer to erase the line. changes to .

6. Repeat steps 4. and 5. to delete a few 2) Click the Design Page.

leaves. 3) To further reduce the line image, repeat
step 2).

Step 5
Continuing to stage 3 (Figure
Handle stage)
In stage 2 (Line Image stage), the line image is
simply a collection of dots (or pixels). Editing in
stage 2 means adding or removing black dots.
When you move to stage 3 (Figure Handle stage),
the application automatically connects the dots to
create lines, which can be edited.

b Memo: 1. Click Stage on the menu bar, and then click

• If you deleted part of the outline by To Figure Handle.
mistake, you may need to redraw some of An alternate method is to click the Toolbar
lines. To do this, simply hold down the left
button indicated below.
mouse button and start drawing the line.
• If you are not satisfied with your editing,
select the menu command Stage – To To Figure Handle
Original Image to go back to stage 1
(Original Image stage), and then create → The Figure Object Conversion Setting
the line image and start editing again. dialog box appears.

7. After editing the line image, click on the

Tool Box to view the entire line image so that
it fits in the window.
→ The Design Page fills the Design Center
window.

33
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 34 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Creating and Editing Embroidery Patterns

→ The Tool Box for stage 4 (Sew Setting

b Memo: stage) appears.
Various settings are available for converting
the line image to a figure handle image. (For
more details on the various settings, refer to
page 76.) In addition, this dialog box allows
you to preview how the image will fit in the
selected Design Page (the size of the area to
be sewn).

2. Click OK.
→ The line image is converted to a figure
handle image, which is displayed in the
Design Page.

In this stage, you can set and check the

sewing attributes for each part of the pattern.
You can also specify hole sewing for larger
regions that completely enclose smaller ones
in order to avoid sewing the same region
twice. Other tools are available for zooming.

b Memo:
• To zoom in (or out), click (or ) on
the Tool Box, and then click the desired
area of the embroidery pattern, as in stage
3 (Figure Handle stage).
b Memo: • To display the Design Page so that it fits
• The Tool Box for stage 3 (Figure Handle the window, click on the Tool Box.
stage) contains various editing tools for
drawing lines, moving, deleting or inserting
points as well as zooming. For details on
the editing tools, refer to page 234. Step 7
• At this time, you can change the Design Specifying sewing attributes
Page properties by using the menu
command Option – Design Page We are now going to apply sewing attributes to
Property. (For more details, refer to the different parts of the pattern.
page 77.)
■ Specifying sewing attributes for
the outline
Step 6
Continuing to stage 4 (Sew 1. Click on the Tool Box.
Setting stage)
1. Click Stage on the menu bar, and then click
To Sew Setting.
An alternate method is to click the Toolbar
button indicated below.

To Sew Setting

34
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 35 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Creating and Editing Embroidery Patterns

→ The shape of the pointer changes to → The Sewing Attribute Setting dialog box
appears, containing the default settings
, and the Sewing Attributes bar ap- for the selected outline sew type.

Basic Operation
pears as shown below.

2. To change the outline color, click the Line

color button ( ) on the Sewing Attributes
bar, click the desired color in the Line Thread
Color dialog box that appeared, and then click
Close.

5. To change the width from 2.0 mm to 1.5 mm,

move the slider to the left until Zigzag width is
set to 1.5.

b Memo:
To close the dialog box, click Close.

6. Click the outline of the pattern to apply the

attributes (color, sew type and width) to it.
→ The image now appears as shown below
b Memo: with “marching lines” along the outline.
To move the dialog box to a more convenient
place on the screen, move the pointer over
the title bar, and then drag the dialog box.

→ The Line color button ( ) on the Sew-

ing Attributes bar is displayed in the se-
lected color.

3. To change the sew type to the zigzag stitch,

click in the Line sew type selector

( ) on the Sewing Attributes bar,

and then click Zigzag Stitch.

4. To change the attributes for the zigzag stitch, b Memo:

click Sew on the menu bar, and then click If you think that the width of the outline is too
Sewing Attribute. thick, you can change it again. To change the
An alternate method is to click the Toolbar width of the outline, repeat step 5., and then
button indicated below. click the outline to apply the new setting. (If
the Sewing Attribute Setting dialog box is
not displayed, right-click the outline.)
Sewing Attribute

35
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 36 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Creating and Editing Embroidery Patterns

■ Specifying sewing attributes for 5. To change the direction of the fill stitching,
the regions click Constant under Direction, move the
pointer over the red arrow inside of the circle
1. Click on the Tool Box. under Constant, and then drag the red arrow
to the desired angle.
→ The shape of the pointer changes to
b Memo:
, and the Sewing Attributes bar ap- • When the pointer is moved over the red
pears as shown below.
arrow, its shape changes to .
• Using different directions for different
regions can add contrast and improve the
appearance of the embroidery.
For the leaves
Direction set to 45°
2. Click the Region color button ( ) on the
Sewing Attributes bar, click the color LEAF
GREEN in the Region Thread Color dialog
box that appeared, and then click Close.
→ The Region color button ( ) on the
Sewing Attributes bar is displayed in the
selected color.

3. Click in the Region sew type selector Direction set to 90°

( ) on the Sewing Attributes bar,

and then click Fill Stitch.

4. To change the attributes for the fill stitch, click

Sew on the menu bar, and then click Sewing
Attribute.
An alternate method is to click the Toolbar
button indicated below. Direction set to 135°

Sewing Attribute

→ The Sewing Attribute Setting dialog box

appears, containing the default settings
for the selected region sew type.

6. Click the regions of the leaves to which you

want to apply the attributes.
→ “Marching lines” appear around the se-
lected region.

7. Repeat steps 5. and 6. until attributes are

applied to all leaves.

36
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 37 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Creating and Editing Embroidery Patterns

For the other side of the petals

a Note:
9. Select the color RED, set the stitching

Basic Operation
Sewing attributes cannot be applied to
regions that are not fully enclosed, as shown direction, and then click each region where
in the illustration of the leaf below. you want to apply the attributes.

Step 8
Previewing the image
You can display a preview of the embroidery
If the attributes cannot be applied to a pattern in order to see how the stitching is
region, go back to stage 3 (Figure Handle connected, or you can display a realistic preview
stage) and make sure that region is closed. of the embroidery pattern in order to see how the
Edit any broken lines with the Point Edit tool. pattern will appear once it is sewn. (The
For details on editing the figure handle embroidery pattern can only be previewed in
image, refer to “Editing Points in Outlines” on stage 4 (Sew Setting stage) only.)
page 81.
1. To display a preview of the embroidery
After applying the sewing attributes to the pattern, click Display on the menu bar, and
leaves, the image appears as shown below. then click Preview.
An alternate method is to click the Toolbar
button indicated below.

Preview

→ A preview of the embroidery pattern ap-

pears.

For one side of the petals

8. Select the color CARMINE, set the stitching
direction, and then click each region where
you want to apply the attributes.

b Memo:
To zoom in (or out), click (or ) on the
Tool Box, and then click the desired area of
the embroidery pattern.

2. To leave the preview display, repeat step 1.,

or press the Esc key.

a Note:
The embroidery pattern cannot be edited
while the preview is displayed.

37
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 38 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Creating and Editing Embroidery Patterns

3. To display a realistic preview of the

embroidery pattern, click Display on the menu
Step 9
bar, and then click Realistic Preview. Saving the file
An alternate method is to click the Toolbar Since this embroidery pattern will be used as the
button indicated below. basis of a more complex embroidery picture, we
need to save it.

Realistic Preview 1. Click File on the menu bar, and then click
→ A realistic preview of the embroidery pat- Save As.
tern appears. → The Save As dialog box appears.

b Memo:
To overwrite the original file in the original
folder, use the menu command File – Save
b Memo: instead.

To zoom in (or out), click (or ) on the

Tool Box, and then click the desired area of 2. The default name Flower.pem is displayed.
the embroidery pattern.
3. If necessary, change the drive and folder.

4. To leave the realistic preview display, repeat 4. Click Save to save the file.
step 3., or press the Esc key.
b Memo:
a Note: .pem files cannot be written to original cards.
Import them into Layout & Editing first. (For
• The embroidery pattern cannot be edited details, refer to “Importing embroidery
while the realistic preview is displayed. patterns from Design Center” on page 128.)
• The Realistic Preview function cannot
display a clean preview of the pattern if the
monitor is set to 256 colors or less. The
monitor should be set to at least 16-bit
High Color (65536 colors).

38
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 39 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Creating and Editing Embroidery Patterns

Using Layout & Editing

Basic Operation
In this section, we are going to complete the embroidery pattern by combining a pattern imported from Design
Center with objects created using Layout & Editing, one of which will have a programmable fill stitch applied
to it.
Follow the instructions in this section step by step. If you have to interrupt this exercise for any reason, it is
recommended to save the file (refer to Step 14, “Saving the file”, on page 53). You will be able to retrieve it
later and resume your work.
The complete procedure will take you through the different steps of a normal working session with Layout &
Editing and will introduce you to some of its most important features.

Step 1 Importing embroidery patterns from Design Center page 39

Step 2 Adjusting the size and position of the embroidery pattern page 40
Step 3 Adding shapes page 41
Step 4 Adding text page 43
Step 5 Fitting the text around the oval page 44
Step 6 Adding a circle for the center of the sun page 45
Step 7 Selecting a programmable fill stitch page 46
Step 8 Adding a closed broken line for the sun’s rays page 48
Step 9 Changing the sewing order of sun and rays page 49
Step 10 Adjusting the rays page 50
Step 11 Setting hole sewing page 50
Step 12 Previewing the embroidery pattern page 51
Step 13 Transferring the pattern to an original card page 52
Step 14 Saving the file page 53
Step 15 Quitting Layout & Editing page 53

At the end of this session, the embroidery pattern will appear as shown below.

Layout & Editing, the .pem file must be opened in

Step 1 Design Center.
Importing embroidery patterns
from Design Center b Memo:
The first object of the embroidery pattern will be If Design Center has not been started up,
the file Flower.pem, which we created in Design refer to “Starting up Design Center” on
Center. In order to import an embroidery pattern page 30.
from Design Center into the Design Page of

39
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 40 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Creating and Editing Embroidery Patterns

1. In Design Center, click File on the menu bar, An alternate method is to click the Toolbar
and then click Open. button indicated below.
→ An Open dialog box similar to the one
shown below appears.
from Design Center

→ The Import size dialog box appears.

2. Select Design Center PEM File (*.PEM) in

the Files of type box, the sample file
Flower.pem in the Data folder, and then click 5. In the Magnification box, type or select 70%,
Open. and then click Import.
→ The embroidery pattern is imported into
b Memo: the Design Page of Layout & Editing.
If the Preview check box is selected, the
contents of the selected file will appear in the
Preview box.

a Note:
Be sure to select a .pem file saved in stage
4 (Sew Setting stage). Handles
You cannot import another file type from
Design Center.

→ The embroidery pattern is displayed in the

Design Page of Design Center.

b Memo:
• The dotted line and the handles that
appear around the embroidery pattern
show that the pattern is selected.
• The status bar shows the dimensions
(width and height) of the selected pattern.

Step 2
Adjusting the size and position
of the embroidery pattern
3. Click Option on the menu bar, and then click When you import a pattern from Design Center,
Layout & Editing to display the Layout & Layout & Editing puts the pattern at the center of
Editing window. the Design Page. We are now going to change the
size of the imported pattern and move it to a
4. In Layout & Editing, click File on the menu bar, different location.
point to Import, and then click from Design
Center on the submenu. 1. Click on the Tool Box.

→ The shape of the pointer changes to

40
Basic_01.fm Page 41 Friday, July 9, 2004 1:43 PM

Creating and Editing Embroidery Patterns

2. Move the pointer over a handle. → The shape of the pointer changes to
→ The shape of the pointer changes to , and the Sewing Attributes bar ap-

Basic Operation
, , , or , depending pears as shown below.
on the handle that the pointer is over.

b Memo:
Arc shape Line sew Region sew
• is for scaling the width.
• is for scaling the height. When the pointer is positioned over a button or
selector in the Sewing Attributes bar, a label
• and are for scaling both indicating the name of that element appears.
dimensions at the same time.
b Memo:
3. Drag the handle to adjust the selected pattern • The Arc shape selector allows you to
select the shape to be drawn. For
to the desired size. example, click Circle to draw circles and
ovals. The other options are used to draw
b Memo: other curved shapes such as arcs. For
To maintain the stitch density and fill pattern, more details, refer to “Drawing Circles and
hold down the Ctrl key while dragging a Arcs” on page 145.
handle. (For more details, refer to “Enlarging/ • The line sewing and region sewing
reducing embroidery patterns” on page 14.) attributes are used to select the sew type
and thread color for the outline (line
sewing) and for the inside area (region
4. Move the pointer over the selected pattern. sewing).

→ The shape of the pointer changes to . Line sew type

Region sew
Line color
Region color
Line sew
5. Drag the pattern to the desired location. Region sew type

2. To change the shape of the object to be

Step 3 drawn, click the Arc shape selector, and then
Adding shapes select the desired shape.
For this example, since we will be using the
The next object to add to our embroidery pattern
default shape Circle, you do not need to
will be an oval. Since this oval will be used only as
change the setting in the Arc shape selector.
a guide for arranging the text that we will add later,
we must set it so that it is not sewn.
a Note:
■ To add the oval When drawing a circle or other curved
shape, select the shape before drawing. You
cannot, for example, draw a circle, then
1. Click on the Tool Box.
change it to an arc afterward.

41
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 42 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Creating and Editing Embroidery Patterns

3. To cancel line sewing (outline), click the Line ■ To change the size of the oval
sew button. If your oval looks very different from the one shown
→ The Line color button and the Line sew above, modify its size as described below.
type selector disappear.
1. Click on the Tool Box.
→ The shape of the pointer changes to

b Memo: .
If the Line sew button is clicked, causing the
Line color button and the Line sew type 2. Click the oval to select it.
selector to disappear, the outline will not be
sewn. If you want to sew the outline, click the 3. Move the pointer over one of the handles of
Line sew button again to display the Line the oval.
color button and the Line sew type selector. → The shape of the pointer changes to
, , or , depending
4. To cancel region sewing (inside area), click
on the handle that the pointer is over.
the Region sew button.
→ The Region color button and Region b Memo:
sew type selector disappear.
• is for scaling the width.
• is for scaling the height.

5. To draw the oval, drag the pointer in the • and are for scaling both
Design Page. dimensions at the same time.

→ The oval (outline and inside area) ap-

pears when the mouse button is released. 4. Drag the handle to adjust the selected pattern
to the desired size.

b Memo:

• If you want to delete the oval, click on

■ To center the flower pattern in the
the Tool Box, click the oval to select it, and oval
then press the Delete key or select the If the flower pattern is not centered in the oval, move
menu command Edit – Delete. the oval as described below.
• If you want to change the color or sew type
of the oval after drawing it, click on
1. Click on the Tool Box.
the Tool Box, click the oval to select it, and → The shape of the pointer changes to
then click the Line sew or Region sew
button. The current attributes for the oval .
appear in the Sewing Attributes bar, where
they can be changed.

42
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 43 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Creating and Editing Embroidery Patterns

2. Click the oval to select it. 3. To change the text size, click in the Text Size
selector on the Sewing Attributes bar, and
→ The shape of the pointer changes to

Basic Operation
. then select the desired size for the text.
For this example, we will keep the default size
3. Drag the oval to its final location.
of 10.0 mm

b Memo:
The value indicates the height of the
characters.

Step 4
Adding text 4. To change the text color, click the Text body

The next object to add to our embroidery pattern color button ( ) on the Sewing Attributes
is text. bar, click the desired color in the Region
Thread Color dialog box that appeared, and
then click Close.
1. Click on the Tool Box, and then click
For this example, since we will be using the
. default color BLACK, you do not need to
change the text color setting.
→ The shape of the pointer changes to
5. To change the text sew type, click in the Text
body sew type selector, and then select the
, and the Sewing Attributes bar ap-
desired sew type for the text.
pears as shown below.
For this example, we will use the default sew
type Satin stitch.
Text body color
Font Text Size Text body sew type

2. To change the font, click in the Font selector

on the Sewing Attributes bar, and then select
the desired font.
b Memo:
For this example, since we will be using the For more precise setting of the text
default font 01, you do not need to change the attributes, refer to “Specifying text attributes”
font setting. on page 157.

6. To enter the text, click in the Design Page.

Since we can move the text after creating it,
any place in the Design Page can be clicked.

43
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 44 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Creating and Editing Embroidery Patterns

→ The Edit Text Letters dialog box ap-

pears. b Memo:
• If you want to edit the entered text, click
on the Tool Box, click the text to
select it, and then select the menu
command Text – Edit Letters. Edit the
text in the Edit Text Letters dialog box
that appeared.
• If you want to delete the text, select it, and
then press the Delete key.
• If you want to change the text color, font or
other attributes after entering the text, click
on the Tool Box, click the text to
select it, and then change the settings on
the Sewing Attributes bar.

Step 5
Fitting the text around the oval
7. Type your text (“ROSE”, for this example). Here, we are going to fit the text around the oval.

b Memo: 1. Click on the Tool Box.

• You can also enter a character by
selecting it in the character table, then → The shape of the pointer changes to
clicking Insert, or simply by double-
clicking it. This is particularly useful if you .
have to enter accented characters that are
not available on your keyboard. 2. Click the text to select it.
• To quit the operation, click Cancel.
3. Hold down the Ctrl key and click the oval to
select it.
8. Click OK.
→ Both the oval and the text are selected.
→ The text is displayed in the Design Page.

4. Click Text on the menu bar, and then click Fit

Text to Path Setting.
An alternate method is to click the Toolbar
button indicated below.

Fit Text to path

44
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 45 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Creating and Editing Embroidery Patterns

→ The Fit Text to Path Attribute Setting di-

alog box appears. Step 6
Adding a circle for the center of

Basic Operation
the sun
The next object to add will be a sun. We will first
draw a circle to get the basic shape, and then
change the color, sew type and width of the
outline and the color and sew type for the inside
area.

5. Click OK without changing any settings. 1. To draw a circle, hold down the Shift key

c For more details on these settings, refer

to “Specifying text arrangement” on
while drawing as described in “To add the
oval” on page 41.
page 158.
→ The text is now arranged on the oval. b Memo:
If you need to modify the size of the circle,
select it, and then drag a handle at one of the
corners.

2. Click on the Tool Box, and then click the

circle to select it.

3. To change the color and sew type for the

outline, click the Line sew button ( ) so

that the Line color button ( ) and the Line

b Memo:
sew type selector ( ) appear, and
then select a line color and sew type.
Moving the oval and text:
Once the text is arranged on the oval, you For this example, select the color BLACK,
can move both patterns as a group, without and leave the sew type set to Zigzag Stitch.
affecting their relative position, or you can
move the text alone to change its position on 4. To change the sewing attributes for the
the oval. outline, click Sew on the menu bar, and then
To move both patterns as a group: click Sewing Attribute Setting.
An alternate method is to click the Toolbar
1) Click on the Tool Box, and then button indicated below.
click the oval to select it.
→ The shape of the pointer changes to
. Sewing Attribute Set
2) Drag the oval.
→ The text moves together with the
oval.
To move the text along the oval:
1) Click on the Tool Box, and then
click the text to select it.
→ The shape of the pointer changes to
.
2) Drag the text.
→ The text only moves along the oval.

45
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 46 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Creating and Editing Embroidery Patterns

→ The Sewing Attribute Setting dialog box

appears. Step 7
Selecting a programmable fill stitch
Next, we will select a special fill stitch pattern for the
inside area of the circle, and then change its
settings. Programmable fill stitch patterns, which
can be created in Programmable Stitch Creator
(refer to “Using Programmable Stitch Creator” on
page 54), are arranged in a tile-like manner within
the selected regions, creating more decorative
stitching.

b Memo:
Make sure that the circle is still selected.

1. Select Prog. Fill Stitch in the Region sew

type selector ( ).

2. Click Sew on the menu bar, and then click

Sewing Attribute Setting.
An alternate method is to click the Toolbar
button indicated below.
5. To change the width from 2.0 mm, set Zigzag
width to 1.0, and then click Apply.
Sewing Attribute Set
6. To change the color for the region, click the
→ The Sewing Attribute Setting dialog box
Region sew button ( ) so that the Region
appears.
color button ( ) and the Region sew type
selector ( ) appear, and then
select a region color.
For this example, select the color LEMON
YELLOW.
→ The embroidery pattern appears as
shown below.

46
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 47 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Creating and Editing Embroidery Patterns

→ The Sewing Attribute Setting dialog box

3. Click under Programmable fill.
appears as shown below.
→ The Browse dialog box appears, allowing

Basic Operation
you to preview and browse through the
existing programmable fill stitch patterns.

a Note:
Only programmable fill stitch files, which
have the .pas extension, are listed.

4. From the stitch samples, click pat 07 to select

it, and then click OK. b Memo:
• The preview of the stitch pattern at the
→ The dialog box closes and a preview of bottom of the dialog box changes each
the selected stitch appears at the bottom time a setting is changed. This allows you
of the Sewing Attribute Setting dialog to see how each setting affects the pattern.
box. • To separately change the width and height
of the stitch pattern, click To Expert
mode, and then type or select the desired
b Memo: values in the appropriate boxes under
Double-clicking the stitch pattern also selects Programmable fill.
it and closes the dialog box.
6. To change the direction of the fill stitching,
5. To change the size of the programmable stitch click Constant under Direction, move the
pattern in Beginner Mode, set the size to 10 × pointer over the red arrow inside of the circle
10 mm (0.30 × 0.30 inch) by moving the slide under Constant, and then drag the red arrow
to the right. until 340 degrees is selected.

47
 Basic_01.fm Page 48 Friday, July 9, 2004 1:44 PM

Creating and Editing Embroidery Patterns

→ The Sewing Attribute Setting dialog box → The shape of the pointer changes to
appears as shown below.
, and the Sewing Attributes bar ap-
pears as shown below.

Path shape Line sewing Region sewing

2. Make sure that Close path is selected in the

Path shape selector.

b Memo:
When drawing a closed path, the first point
and the last point are automatically joined.
The pattern has an outline and an inside
area, and sewing attributes can be applied to
both.
With an open path, the broken line is left
open (the first and last point are not
automatically joined). The pattern will not
have a region, therefore you can only apply
sewing attributes to the outline.

c For more information on the different

settings for a programmable fill stitch,
refer to “Specifying sewing attributes” on
3. To change the color and sew type for the
page 171. outline, click the Line sew button ( ) so
7. Click Apply. that the Line color button ( ) and the Line
→ The stitch and its settings are applied to sew type selector ( ) appear, and
the inside area of the selected circle. then select a line color and sew type.

a Note: For this example, select the color RED, and

leave the sew type set to Zigzag Stitch.
The selected sewing attributes will be
applied to the regions of every object that will 4. To change the color for the inside area, click
be drawn, until the attributes are changed.
the Region sew button ( ) so that the

Step 8 Region color button ( ) and the Region

Adding a closed broken line for sew type selector ( ) appear,
the sun’s rays and then select a region color.
Now, let’s draw a few rays around the sun. There For this example, select the color
are, of course, many ways to do this. You could, VERMILION.
for example, draw a single straight line for each
ray. For this example, we will use a closed
polygonal line (broken line) to draw all of the rays
as a single star-shaped pattern.

1. Click on the Tool Box, and then click

48
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 49 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Creating and Editing Embroidery Patterns

5. To draw the rays of the sun around the circle

using the circle as a guide, click in the Design
Step 9
Changing the sewing order of

Basic Operation
Page to select the start point (1), continue
clicking in the Design Page to select every sun and rays
other corner (2 through L), and then double- Since we have drawn the closed broken line for the
click. sun’s rays after drawing the circle, the sun’s rays
3 are on top of the circle. In other words, the broken
1 5
sun’s rays are in the foreground. Since the pattern
is in the foreground, it will be sewn last. We need to
7
K change the sewing order so that the sun (circle) will
2 46
L 9 be sewn on top of the sun’s rays.
J 8
H 0 1. Click Sew on the menu bar, and then click
I
F D B Sewing Order/Color.
A
An alternate method is to click the Toolbar
G button indicated below.
C
E

b Memo:
Sewing Order/Color

To remove the last point that was entered, → The Sewing Order/Color dialog box
click the right mouse button. apears.

→ The embroidery pattern appears as

shown below.

2. Click the frame containing the region for the

sun’s rays to select it, and then drag the frame
to the left of the circle for the sun. (This part of
the sun will be sewn first.).

b Memo:
b Memo:
• If you want to delete the pattern, click When a frame in the Sewing Order/Color
on the Tool Box, click the pattern to select dialog box is selected, the buttons at the
it, and then press the Delete key or bottom of the dialog become available. The
select the menu command Edit – Delete. sewing order of the selected pattern object
• If you want to change the pattern shape, can also be changed by using these buttons.
color, or sew type after drawing it, click For more details, refer to “Checking and
Editing the Sewing Order/Color” on
on the Tool Box, click the pattern to page 184.
select it, and then change the settings on
the Sewing Attributes bar or in the Sewing
Attribute Setting dialog box.

49
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 50 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Creating and Editing Embroidery Patterns

3. Click the frame containing the outline for the 4. Drag the point to the new location.
sun’s rays to select it, and then drag the
selected frame between the region for the
sun’s rays and the circle for the sun.

4. Click OK.
→ The sun’s rays will be sewn before the sun
(circle).

If necessary, move the circle so that it looks

centered relative to the sun’s rays.

Step 10
Adjusting the rays
At this time, you might want to modify the rays.
You can do this by moving, deleting and adding
points in the closed broken line pattern.

1. Click on the Tool Box, and then click

c For details on adding and deleting points,
refer to “Inserting points” on page 136 and
. “Deleting points” on page 137.

→ The shape of the pointer changes to

Step 11
. Setting hole sewing
2. Click the sun’s rays to select it. If the sun is sewn according to the current
settings, the sun’s rays will be sewn first, and then
→ The points in the pattern appear as small the sun (circle) will be sewn on top of it. In order to
empty squares. avoid sewing the same region twice, you can
specify hole sewing for a larger region that
3. Click the point that you want to move.
completely encloses smaller ones. If hole sewing
→ The selected point appears as a small is specified, the part of the rays behind the circle
black square. will not be sewn.

50
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 51 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Creating and Editing Embroidery Patterns

1. Click on the Tool Box, and then click the Step 12

Previewing the embroidery

Basic Operation
sun’s circle to select it.
pattern
2. Hold down the Ctrl key and click the sun’s
You can display a preview of the embroidery
rays. pattern in order to see how the stitching is
→ The circle and the broken line are now se- connected, or you can display a realistic preview
lected together. of the embroidery pattern in order to see how the
pattern will appear once it is sewn. For example,
b Memo: you will be able to see that the part of the broken
If it is difficult to select the two patterns, drag line (sun rays) behind the circle is not sewn and
the pointer to draw a selection frame around how the selected programmable fill stitch will be
the patterns. sewn.

1. To display a preview of the embroidery

3. Click Sew on the menu bar, and then click Set
pattern, click Display on the menu bar, and
Hole Sewing. then click Preview.
→ The following message appears. An alternate method is to click the Toolbar
button indicated below.

Preview

→ A preview of the embroidery pattern ap-

pears.

a Note:
Hole sewing cannot be applied if one of the
patterns is not completely enclosed within
the other pattern.

4. Click OK to close the message.

a Note:
Patterns with hole sewing set cannot be
moved separately. To adjust their relative
positions, click on the Tool Box, select
one of the patterns, and then cancel hole
sewing by selecting the menu command b Memo:
Sew – Cancel Hole Sewing.
To zoom in (or out), click on the Tool
Box, click (or ), and then click the
b Memo: desired area of the embroidery pattern.
Points on the outlines can be edited
independently with the Point Edit tool. (For
details, refer to “Moving points” on page 135) 2. To display a realistic preview of the entire
embroidery pattern, deselect all objects in the
pattern by clicking in a blank area of the
c For more details, refer to “Specifying hole
sewing” on page 180. Design Page.
To display a realistic preview of a single object
or a group of objects, select the object(s).

51
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 52 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Creating and Editing Embroidery Patterns

3. Click Display on the menu bar, and then click

Realistic Preview.
Step 13
An alternate method is to click the Toolbar Transferring the pattern to an
button indicated below. original card
Before you can actually sew the embroidery
pattern, you must transfer the pattern to a sewing
Realistic Preview
machine. Transfer the embroidery pattern to the
→ A realistic preview of the embroidery pat- sewing machine using media of the type used by
tern appears. your machine, for example, original cards, floppy
disks, CompactFlash cards, or USB media. For
this example, we will transfer the pattern to an
original card.

1. Insert an original card into the USB card writer

module.

a Note:
The original card is inserted correctly when
you hear it snap into place.

2. Click File on the menu bar, point to Write to

Card, and then click Current Design on the
submenu.
b Memo: An alternate method is to click the Toolbar
To zoom in (or out), click on the Tool button indicated below.

Box, click (or ), and then click the

desired area of the embroidery pattern. Write to Card

→ The following message appears.

a Note:
If the original card is not brand new, make
sure that the patterns already stored on the
card are no longer needed.

a Note: 3. Click OK.

The embroidery pattern cannot be edited → The following message appears.
while the realistic preview is displayed.

4. To return to the previous display, repeat step

3., or press the Esc key.

52
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 53 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Creating and Editing Embroidery Patterns

b Memo: b Memo:
To quit the operation, click Cancel. • To quit the operation, click Cancel.

Basic Operation
• If a file already exists with the name
specified in the Save As dialog box, the
a Note: following message appears.
If the card writer module is not correctly
connected or powered, or if the original card
is not inserted or is defective, an error
message will appear. For more details, refer
to “Writing an embroidery pattern to an
original card” on page 195.
• To overwrite the file, click Yes. The
new file name appears in the title bar
4. Click OK to close the message. of the Layout & Editing window.
• If you do not want to overwrite the
existing file, click No. You can then
Step 14 enter a different file name.
Saving the file
Once the embroidery pattern is finished, you may
want to save it in order to retrieve it later. Step 15
Quitting Layout & Editing
1. Click File on the menu bar, and then click
Save. 1. Click File on the menu bar, and then click Exit.
An alternate method is to click the Toolbar → The Layout & Editing window closes.
button indicated below.
b Memo:
Layout & Editing can also be closed by
Save
clicking the close button on the right end of
the title bar.
→ If the pattern has already been saved at
least once, the file is saved immediately.

b Memo:
To save the file with a different name, use the
menu command File – Save As instead.

→ If no file name has been specified or if the

file cannot be found, the Save As dialog
box appears.

2. Select the drive and the folder, and then type

in the file name.

3. Click Save to save the pattern.

53
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 54 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Creating and Editing Embroidery Patterns

Using Programmable Stitch Creator

Programmable Stitch Creator allows you to design fill stitch and motif stitch patterns that can be applied as a
programmable fill stitch or motif stitch both in Design Center and Layout & Editing, resulting in more decorative
embroidery patterns. When applied to enclosed regions, the fill stitch or motif stitch pattern fills the region in a
tile-like manner. When applied to lines, the motif stitch pattern is repeated along the length of the line. In
addition, the fill stitch patterns can be applied as an individual stamp to enclosed regions. You can create your
own fill stitch and motif stitch patterns or use the many stitch patterns provided with this application, with or
without editing them.
In this section, we are going to edit an existing stitch pattern, and then apply embossing/engraving effects to it.
The complete procedure will take you through the different steps of a normal working session with
Programmable Stitch Creator and will introduce you to its most important features.
Follow the instructions in this section step by step. If you have to interrupt this exercise for any reason, it is
recommended to save the file (refer to Step 5, “Saving the edited stitch pattern”, on page 58). You will be able
to retrieve it later and resume your work.

Step 1 Starting up Programmable Stitch Creator page 54

Step 2 Opening a programmable stitch pattern page 55
Step 3 Drawing lines to edit the stitch pattern page 56
Step 4 Applying embossing/engraving effects page 57
Step 5 Saving the edited stitch pattern page 58
Step 6 Quitting Programmable Stitch Creator page 58

Step 1
Starting up Programmable Stitch
Creator
1. Click , select All Programs, then
PE-DESIGN Ver.6. Select Programmable
Stitch Creator.

b Memo:
If a shortcut for Programmable Stitch Creator
was created, for example, on the desktop,
double-click it to start up the application.

→ The Programmable Stitch Creator window

appears.

b Memo:
To fill the entire screen with the
Programmable Stitch Creator window, click
the maximize button on the right end of the
title bar.

54
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 55 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Creating and Editing Embroidery Patterns

Title bar Close button

Basic Operation
Menu bar
Maximize button
Toolbar
Minimize button

Tool Box

Work area

Preview window

Status bar

Step 2 b Memo:
Opening a programmable stitch If the Preview check box is selected, the
pattern contents of the selected file will appear in the
Preview box.
For this exercise, we will edit one of the
programmable fill stitch patterns provided with the
application. 3. Click Open to open the pattern file and to
close the dialog box.
1. Click File on the menu bar, and then click
Open.
An alternate method is to click the Toolbar
button indicated below.

Open

→ The Open dialog box appears.

2. Select the stitch pattern file wave1.pas in the

Pattern folder.

55
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 56 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Creating and Editing Embroidery Patterns

b Memo: Step 3
• Double-clicking the file name also adds the Drawing lines to edit the stitch
pattern to the work area and closes the pattern
dialog box.
• To preview the available .pas files in the Now, we are going to draw a lines between the
selected folder, click Browse. displayed ones using the Line tool of the Tool Box.

b Memo:
For this example, we will use the grid setting
Medium with which the stitch pattern was
saved. Grid settings should be selected
depending on how detailed you want to draw.
Select the grid setting Narrow for more
detailed stitches and the grid setting Wide for
more simple stitches. For more information
on the grid settings, refer to “Changing the
grid settings” on page 222.

1. Click on the Tool Box. Move the pointer

over the work area.
In the Browse dialog box that appeared,
click a stitch pattern to select it, and then → The shape of the pointer changes to
click Open (or double-click the pattern) to .
open the file and to close both the Open
and Browse dialog boxes.
• Opening a .pas file (programmable fill 2. Move the pointer to the second vertical grid
stitch pattern) automatically selects line to the right of the leftmost wave, and then
Programmable Fill mode. Opening a .pmf click the top edge of the work area.
file (motif stitch patterns) automatically
selects Motif mode. To change the type of b Memo:
stitch pattern to be created, use the
The horizontal and vertical lines that you
commands on the Mode menu.
draw on the work area always follow the grid.
The points that you create by clicking are
→ The stitch pattern appears in the work inserted at the intersection of the horizontal
area of Programmable Stitch Creator. and vertical grid lines, enabling you to draw
diagonal lines as well. Therefore, regardless
of where you click, a point will automatically
be inserted at the nearest intersection.

3. Move the pointer parallel to the wave, and

then click the second vertical grid line to the
right of the corner in the leftmost wave.

b Memo:
To remove the last point that was entered,
click the right mouse button.

4. Repeat step 3. until you reach the end of the

a Note: wave, and then double-click the bottom edge
You can see a preview of the stitch pattern in of the work area.
the Preview window.
5. Repeat steps 2. through 4. to add another
wave between the rightmost wave.

56
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 57 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Creating and Editing Embroidery Patterns

→ The pattern should appear as shown be- 5. Move the pointer along the bottom edge of the
low. work area, and then double-click the lower-

Basic Operation
right corner to draw a line along the bottom
edge of the work area.

b Memo:
To edit points in the pattern, click on the
Tool Box, and then edit the points. (For 6. Click (Region (engrave)) on the Tool
details on moving, inserting and delete
points, refer to “Editing Points in Outlines” on Box, and then click the first and fourth wave
page 81 or go back to Step 10, “Adjusting the regions.
rays”, on page 50). → These regions appear in red and will be
sewn with short stitches to give the effect
of engraving.
Step 4
Applying embossing/engraving 7. Click (Region (emboss)) on the Tool
effects Box, and then click the second and fifth wave
A stamp can be made by sewing regions of a fill regions.
stitch pattern with the fill stitch, satin stitch or the → This region appears in blue and will be
base stitch set for the embroidery pattern in order sewn with no dropped stitches to give the
to create embossing and engraving effects. effect of embossing.
In order to do this, the lines of the stitch pattern
must form closed regions. In our example, the
lines do not form closed regions, so we will need
to add enclosing lines.

1. Click on the Tool Box.

→ The shape of the pointer changes to

.

2. Click the upper-left corner of the work area.

3. Move the pointer along the top edge of the

work area, and then double-click the upper-
right corner to draw a line along the top edge.

4. Click the lower-left corner of the work area.

57
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 58 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Creating and Editing Embroidery Patterns

3. Click Save to save the pattern.

Step 5
Saving the edited stitch pattern b Memo:
In order to apply your edited stitch pattern as a • To quit the operation, click Cancel.
programmable fill stitch or as a stamp to a region • If a file already exists with the name
in Layout & Editing or Design Center, you must specified in the Save As dialog box, the
first save it as a .pas file. following message appears.

1. Click File on the menu bar, and then click

Save As.
→ The Save As dialog box appears.

• To overwrite the file, click Yes. The

new file name appears in the title bar
of the Programmable Stitch Creator
window.
• If you do not want to overwrite the
existing file, click No. You can then
enter a different file name.

b Memo:
Step 6
To overwrite the original file, use the menu
command File – Save instead. Quitting Programmable Stitch
Creator
2. Select the drive and the folder, and then type When you are finished creating stitch patterns in
in the file name. Programmable Stitch Creator, you can close the
application.

1. Click File on the menu bar, and then click Exit.

→ If you have saved your file as described in
Step 5, “Saving the edited stitch pattern”,
the Programmable Stitch Creator window
closes immediately.
→ If you have made changes to the pattern
since the last time the file was saved, you
will be asked whether you want to save
the changes. Click Yes, and then follow
the procedure described in Step 5, “Sav-
ing the edited stitch pattern”.

b Memo:
Programmable Stitch Creator can also be
closed by clicking the close button on the
right end of the title bar.

58
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 59 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Creating Large-Size Embroidery Patterns

Basic Operation
A large-size embroidery pattern can be designed by specifying the size of the pattern, creating the embroidery
pattern, then automatically dividing the pattern into a size that can be embroidered. By separately
embroidering each section of the pattern side by side, large-size embroidery can be sewn. In addition, the
joining edges can be embroidered slightly overlapping in order to blend beautifully.
Some large-size patterns may not be appropriate for use with the split sewing feature. We recommend using
designs with many small filled areas, such as a bouquet of flowers, lace designs and embroidery created using
the Photo Stitch function. Since designs with very large filled areas may not align properly due to fabric pull,
we suggest these types of designs not be used.
In this section, we are going to adapt an existing embroidery pattern for large-size embroidery, and then sew it.
The complete procedure will take you through the different steps of a normal working session with a large-size
embroidery pattern and will introduce you to its most important options.
Follow the instructions in this section step by step. If you have to interrupt this exercise for any reason, it is
recommended to save the file (refer to Step 5, “Saving the pattern”, on page 61). You will be able to retrieve
it later and resume your work.

Designing a large-size embroidery pattern

Step 1 Starting up Layout & Editing page 59
Step 2 Specifying a Design Page size page 60
Step 3 Creating the embroidery pattern page 60
Step 4 Checking the embroidering order page 61
Step 5 Saving the pattern page 61
Step 6 Transferring the pattern to an original card page 62
Step 7 Quitting Layout & Editing page 63
Embroidering large-size embroidery patterns
Step 1 Attaching stabilizer to the fabric page 63
Step 2 Marking the embroidering position page 63
Step 3 Hooping the fabric page 65
Step 4 Embroidering page 65

Designing a large-size embroidery pattern

→ The Layout & Editing window appears.
Step 1
Starting up Layout & Editing b Memo:
To fill the entire screen with the Layout &
1. Click , select All Programs, then Editing window, click the maximize button on
PE-DESIGN Ver.6. Select Layout & Editing the right end of the title bar.
to open the Layout & Editing window.

b Memo:
If a shortcut for Layout & Editing was
created, for example, on the desktop,
double-click it to start up the application.

59
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 60 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Creating Large-Size Embroidery Patterns

Title bar Close button

Menu bar
Maximize button
Toolbar
Minimize button
Sewing Attributes bar
Tool Box

Work area

Design Page

Reference Window

Status bar

3. Click in the Section Size (for Hoop Size)

Step 2 selector, and then select the size of the
Specifying a Design Page size sections (your embroidery hoop). For this
First, we need to specify the desired size for the example, select 120 × 170 mm (130 × 180
complete embroidery pattern. mm).

1. Click Option, then Design Page Property. b Memo:

→ The Design Page Property dialog box • With the Section Size (for Hoop Size)
appears. setting, the width and height of the
sections are 10 mm smaller than the
actual hoop size in order to provide
space for fine positioning adjustments
with adjacent sections.
• The preview area shows the setting
changes that you make. The double
lines indicate adjoining edges where
embroidering will overlap.

4. Click OK.

Step 3
2. Select Custom Size, and then type or select
Creating the embroidery pattern
the desired width and height for the Design
Page. Enter dimensions between 100 and For this example, we will use one of the lace
1000 mm. For this example, set Width to 230 embroidery patterns provided with the application.
mm and Height to 330 mm.
1. Click File on the menu bar, point to Import,
b Memo: and then click from File on the submenu.
The width and height specified under An alternate method is to click the Toolbar
Custom Size determine the exact size of button indicated below.
the embroidery design.

from File

60
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 61 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Creating Large-Size Embroidery Patterns

→ The Import from File dialog box appears. → The Design Property dialog box ap-
pears, and the first pattern section to be
sewn appears in the Design Page framed

Basic Operation
with a red line.

2. Select the embroidery pattern file

Largelace.pes in the Data folder.

b Memo:
If the Preview check box is selected, the
contents of the selected file will appear in the
Preview box.

3. Click Import to import the embroidery pattern

a Note:
Before an embroidery pattern created in a
file and to close the dialog box. custom Design Page is saved or transferred
to an original card, running stitches are
b Memo: added at the edges of the pattern sections
Double-clicking the file name also imports so that the pattern sections can easily be
the pattern into the Design Page and closes aligned during sewing. This alignment
the dialog box. stitching appears in the NOT DEFINED color
and cannot be edited. (For more details,
refer to “Embroidering” on page 65.)
→ The embroidery pattern appears in the
Design Page. (To center the embroidery
pattern within the Design Page, select the
menu command Edit – Center.)
b Memo:
• The embroidering order cannot be
checked while the pattern is selected;
therefore, be sure to deselect the pattern
before selecting the menu command
Option – Design Property. (For details,
refer to “Selecting patterns” on page 130.)
• The Design Page is automatically zoomed
in on or zoomed out from to fit in the entire
window, with the position of the displayed
pattern section within the embroidery hoop
installation order indicated at the top of the
dialog box.
• To display information for other pattern
sections in the embroidering order, click
Previous or Next.
• Pattern sections that do not contain any
Step 4 stitching will not be displayed.
Checking the embroidering order
Before the embroidery pattern is sewn, check the 2. Click Close to close the dialog box.
embroidering order to see the order that the
pattern sections are sewn and determine which
parts of the fabric should be hooped. Step 5
The pattern sections are sewn in order from left to Saving the pattern
right, top to bottom.
Once the embroidery pattern is finished, you may
want to save it in order to retrieve it later.
1. Click Option on the menu bar, and then click
Design Property. 1. Click File on the menu bar, and then click
Save.
61
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 62 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Creating Large-Size Embroidery Patterns

An alternate method is to click the Toolbar

button indicated below. a Note:
If a section of the pattern exceeds the
maximum allowed for the stitch count or
Save number of colors, a message appears,
describing the limitations and asking
→ If the pattern has already been saved at whether or not the pattern should be saved
least once, the file is saved immediately. anyway. If the embroidery pattern extends
off the Design Page, a message appears,
b Memo:
asking whether or not the pattern should be
saved anyway. If the pattern is saved
To save the file with a different name, use the anyway, it must be edited before it can be
menu command File – Save As instead. sewn.

→ If no file name has been specified or if the

file cannot be found, the Save As dialog Step 6
box appears. Transferring the pattern to an
original card
This embroidery pattern can be transferred to a
sewing machine, where it can be sewn. Transfer
the embroidery pattern to the sewing machine
using media of the type used by your machine, for
example, original cards, floppy disks,
CompactFlash cards, or USB media. For this
example, we will transfer the pattern to an original
card.
2. Select the drive and the folder, and then type
in the file name. 1. Insert an original card into the USB card writer
module.
3. Click Save to save the pattern.
a Note:
b Memo: The original card is inserted correctly when
• All patterns for a divided embroidery you hear it snap into place.
pattern are saved as a single .pes (version
6) file.
• Only the sections that contain stitching are
2. Click File on the menu bar, point to Write to
saved. Card, and then click Current Design on the
• To quit the operation, click Cancel. submenu.
• If a file already exists with the name An alternate method is to click the Toolbar
specified in the Save As dialog box, the button indicated below.
following message appears.

Write to Card

→ The following message appears.

• To overwrite the file, click Yes. The

new file name appears in the title bar
of the Layout & Editing window.
• If you do not want to overwrite the
existing file, click No. You can then
enter a different file name. a Note:
If the original card already contains patterns,
they will be deleted.

62
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 63 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Creating Large-Size Embroidery Patterns

3. Click OK. nine smaller patterns marked “Aa”, “Ab”,

“Ac”, “Ba”, “Bb”, “Bc”, “Ca”, “Cb” and “Cc”.
→ The following message appears. • To quit the operation, click Cancel.

Basic Operation
a Note:
• If the card writer module is not correctly
connected or powered, or if the original
card is not inserted or is defective, an error
message will appear. For more details,
refer to “Writing an embroidery pattern to
b Memo: an original card” on page 195.
• Each section of the pattern is saved to the • If a section of the pattern exceeds the
original card as a separate pattern. When maximum size allowed, a message
the patterns are displayed on the sewing appears, describing the limitations and the
machine’s display, they appear with two pattern is not transferred to the original
letters in the lower-left corner, indicating card. In addition, if the pattern is too large
that section’s position in the entire pattern. to be transferred to a single original card,
The uppercase letter indicates the row and select the sections to transfer. For more
the lowercase letter indicates the column. details, refer to “Writing an embroidery
pattern to an original card” on page 195.

4. Click OK to close the message.

For example, for the pattern section Step 7

marked below in red, the pattern will Quitting Layout & Editing
appear with “Bc” to indicate its position.
1. Click File on the menu bar, and then click Exit.
→ The Layout & Editing window closes.

b Memo:
Layout & Editing can also be closed by
clicking the close button on the right end of
the title bar.
For the example shown above, the large-
size embroidery pattern will be saved as

Embroidering large-size embroidery patterns

Step 1 a Note:
Attaching stabilizer to the fabric • For best results, attach the stabilizer to the
Stabilizer must always be used when fabric (as described in Step 1 on this
page). Without the correct stabilizer, the
embroidering to stabilize the fabric. There are
design may become misaligned due to
many types of stabilizer; the type that you will use puckering in the fabric.
depends on the type of fabric that you are • Be sure to check the recommendations on
embroidering on. For large-size designs that are the stabilizer package.
split into sections, the stabilizer must be adhered
to the fabric, for example, by using iron-on
stabilizer, sticky stabilizer or spray adhesive. Step 2
When using spray adhesive, spray the adhesive
Marking the embroidering
onto a hooped piece of stabilizer that is strong position
enough for the entire large-size embroidery. In Using the template for the size of hoop that you
some cases, you may need to use two pieces of are using, mark the embroidering position on the
stabilizer for your embroidery. fabric.

63
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 64 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Creating Large-Size Embroidery Patterns

2.
b Memo:
To mark an area to the right of the previously
marked area, align points A and D on the
• The templates are included in the template with marks B and C on the fabric.
package.
• The templates are also in the Template
folder and can be printed out with a printer.
A A B B

1. Punch a hole at the end of each arrow on the

template.
D D C C

To mark an area below the previously marked

area, align points A and B on the template with
marks C and D on the fabric.

A B
2. Place the template on the fabric, and then
insert the tip of a marking pen into each hole
to mark the fabric. A B
D C

D C

a Note:
• The intersection of the horizontal and
3. Connect the points marked on the fabric to vertical line indicates the center of the
draw reference lines. embroidery hoop.
• While carefully considering how the fabric
will be hooped, place the template on the
fabric, and then draw lines to indicate the
embroidering position. In addition, because
all embroidery areas are not drawn on the
template for large embroidery hoops, be
careful that the embroidery area does not
extend from the marked area on the fabric as
shown below.
For a large embroidery pattern, reposition the
template to draw the embroidering position for each
section of the embroidery pattern.

1. Place the template on the fabric, and mark

points A, B, C and D.

A B

D C

64
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 65 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Creating Large-Size Embroidery Patterns

Step 3 a Note:
Hooping the fabric

Basic Operation
• Place the fabric and hoop on a level
Using the hoop’s plastic embroidery sheet, align the surface, and then make sure that the inner
ring is pressed in well enough that the top
reference lines on the embroidery sheet with the marks
edge of the inner ring aligns with the top
on the fabric. Then, hoop the fabric while making sure edge of the outer ring.
that the fabric remains correctly aligned. • If the embroidery sheet is not used, the
marks on the embroidery hoop can be
1. Insert the embroidery sheet into the inner ring used to hoop the fabric vertically and
of the embroidery hoop, and then place them horizontally.
on top of the fabric with the centerline on the However, since the center point on some
embroidery sheet aligned with the reference sewing machines is off center, the
lines (drawn on the fabric) for the first pattern embroidery sheet should be used for best
section to be sewn. results.
• Another way to hoop the fabric is to use
sticky stabilizer that can be hooped
separately, tear away the protective
paper, then carefully align the fabric onto
the sticky surface using the embroidery
sheet as a guide.
• Tip: The fabric can be hooped more easily
if double-sided tape is affixed to the back
of the inside frame, which is placed on top
of the fabric, and then the fabric is
clamped between the inside frame and the
2. Keeping the reference lines on the embroidery
outside frame.
sheet aligned with the reference lines for the
first pattern section, place the fabric and inner
ring of the embroidery hoop into the outer ring Step 4
of the hoop, and then pull the fabric so that it Embroidering
is tight.
Now, we are ready to embroider the pattern.

1. When large-size embroidery patterns are

transferred to the sewing machine, the patterns
appear on the sewing machine display as
shown below. For this example, select the first
embroidery pattern section (Aa).

3. Finish hooping the fabric, and then remove the

embroidery sheet.
b Memo:
If there is no stitching in section Aa, select
the first section that contains stitching. Select
the menu command Option – Design
Property to check the embroidering order.

2. Attach the embroidery hoop to the sewing

machine, and then using the machine’s layout
adjusting functions, align the needle position
with the intersection of the lines drawn on the
fabric.

65
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 66 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Creating Large-Size Embroidery Patterns

3. Embroider the selected pattern. 3) Hoop the fabric for the lower-left pattern
section with the top of the hoop aligned
4. Remove the embroidery hoop from the sewing on the alignment stitching at the bottom
machine, and then remove the fabric from the of the pattern section sewn in step 1,
and then embroider the pattern.
hoop.
→ Before the pattern section is
5. Hoop the fabric for the next pattern section. embroidered, alignment stitching is
sewn at the top. Make sure that this
(For details, refer to “Hooping the fabric” on
alignment stitching aligns with the
page 65.) alignment stitching sewn in step 1.
After the pattern section is
b Memo: embroidered, alignment stitching is
When an embroidery pattern created in a sewn on the right side of the pattern
custom Design Page is saved or transferred section.
to an original card, alignment stitching (single
lines of running stitches with the color NOT
DEFINED, with a pitch of 10.0 mm, and
starting with securing stitches with a pitch of
0.3 mm) is added at the edges of the pattern
sections. (The alignment stitching appears in
the print preview and is printed in red.)
Example for hooping fabric using the
alignment stitching with Largelace.pes 4) Hoop the fabric for the lower-right pattern
(Largelace.pes can be found in the Data section with the left side of the hoop
folder.): aligned on the alignment stitching on the
right side of the pattern section sewn in
1) Embroider the upper-left pattern step 3 and with the top of the hoop aligned
section. on the alignment stitching at the bottom of
→ Alignment stitching is sewn below the pattern section sewn in step 2, and
then embroider the pattern.
and on the right side of the
embroidered pattern section. → Before the pattern section is
embroidered, alignment stitching is
sewn on the left side and at the top.
Make sure that this alignment
stitching aligns with the alignment
stitching sewn in step 3 and in step 2.

2) Hoop the fabric for the upper-right pattern

section with the left side of the hoop
aligned on the alignment stitching on the
right side of the pattern section sewn in
step 1, and then embroider the pattern.
→ Before the pattern section is
embroidered, alignment stitching is 6. Continue hooping the fabric and embroidering
sewn on the left side. Make sure that until the entire embroidery pattern is sewn.
this alignment stitching aligns with the
alignment stitching sewn in step 1.
After the pattern section is
embroidered, alignment stitching is
sewn below the pattern section.

66
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 67 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Chapter 2
Advanced Operation

Design Center...................................................... 69

Layout & Editing ................................................. 106

Inputting Images and Embroidery Patterns .................................... 108
Editing Embroidery Patterns ........................................................... 130
Checking Embroidery Patterns ....................................................... 182
Saving and Printing......................................................................... 194
Changing Software Settings ........................................................... 202
Information for Optional Large-Size Hoop Users............................ 203

Programmable Stitch Creator ............................ 208

Design Database ................................................. 223

67
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 68 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Advanced Operations

About This Chapter

This chapter provides you with detailed procedures on the various operations that you can perform in each of
the applications.

Design Center
Design Center is used to manually create embroidery patterns from images using a four-stage procedure.
Stage 1 (Original Image Stage) c page 71
Stage 2 (Line Image Stage) c page 73
Stage 3 (Figure Handle Stage) c page 76
Stage 4 (Sew Setting Stage) c page 83

Layout & Editing

Layout & Editing is used to automatically create embroidery patterns from images and to create embroidery
patterns by combining drawn objects and text.
Inputting Images and Embroidery Patterns c page 108
Editing Embroidery Patterns c page 130
Checking Embroidery Patterns c page 182
Saving and Printing c page 194
Changing Software Settings c page 202
Information for Optional Large-Size Hoop Users c page 203

Programmable Stitch Creator

Programmable Stitch Creator allows you to create, edit and save fill/stamp and motif stitch patterns that can
be applied as a programmable fill stitch or a motif stitch, or as a stamp to the enclosed regions of
embroidery patterns.
c page 208

Design Database
Design Database allows you to organize the embroidery pattern files on your computer so that you can
easily preview them and find the desired pattern.
c page 223

68
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 69 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Center

Design Center is used to create embroidery patterns from images created in other applications. With Design
Center, you can also apply stitch patterns created with Programmable Stitch Creator to regions of the
embroidery pattern. The resulting embroidery pattern can then be imported into the Layout & Editing Design
Page and combined with other patterns.

Advanced Opreation
The embroidery pattern is created in four stages:

Design Center
■ Stage 1 (Original Image Stage)
In stage 1, you can open an image (or clip art) from various sources, such as, an image created in Paint®, a
scanned drawing, or purchased clip art.
The image file must be in the uncompressed format, and its file name extension must be .bmp, .tif, .jpg, .j2k,
.pcx, .wmf, .png, .eps, .pcd, or .fpx.
Note that image files in other formats can be converted into the specified format if you have the proper
conversion software.
In stage 1, the image is displayed with its original colors and you cannot modify it.

■ Stage 2 (Line Image Stage)

When moving from stage 1 to stage 2, select a maximum of five colors from the image that will be converted
into black outlines. Unselected colors will be converted into white. You can then correct the black-and-white
image using pens and erasers of different thicknesses.
If you save a file in stage 2, its file name extension will be .pel.

■ Stage 3 (Figure Handle Stage)

When you move to stage 3, the application automatically detects the outline (black areas) and replaces it with
a set of broken lines. The broken lines can be edited (you can move and delete points or insert new points).
If you save a file in stage 3, its file name extension will be .pem.

■ Stage 4 (Sew Setting Stage)

You can set the sew type, thread color, and other sewing attributes for the outlines and regions to complete
the embroidery pattern.
If you save a file in stage 4, its file name extension will be .pem.
If you have to interrupt your work at stage 2, 3 or 4, save the file in order to retrieve it later to resume working
on it.

69
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 70 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Center

Main Window
1 A
2
3 0
4
9
5
8
7

6
1 Title bar 6 Status bar
2 Menu bar Provides helpful information, such as the size.
Provides access to the functions. 7 Reference Window
3 Toolbar Displays all outlines and patterns in the work ar-
Provides shortcuts for the menu commands. ea, giving you an overview while you work on a
detailed area. (For more details, refer to “View-
4 Sewing Attributes bar ing Patterns in the Reference Window” on
Sets the sewing attributes (color and sew type) page 103.)
of the lines and regions in the pattern
8 Design Page
(only in stage 4 (Sew Setting stage))
The actual part of the work area that can be
5 Tool Box saved and sewn.
Used to select and edit the image or pattern.
9 Minimize button
Stage 1 has no Tool Box; the other stages all
have a different tools in the Tool Box. 0 Maximize button
A Close button

70
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 71 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Center
Stage 1 (Original Image Stage)

Importing Image Data

c For more details, refer to “Creating a new
Using the wizard Design Page in stage 3 (Figure Handle

Advanced Opreation
stage)” on page 78.

Design Center
This wizard provides a step-by-step guide for 4 Open PEM
creating embroidery patterns. Click this button when you want to edit a saved
1. Click File, then Wizard. .pem file (saved in stage 3 (Figure Handle stage)
or 4 (Sew Setting stage)).
→ The How do you want to produce em- Clicking this button displays the Open dialog
broidery? dialog box appears. box so that a .pem file can be selected.
1 2 3 4 5 Most Recently Used Files
A list of the most recently edited files are dis-
played.
From the list, click the name of the file that you
want to edit, and then click Open.
5
6 Always show Wizard at Startup
Select this check box to start up the wizard each
6 7 time Design Center is started up.
7 Cancel
Position the pointer over any button, and the Clicking this button closes this dialog box.
name of the function appears.
The functions for each button are described When the From Image button is clicked
below. When you click the From Image button in the How
1 From Image do you want to produce embroidery? dialog box,
Click this button when creating embroidery pat- the From Image dialog box appears.
tern from an image.
Clicking this button displays the From Image di-
alog box, and then continues with a step-by-step
guide for creating embroidery patterns. 1 3
c For more details, refer to “When the From
Image button is clicked” on this page.
2 4
2 New Line Image
Clicking this button opens a new Design Page in
stage 2 (Line Image stage).
Click this button when you want to use the black 5 6
pen and eraser tools to draw an image, then cre-
ate an embroidery pattern from that image. Position the pointer over any button, and the name
of the function appears.
c For more details, refer to “Creating a new
Design Page in stage 2 (Line Image
stage)” on page 74.
3 New Figure
Clicking this button opens a new Design Page in
stage 3 (Figure Handle stage).
Click this button when you want to draw a figure
handle image, or when you want to create pat-
terns from outlines taken from a previously
saved .pem file.

71
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 72 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Center Stage 1 (Original Image Stage)

The functions for each button are described below. 1. Check that the scanner or other TWAIN
1 Open Image File device is correctly connected to your
Click this button to open a previously saved im- computer.
age file and paste the image in the Design Page.
2. Click File, then Select TWAIN device.
c For details, refer to “Opening an image
file” on page 20. → The Select Source dialog box appears.

2 From Clipboard
Clicking this button pastes the image on the Clip-
board into the Design Page. This function can
only be used when there is an image on the Clip- !!scr94.bmp!!
board.
3 From TWAIN device
Click this button to import an image from a
TWAIN device (such as a scanner or digital cam-
era) connected to your computer, then paste it in 3. From the Sources list, click the desired device
the Design Page. to select it.

c For details, refer to “Importing image data

from a TWAIN device” below. a Note:
If no TWAIN device is installed, there will be
4 Use Current image
no names displayed in the Sources list.
Click this button to use an image opened in First, install the driver software for the
stage 1 (Original Image stage). This function can TWAIN device that you want to use.
only be used when an image is opened in stage
1.
4. Click Select to choose the selected device
5 Previous and to close the dialog box.
Clicking this button closes the current dialog
box, and returns to the How do you want to b Memo:
produce embroidery? dialog box. To quit the operation and close the dialog
6 Cancel box, click Cancel.
Clicking this button closes this dialog box.
→ If any button other than Previous or Can- 5. Click File, then Input from TWAIN device.
cel is clicked, the image will be imported → The driver interface for the device select-
and pasted into the Design Page of stage ed in the Select Source dialog box ap-
1 (Original Image stage), and the Cut out pears.
to Line Image dialog box appears, allow-
ing you to choose colors for outlines. 6. Specify the necessary settings for importing
an image, and then import the image.
c For details on the next stages, refer to
“Continuing to Stage 2 (Line Image
Stage)” on page 73, “Continuing to Stage a Note:
3 (Figure Handle Stage)” on page 76, For information on using the driver interface,
then “Continuing to Stage 4 (Sew Setting refer to the help manual for that interface, or
Stage)” on page 83. contact the manufacturer of the interface.

→ When the image transfer between the

Importing image data from a scanner (or other device) and the driver is
TWAIN device completed, the imported image will be
pasted in a Design Page of stage 1 (Orig-
TWAIN is an application interface (API) inal Image stage).
standardization for software that controls scanners
and other devices. Design Center supports TWAIN b Memo:
standardized devices, allowing you to control the If the image currently displayed in the Design
device and import the image directly. Page has not yet been saved, you will be
asked whether you want to save it.

72
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 73 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Center
Stage 2 (Line Image Stage)

Continuing to Stage 2 (Line Image Stage)

After opening the image, continue to stage 2 (Line Image stage), where the color(s) that will be used to create
the line image (outline of the image) will be selected. In stage 2 (Line Image stage), you can edit the image
using the pen and eraser tools. You may also want to use these tools to create outlines that are easier to draw

Advanced Opreation
Design Center
by hand, for example, free-hand writing. Use the zooming tools available to display the image enlarged or
reduced.

Toolbar button: → The selected color appears in the top box

under Pick Colors, and appears in
the check box to show that the color is se-
1. Click , or click Stage, then To Line
lected.
Image.
→ The Cut out to Line Image dialog box ap- b Memo:
pears. • You can repeat step 2. to select up to five
colors. If more than five colors are
selected, only the last five colors selected
remain in the list.
• To deselect a color, clear the
corresponding check box.
• To adjust the color tone and reduce image
noise (distortions), click Image Tune. (For
more details, refer to “Image tuning” on
page 74.)

3. Click Preview to preview the line image in the

Design Page.
→ If you were in stage 3 (Figure Handle
stage), you are returned to stage 2, un- b Memo:
less you have modified the image in stage If necessary, the settings can be changed.
3. In that case, a message will appear, After changing the settings, click Preview to
asking you to confirm that you want to preview the outline with the new settings
abandon the changes made in stage 3. applied.

b Memo: 4. Click OK.

To display the image enlarged (or reduced),
move the ZOOM slider up (or down). When → All of the selected colors are converted to
the image is enlarged, you can scroll through a black outline (line image), which is dis-
it to display different parts. played in the Design Page of stage 2 (Line
Image stage).

a Note:
If you started with stage 3 (Figure Handle
stage) by opening a stage 3 file, you cannot
go to stage 2.

2. Click the outline color(s) that you want to !!scr34.bmp!!

convert into black outlines.
→ When the pointer is moved over the im-
age, the shape of the pointer changes to
.

73
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 74 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Center Stage 2 (Line Image Stage)

b Memo: b Memo:
• To quit the operation and go back to stage • To close the dialog box without applying
1 (Original Image stage), click Cancel. the changes to the settings, click Cancel.
• It is recommended to select just as many • Clicking OK resets the Pick Colors list on
colors as necessary to create a clear the Cut out to Line Image dialog box.
outline of the image. In the above
example, only a single color was selected.
• If you do not like the result, select the a Note:
menu command Stage – To Original
The image adjustments selected in the
Image to go back to stage 1 (Original
Image Tune dialog box apply only to the
Image stage), and then create the line
image displayed in the Cut out to Line
image again.
Image dialog box; the image that results
from these adjustments cannot be saved.
Image tuning
Clicking the Image Tune button in the Cut out to
Line Image dialog box displays an Image Tune
Creating a new Design Page
dialog box similar to the one shown below. in stage 2 (Line Image stage)
Toolbar button:

1. Click , or click File, then New Line

Image window
Image.
→ If the current Design Page has already
been saved or has not been edited, a new
Design Page immediately appears in
stage 2 (Line Image stage).
→ If the current Design Page has not been
saved, you will be asked whether you
want to save the changes.

From this dialog box, you can reduce the colors of

b Memo:
the image data (posterize) or reduce image noise In stage 2 (Line Image stage), the file will be
saved as a .pel file.
(distortions). By applying an even gradation to make
the image smoother, you can select colors more
easily, even from image data that was taken from a c “Importing image data from a TWAIN
device” on page 72, “Saving” on
scanner or other device and does not have clear
outlines. page 104, and “Creating a new Design
Page in stage 3 (Figure Handle stage)” on
1) The image window displays the image page 78
resulting from the current settings.
2) Move the Tone slider to set the amount of
color reduction (posterization). Set to High to Drawing and erasing outlines
show the original image. Set towards Low to
increase the color reduction. Drawing outlines
3) If the Noise Reduction check box is
selected, the smaller areas of noise are 1. On the Tool Box, click the button for the pen
removed. with the desired thickness.

4) Click OK to show the corrected image in the → The shape of the pointer changes to
image window on the Cut out to Line Image
dialog box and to close the dialog box. .

2. To add a dot, click once. To draw a line, drag

the pointer.

74
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 75 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Center Stage 2 (Line Image Stage)

b Memo:
To draw vertical or horizontal lines, hold
down the Shift key while moving the
pointer.

Erasing outlines

Advanced Opreation
1.

Design Center
On the Tool Box, click the button for the eraser
with the desired thickness.

2. Move the pointer over the line that you want to

erase, and then hold down the right mouse
button.
→ The shape of the pointer changes to

3. Drag the pointer to erase the line.

75
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 76 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Center
Stage 3 (Figure Handle Stage)

Continuing to Stage 3 (Figure Handle

Stage)
After creating the outline, which is simply a collection of dots (or pixels) in stage 2 (Line Image stage), continue
to stage 3 (Figure Handle stage), where the dots are automatically connected to create lines that can be
edited. In stage 3 (Figure Handle stage), you can use the Point Edit tool to move, delete and insert points, or
you can use the Line tool to draw lines.

Toolbar button: 3. To replace the black outlines with figure

handle lines along the center of the outlines,
1. Click , or click Stage, then To Figure select the Thinning Process check box, and
then use the slider to select the degree of
Handle. detail.
→ If you were in stage 2 (Line Image stage),
the Figure Object Conversion Setting b Memo:
dialog box appears. When the slider is set to Much, even very
thick black lines will be replaced with a line
along the center.

!!scr97.bmp!! ON

2. Select a setting under Resolution.

This setting determines how detailed the To replace the black lines with figure handle
generated figure handle image will be. lines following the border of the outlines, clear
Basically, the line image is converted into the Thinning Process check box.
pieces of broken lines. To create more details,
more points are needed on the broken lines,
which also increases the size of the file.
In general, Normal provides a sufficient
resolution without making the file too large. OFF
If selecting Coarse gives a satisfactory result
for a particular image, select this setting in
order to keep the file as small as possible.
Select Fine only if the image contains many
small details, and the Normal setting does not
give a satisfactory result.

4. Use the SIZE slider to set the size.

76
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 77 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Center Stage 3 (Figure Handle Stage)

a Note: Specifying the Design Page size

You will not be able to enlarge the image
beyond the limits of the Design Page area. If In stage 3 (Figure Handle stage), you can select a
necessary, click Design Page Property, Design Page size according to the size of hoop that
and then change the Design Page size in the you will be using with your sewing machine, or you
dialog box that appeared. can customize the size to fit even very large
embroidery patterns.
5. To select a specific part of the image, click

Advanced Opreation
1.

Design Center
Click Option, then Design Page Property.
Pick Area, drag the pointer ( ) across the → The Design Page Property dialog box
image in the Design Page to select the desired appears.
area.

b Memo:
The Figure Object Conversion Setting
dialog box appears again when the mouse
button is released.

6. Click OK.
→ The figure handle image is displayed in
the Design Page of stage 3 (Figure Han-
dle stage).
2. Select the Design Page size.
To adjust the Design Page size according to
the hoop size, select Hoop Size, and then
select the desired hoop size from the selector.
To specify a custom Design Page size, select
Custom Size, and then type or select the
desired width and height for the Design Page.
(The setting range is 100 to 1000 mm (3.9 to
39.4 inches).)

b Memo:
• The preview area shows the setting
changes that you make.
b Memo:
• When Hoop Size is selected, the sewing
machine image shows the orientation of
To close the dialog box without applying the the Design Page (hoop) in relation to the
changes to the settings, click Cancel. machine.

a Note: a Note:
If the outline data cannot be created from the • When Hoop Size is selected, do not
image when moving from stage 2 (Line Image select a size larger than the maximum
stage) to stage 3 (Figure Handle stage), even embroidering area for your machine.
after various outline conversion settings are
specified, return to stage 2, and correct the
outlines in the line image or apply corrections 3. Click OK.
from the image.
b Memo:
c “Creating a new Design Page in stage 2
(Line Image stage)” on page 74,
• To return to the default settings (100 × 100
mm (4" × 4") of Hoop Size), click Default.
“Continuing to Stage 4 (Sew Setting • To close the dialog box without applying
Stage)” on page 83, “Changing the grid the changes to the settings, click Cancel.
settings” on page 105, and “Specifying
the Design Page size” on this page

77
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 78 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Center Stage 3 (Figure Handle Stage)

a Note: b Memo:
• Custom Design Page sizes cannot be • The size of the Design Page is the
saved for version 5 and earlier. currently selected size.
• The selected size will be applied to every • To retrieve data from a saved .pem file,
new Design Page, until the settings are use the menu command File – Import
changed. Figure.

→ If the current Design Page has not been

saved, you will be asked whether you
Creating a new Design Page in want to save the changes.
stage 3 (Figure Handle stage)
b Memo:
An empty Design Page can be created in order to In stage 3 (Figure Handle stage), the file will
draw a figure handle image or to create patterns be saved as a .pem file.
from outlines taken from a previously saved .pem
file.
c “Importing image data from a TWAIN
device” on page 72, “Saving” on
1. Click File, then New Figure Data.
page 104, and “Creating a new Design
→ If the current Design Page has already Page in stage 2 (Line Image stage)” on
been saved or has not been edited, a new page 74
Design Page immediately appears in
stage 3 (Figure Handle stage).

Editing Outlines
• The outline will not be selected if an empty
Selecting outlines part of it is selected.
• To deselect the outline, select a different
outline, or click in a blank area of the
1. Click on the Tool Box. Design Page.

→ The shape of the pointer changes to

3. To select an additional outline, hold down the
. Ctrl key and click the other outline.

2. Click the outline that you want to select. b Memo:

→ When the pointer is moved over the out- You can also select outlines by dragging the
pointer across the outline that you want to
line, the shape of the pointer changes to
select. As you drag the pointer, a selection
frame is drawn. All outlines that are
.
completely contained in that selection frame
are selected when the mouse button is
b Memo: released.
• When the outline is selected, handles
appear and the outline appears in blue.
Handles Moving outlines
1. Select the outline that you want to move.
→ When the pointer is moved over the out-
line, the shape of the pointer changes to

2. Drag the outline to the desired location.

78
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 79 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Center Stage 3 (Figure Handle Stage)

5.
b Memo:
Type or select the desired width and height.

• To move the outline horizontally or

b Memo:
vertically, hold down the Shift key while • Select 100% to leave the outline
dragging it. unchanged.
• Pressing the arrow keys moves the • If the aspect check box is selected,
selected outline 0.5 mm (about 0.02 inch) changing one dimension automatically
in the direction of the arrow on the key. changes the other so that the proportion of
the width and height remains unchanged.

Advanced Opreation
Design Center
Scaling outlines 6. Click OK.

■ Scaling manually b Memo:

• To preview the outline at the new size in
1. Select the outline that you want to resize. the Design Page, click Preview.
• To close the dialog box without applying
2. Move the pointer over one of the handles of a the changes to the settings, click Cancel.
selected outline or group of outlines.
→ The shape of the pointer changes to
a Note:
, , or , depending • You cannot enter a size that will cause the
outline to exceed the size of the Design
on the handle that the pointer is over. Page.
• The minimum value is 1 mm (0.04 inch).
b Memo:
• is for scaling the width. c “Changing the measurement units” on
page 105
• is for scaling the height.

• and are for scaling both Flipping outlines

dimensions at the same time.
horizontally or vertically
3. Drag the handle to adjust the selected 1. Select the outline that you want to flip
outline(s) to the desired size. horizontally (up/down) or vertically (left/right).

■ Scaling numerically 2. To flip the outline horizontally, click Edit, then

1. Select the outline that you want to resize. Mirror, then Horizontal, or click on the
Toolbar.
2. Click Edit, then Numerical Setting, then Size.
To flip the outline vertically, click Edit, then
→ The Size dialog box appears.
Mirror, then Vertical, or click on the
Toolbar.

Rotating outlines
■ Rotating manually
1. Select the outline that you want to rotate.
3. To change the width and height proportionally, 2. Click Edit, then Rotate, or click on the
select the aspect check box. Toolbar.
4. Select the whether the width and height will be → The handles around the selected outline
set as a percentage (%) or a dimension are replaced by small squares at the four
(millimeters or inches). corners of the selected outline.

79
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 80 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Center Stage 3 (Figure Handle Stage)

3. Move the pointer over one of the four rotation 4. Click OK.
handles.
→ When the pointer is moved over a rotation b Memo:
handle, the shape of the pointer changes • To preview the outline at the new angle in
the Design Page, click Preview.
to . • To close the dialog box without applying
the changes to the settings, click Cancel.
4. Drag the rotation handle clockwise or
counterclockwise to rotate the outline in 1°
increments.
a Note:
The range of values that can be entered is
b Memo:
between 0 and 359 degrees, in 1-degree
increments.
To rotate the outline in 15° increments, hold
down the Shift key while dragging the
rotation handle.
Deleting outlines
■ Rotating numerically 1. Select the outline to be deleted.

1. Select the outline that you want to rotate. 2. Press the Delete key, or click Edit, then
Delete.
2. Click Edit, then Numerical Setting, then
Rotate.
→ The Rotate dialog box appears.

3. Type or select the desired rotation angle.

b Memo:
• The angle can also be specified by moving
the pointer over the red arrow inside of the
circle, then dragging the red arrow to the
desired angle. When the pointer is moved
over the red arrow, its shape changes to

.
• Select 0 degree to leave the outline
unchanged.

80
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 81 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Center Stage 3 (Figure Handle Stage)

Editing Points in Outlines

Moving points Inserting points
1. Click on the Tool Box. 1. Click on the Tool Box.

Advanced Opreation
→ The shape of the pointer changes to → The shape of the pointer changes to

Design Center
. .

2. Click the outline that you want to edit. 2. Click the outline that you want to edit.
→ The outline appears in pink, and the → The outline appears in pink, and the
points in the selected outline appear as points in the selected outline appear as
small empty squares. The points at the small empty squares. The points where
ends of lines appear as larger squares. lines overlap appear as larger squares.

3. Click the outline at the position where you

want to insert a new point.
→ A new point, appearing as a small black
square, is added. The new point can be
edited.

Deleting points
1. Click on the Tool Box.
3. Click the point that you want to move.
→ The shape of the pointer changes to
→ The selected point appears as a small
black square. .

b Memo: 2. Click the outline containing the point that you

To select additional points, hold down the want to edit.
Ctrl key and click each point, or drag the → The points in the outline appear as small
pointer over the points that you want to
empty squares.
select.
3. Click the point that you want to delete.

a Note: → The selected point appears as a small

black square.
If you click the line instead of a square, a
new point is inserted.
b Memo:
To select additional points, hold down the
4. Drag the point to the new location.
Ctrl key and click each point, or drag the
→ All selected points move in the same di- pointer over the points that you want to
rection. select.

b Memo:
4. Press the Delete key to remove the point
• To move the point horizontally or vertically,
from the outline.
hold down the Shift key while dragging
it.
• Pressing the arrow keys moves the a Note:
selected point 0.1 mm (about 0.01 inch) in The points where lines overlap, which
the direction of the arrow on the key. appear as red squares, cannot be deleted.

81
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 82 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Center Stage 3 (Figure Handle Stage)

Drawing a Broken Line

The line drawing mode allows you to add broken lines to your pattern. A broken line is made of one or more
adjacent straight lines, in other words, the end point of one straight line is the start point of the next one.
If the broken line that you draw did not create enclosed regions, it remains a simple outline, and you can only
set sewing attributes for the line itself in stage 4 (Sew Setting stage).
If the broken line created enclosed regions, you can assign sew types and colors to both the outline and the
regions in stage 4.
If you draw a line through an existing region, creating two separate regions, you will be able to set sewing
attributes for both regions separately, as well as for the separating line.

End point

Start point

Broken line without a region Broken line with region

Broken lines with two regions

4. Repeat step 3. until you have specified all

1. Click on the Tool Box.
points except the end point.
→ When the pointer is moved over the work 5. Double-click in the Design Page to specify the
area, the shape of the pointer changes to
end point.
.

2. To draw a line, click in the Design Page to

specify the start point.

3. Move the pointer, and then click in the Design

Page to specify the next point.
→ The two points are connected with a
straight line.

b Memo:
• To remove the last point that was entered,
click the right mouse button.
If necessary, use the grid to help draw the
lines. You can set the grid so that each of
its vertical and horizontal lines are visible.
For details on the grid, refer to “Changing
the grid settings” on page 105.
• To draw vertical or horizontal lines, hold
down the Shift key while moving the
pointer.

82
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 83 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Center
Stage 4 (Sew Setting Stage)

Continuing to Stage 4 (Sew Setting Stage)

After editing the outline in stage 3 (Figure Handle stage), continue to stage 4 (Sew Setting stage), where the
sewing attributes can be set. Use the zooming tools available to display the pattern enlarged or reduced.

Advanced Opreation
Design Center
Toolbar button: 2. From the Page selector, select the desired
color for the Design Page.
1. Click , or click Stage, then To Sew
3. From the Background selector, select the
Setting. desired color for the background.
→ The pattern is displayed in the Design
Page of stage 4 (Sew Setting stage). b Memo:
The preview area allows you to check the
selected colors.

4. Click OK.

b Memo:
• To return to the default settings, click
Default.
• To close the dialog box without applying
the changes to the settings, click Cancel.

c “Creating a new Design Page in stage 2

(Line Image stage)” on page 74“ and
“Continuing to Stage 3 (Figure Handle
Stage)” on page 76

Specifying display colors

In stage 4 (Sew Setting stage), the color of the
Design Page can be set to the color of the fabric,
and its background can be set to a different color for
contrast.

1. Click Option, then Design Page Property.

→ The Design Page Property dialog box
appears.

83
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 84 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Center Stage 4 (Sew Setting Stage)

Applying Sewing Attributes to Lines and

Regions
3. Click the enclosed region where you want to
Region sewing apply the sewing attributes.
→ “Marching lines” appear around the se-
■ Applying sewing attributes to lected region, and the color and sew type
regions selected on the Sewing Attributes bar are
applied to the region.
1. Click on the Tool Box.

→ The shape of the pointer changes to

, and the Sewing Attributes bar ap-

pears similar to the one shown below.

2. If necessary, change the color and sew type.

b Memo:
• You can change the color and sew type
either before or after applying sewing
attributes to the region. For more details
on changing these settings, refer to “Color”
on page 89 and “Sew type” on page 89.
• You can also use the settings in the
Sewing Attribute Setting dialog box to
define other attributes of the sew type. (For
more details, refer to “Specifying sewing
attributes” on page 89.) If you do not
change these settings at this time, the
current settings will be applied, however
you can modify them later.

a Note:
If the attributes cannot be applied to a
region, go back to stage 3 (Figure Handle
stage) and make sure that region is closed.
Edit any broken lines with the Point Edit tool.
For details on editing the figure handle
image, refer to “Editing Points in Outlines” on
page 81.

■ Checking the sewing attributes of

a region

1. Click on the Tool Box.

→ The shape of the pointer changes to

84
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 85 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Center Stage 4 (Sew Setting Stage)

2. Right-click a closed region.

1. Click on the Tool Box.
→ The Sewing Attribute Setting dialog box
for the selected region appears. → The shape of the pointer changes to

, and the Sewing Attributes bar ap-

pears similar to the one shown below.

Advanced Opreation
Design Center
2. If necessary, change the color and sew type.

b Memo:
• You can change the color and sew type
either before or after applying sewing
attributes to the outline. For more details
on changing these settings, refer to “Color”
on page 89 and “Sew type” on page 89.
• You can also use the settings in the
Sewing Attribute Setting dialog box to
define other attributes of the sew type. (For
more details, refer to “Specifying sewing
b Memo: attributes” on page 89.) If you do not
• An alternate method is to select the menu change these settings at this time, the
command Sew – Setting Attribute, or current settings will be applied, however
click the Toolbar button indicated below. you can modify them later.

3. Click the outline where you want to apply the

Sewing Attribute
sewing attributes.
• The Sewing Attributes bar shows the color → “Marching lines” appear along the select-
and sew type for the selected region. You
ed outline, and the color and sew type se-
can change the color and sew type at this
time. For more details on changing the lected on the Sewing Attributes bar are
color and sew type, refer to “Color” on applied to the outline.
page 89 and “Sew type” on page 89.

3. If necessary, change the settings in the

Sewing Attribute Setting dialog box.

b Memo:
To return to the default setting, click at
the right of the setting.

c “Specifying sewing attributes” on page 89

4. To apply the new attributes to the region, click

each region where you want to apply the new
attributes.

5. Click Close to close the dialog box.

Line sewing
■ Applying sewing attributes to the
entire outline

85
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 86 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Center Stage 4 (Sew Setting Stage)

■ Applying sewing attributes to a → “Marching lines” appear along the select-

portion of the outline ed portion of the outline, and the sew type
selected on the Sewing Attributes bar is
applied to the portion of the outline.
1. Click on the Tool Box.

→ The shape of the pointer changes to

, and the Sewing Attributes bar ap-

pears similar to the one shown below.

2. If necessary, change the color and sew type.

b Memo:
• You can change the sew type either before
or after applying sewing attributes to the
portion of the outline. For more details on
changing this setting, refer to “Sew type”
on page 89.
• You can also use the settings in the
Sewing Attribute Setting dialog box to
define other attributes of the sew type. (For
more details, refer to “Specifying sewing
attributes” on page 89.) If you do not
change these settings at this time, the
current settings will be applied, however ■ Checking the sewing attributes of
you can modify them later. an outline
1. To check the attributes of the entire outline,
a Note:
click on the Tool Box.
The color cannot be set separately for a
portion of an outline. If you change the color,
the new color will be applied to the entire → The shape of the pointer changes to
outline of the portion that is clicked.
.
3. Click the portion of the outline where you want To check the attributes of a portion of the
to apply the sewing attributes.
outline, click on the Tool Box.

→ The shape of the pointer changes to

2. Right-click the outline or a portion of the

outline.

86
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 87 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Center Stage 4 (Sew Setting Stage)

→ The Sewing Attribute Setting dialog box

for the selected outline or portion of out- Using the Sewing Attributes bar
line appears.
The Sewing Attributes bar, available in stage 4 (Sew
Setting stage), allows you to set the color and sew
type of region and outlines.
The sewing attributes that are available depend on
the tool selected in the Tool Box.

Advanced Opreation
Design Center
Example 1: When on the Tool Box is selected

Example 2: When or on the Tool Box is

selected

When the pointer is positioned over a button or

b Memo: selector in the Sewing Attributes bar, a label
• An alternate method is to select the menu indicating the name of that element appears.
command Sew – Setting Attribute, or
click the Toolbar button indicated below.
Region sew: Switches page
on/off sewing for the 87
Sewing Attribute
region.
Line sew: Switches page
• The Sewing Attributes bar shows the color
on/off sewing for the 88
and sew type for the selected outline. At
this time, you can change the color and line.
sew type for the entire outline, or the sew Region color, Line page
type for the portion of the outline. For more color: Click this button 89
details on changing the color and sew to set the thread color
type, refer to “Color” on page 89 and “Sew for lines or regions.
type” on page 89.
Region sew type, page
!!sew4.bmp!! Line sew type: Use 89
3. If necessary, change the settings in the these selectors to set
Sewing Attribute Setting dialog box. the sew type for lines
or regions.
b Memo:
To return to the default setting, click at ■ Region sew
the right of the setting. Clicking this button switches on/off sewing for a
region.
c “Specifying sewing attributes” on page 89
b Memo:
4. To apply the new attributes to the outline or • The Region sew button is available only
portion of outline, click the outline where you
want to apply the new attributes. when on the Tool Box is selected.
• When region sewing is switched off, the
5. Click Close to close the dialog box. region is not sewn (and you cannot set a
color or sew type).

1. Click .
This button has two settings:

87
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 88 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Center Stage 4 (Sew Setting Stage)

On: The Region color button and the Region

sew type selector are displayed.
1. Click .

Off: The Region color button and the Region This button has two settings:
sew type selector are not displayed. On: The Line color button and the Line sew
type selector are displayed.
Off: The Line color button and the Line sew
type selector are not displayed.
Region sew Region sew type
Region color

2. Click a region to apply the region sewing

Line sew Line sew type
attributes.
Line color
→ If the Region sew button has been
switched on, the color displayed in the
Region color button and the sew type 2. Click a line to apply the line sewing attributes.
displayed in the Region sew type selec- → If the Line sew button has been switched
tor are applied to the region. on, the color displayed on the Line color
→ If the Region sew button has been button and the sew type displayed in the
switched off, the color and sew type for Line sew type selector are applied to the
the region disappear. line.
→ If the Line sew button has been switched
off, the line is replaced with a dotted line
and will not be sewn.

c “Color” on page 89 and “Sew type” on

page 89

■ Line sew
Clicking this button switches on/off sewing for a line.
a Note:
b Memo: The color cannot be set separately for a
portion of the outline. If you change the
• The Line sew button is available only
color, the new color will be applied to the
when or on the Tool Box is entire outline.
selected.
• When line sewing is switched off, the line
is not sewn (and you cannot set its color or
c “Color” on page 89 and “Sew type” on
page 89
sew type).

88
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 89 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Center Stage 4 (Sew Setting Stage)

■ Color c “Region sew” on page 87, “Line sew” on

page 88 and “Special colors” on page 170
Click this button to set the thread color for lines or
regions.
■ Sew type
b Memo:
Line sew type Region sew type

The Color button appears in the Sewing

Attributes bar when the Region sew button Use these selectors to set the sew type for lines or
( ) or Line sew button ( ) has been regions.

Advanced Opreation
Design Center
turned on.
b Memo:
The sew type selector appears in the Sewing
1. Click the Color button. Attributes bar when the Region sew button
→ A Line Thread Color dialog box similar to ( ) or Line sew button ( ) has been
the ones shown below appears. turned on.

1. Click in a sew type selector.

→ The available settings appear.
Line sew type Region sew type

2. Click the desired sew type.

b Memo: → The new setting appears in the selector.

To view a list of only the thread colors, clear 3. Click the region or outline where you want to
the View Details check box.
apply the sew type setting.

2. From the Thread Chart selector, select a c “Region sew” on page 87 and “Line sew”
on page 88
thread color chart or a user thread chart.

c For details on specifying a user thread

chart or for information on how machines Specifying sewing attributes
handle thread colors, refer to “Editing
User Thread Color Lists” on page 190. Various sewing attributes for lines and regions can
be set in the Sewing Attribute Setting dialog box.
3. From the list of thread colors, click the desired
color. Toolbar button:
→ The new color is displayed on the Region
color button or Line color button. 1. Click in the Toolbar
→ The Sewing Attribute Setting dialog box
b Memo: appears.
• The name of the selected color appears at
the bottom of the dialog box. b Memo:
• For details on the four buttons under the The region sew attributes appear in the
list, refer to “Special colors” on page 170. Sewing Attribute Setting dialog box when
on the Tool Box is selected. The line
4. Click Close to set the color and to close the sew attributes appear in the Sewing
dialog box.
Attribute Setting dialog box when or
5. Click the region or outline where you want to on the Tool Box is selected.
apply the color setting.

89
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 90 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Center Stage 4 (Sew Setting Stage)

Beginner mode:
b Memo:
For line sewing For region sewing • Settings that cannot be selected in
Beginner mode are retained from the
previous setting in Expert mode.
• To hide the preview box, click Hide Hint.
To display the preview box, click Show
Hint.
When the Hide Hint button is displayed,
the preview box is displayed, allowing you
to view a stitching sample when the pointer
is moved over the setting. The preview box
shows the setting changes that you make.

3. If necessary, change the sewing attributes

displayed under Line Sew or Region Sew.

b Memo:
• In some cases, you may need to scroll
through the settings, or resize the dialog
box by dragging one of its corners in order
Expert mode: to view all of the sewing attributes.
• The method for entering settings varies
For line sewing For region sewing according to the attribute. When entering
numerical values in Expert mode, click the
arrow buttons to select the value or enter
the value directly. In Beginner mode, use
the slider to change the settings. If
appears, click the button to return to the
default setting.

c For details on the different sewing

attributes and settings, refer to “Line
sewing attributes” on page 91 and
“Region sewing attributes” on page 91.

a Note:
All settings made in the dialog box are
retained and will be applied regardless of the
mode, until they are changed.

b Memo: 4. When the line sewing attributes are displayed,

• An alternate method is to select the menu click an outline to apply the line sewing
command Sew – Setting Attribute, or
attributes to the outline.
right-click a region or line.
When the region sewing attributes are
• The sewing attributes displayed in the
dialog box depend on the selected sew displayed, click a region to apply the region
type. sewing attributes to the region.

5. Click Close to close the dialog box.

2. To display only basic sewing attributes and
simpler settings, click To Beginner mode.
To display all of the sewing attributes and
settings available for the selected sew type,
click To Expert mode.

90
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 91 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Center Stage 4 (Sew Setting Stage)

■ Line sewing attributes

The available attributes differ depending on the selected sew type. In Beginner mode, not all of the following
attributes appear.
Zigzag stitch
Sets the width of the zigzag.
Zigzag width Range: 1–10 mm (0.04–0.39 inch)
Default: 2.0 mm (0.08 inch)

Advanced Opreation
Sets the number of lines per millimeter (inch).

Design Center
Density Range: 1–7 lines per mm (25–178 lines per inch)
Default: 4.5 lines per mm (114 lines per inch)
Sets half stitching on or off.
If one side of the zigzag stitching is dense, a half stitch could On:
Half Stitch be sewn automatically to provide a more even density.
Default: Off
Off:

Running stitch
Sets the pitch of the line sewing.
Run pitch Range: 1–10 mm (0.04–0.39 inch)
Default: 2.0 mm (0.08 inch)
Sets the number of times that the border will be sewn.
Run times Range: 2, 4, 6
Default: 2

■ Region sewing attributes

The available attributes differ depending on the selected sew type. In Beginner mode, not all of the following
attributes appear.
Satin stitch
Sets underlay stitching on or off. Try to use underlay stitching for wide areas, in order to pre-
vent shrinking during stitching. Depending on the shape of the region, however, it may not be
Under sewing possible to select this setting.
On: Underlay stitching will be sewn.
Off: Underlay stitching will not be sewn.
Sets the number of lines per millimeter.
Density Range: 1–7 lines per mm (25–178 lines per inch)
Default: 4.5 lines per mm (114 lines per inch)
Sets the density gradation setting on or off.
Available when the type of sewing direction is set to Constant.
Gradation Click Pattern to set the gradation pattern.
Default: Off
For details on this attribute, refer to“Creating a gradation” on page 96.
[Type] Specifies the type of sewing direction.
Constant: Sews at a fixed angle. The angle is specified by the angle setting.
Variable: Varies the sewing direction according to the object being sewn.
[Angle] Specifies the sewing angle. 90°
Direction 135° 45°
Available only when the type sewing direction is
set to Constant. 180° 0°
Range: 0–359 degrees 225° 315°
Default: 45 degrees 270°
Sets half stitching on or off.
Available when the type of sewing direction is set to Vari- On:
able.
Half Stitch
If one side of the satin stitching is dense, a half stitch could
Off:
be sewn automatically to provide a more even density.
Default: Off

91
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 92 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Center Stage 4 (Sew Setting Stage)

Sets the running path of the stitching. Inside of region:

Available when the type of sewing direction is set to Constant.
Available settings:
• Inside of region (shortest route) Along outline:
Running Stitch Path • Along outline (along the inner side)
• Onto outline (on the outline)
The inside of region setting is available only when the Gradation Onto outline:
check box is cleared.
Default: Inside of region
Lengthens the sewing region in the stitch pattern’s sewing direction to prevent pattern shrink-
age during sewing.
Pull Compensation
Range: 0–2 mm (0.00–0.08 inch)
Default: 0.0 mm (0.00 inch)

Fill stitch
Sets underlay stitching on or off. Try to use underlay stitching for wide areas, in order to pre-
vent shrinking during stitching. Depending on the shape of the region, however, it may not be
Under sewing possible to select this setting.
On: Underlay stitching will be sewn.
Off: Underlay stitching will not be sewn.
Sets the number of lines per millimeter.
Density Range: 1–7 lines per mm (25–178 lines per inch)
Default: 4.5 lines per mm (114 lines per inch)
Sets the density gradation setting on or off.
Available when the type of sewing direction is set to Constant.
Gradation Click Pattern to set the gradation pattern and its density.
Default: Off
For details on this attribute, refer to“Creating a gradation” on page 96.
[Type] Specifies the type of sewing direction.
Constant: Sews at a fixed angle. The angle is specified by the angle setting.
Variable: Varies the sewing direction according to the object being sewn.
[Angle] Specifies the sewing angle. 90°
Direction 135° 45°
Available only when the sewing direction type is
set to Constant. 180° 0°
Range: 0–359 degrees 225° 315°
Default: 45 degrees 270°
Specifies the shape of stitching on the edges.

Available settings: ,
Stitch Type
Default:

Sets half stitching on or off.

Available when the type of sewing direction is set to Vari- On:
able.
Half Stitch
If one side of the fill stitching is dense, a half stitch could be
Off:
sewn automatically to provide a more even density.
Default: Off
Sets the running path of the stitching. Inside of region:
Available when the type of sewing direction is set to Constant.
Available settings:
• Inside of region (shortest route) Along outline:
Running Stitch Path • Along outline (along the inner side)
• Onto outline (on the outline)
The inside of region setting is available only when the Gradation Onto outline:
check box is cleared.
Default: Inside of region
Sets the pitch of the stitching. Step pitch
Range: 1–10 mm (0.04–0.39 inch)
Step Pitch Default: 4.0 mm (0.16 inch)

92
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 93 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Center Stage 4 (Sew Setting Stage)

Sets the spacial frequency steps. 30% 0%

Range: 0–99%
Frequency
Default: 30%

Lengthens the sewing region in the stitch pattern’s sewing direction to prevent pattern shrink-
age during sewing.
Pull Compensation
Range: 0–2 mm (0.00–0.08 inch)
Default: 0.0 mm (0.00 inch)

Advanced Opreation
Programmable fill stitch

Design Center
Sets underlay stitching on or off. Try to use underlay stitching for wide areas, in order to pre-
vent shrinking during stitching. Depending on the shape of the region, however, it may not be
Under sewing possible to select this setting.
On: Underlay stitching will be sewn.
Off: Underlay stitching will not be sewn.
Sets the number of lines per millimeter.
Density Range: 1–7 lines per mm (25–178 lines per inch)
Default: 4.5 lines per mm (114 lines per inch)
Sets the density gradation setting on or off.
Available when the type of sewing direction is set to Constant.
Gradation Click Pattern to set the gradation pattern and its density.
Default: Off
For details on this attribute, refer to“Creating a gradation” on page 96.
[Type] Specifies the type of sewing direction.
Constant: Sews at a fixed angle. The angle is specified by the angle setting.
Variable: Varies the sewing direction according to the object being sewn.
[Angle] Specifies the sewing angle. 90°
Direction 135° 45°
Available only when the sewing direction type is
set to Constant. 180° 0°
Range: 0–359 degrees 225° 315°
Default: 45 degrees 270°
Sets half stitching on or off.
Available when the type of sewing direction is set to Vari- On:
able.
Half Stitch
If one side of the fill stitching is dense, a half stitch could be
Off:
sewn automatically to provide a more even density.
Default: Off
Sets the running path of the stitching. Inside of region:
Available when the type of sewing direction is set to Constant.
Available settings:
• Inside of region (shortest route) Along outline:
Running Stitch Path • Along outline (along the inner side)
• Onto outline (on the outline)
The inside of region setting is available only when the Gradation Onto outline:
check box is cleared.
Default: Inside of region
Lengthens the sewing region in the stitch pattern’s sewing direction to prevent pattern shrink-
age during sewing.
Pull Compensation
Range: 0–2 mm (0.00–0.08 inch)
Default: 0.0 mm (0.00 inch)

93
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 94 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Center Stage 4 (Sew Setting Stage)

Select a pattern for programmable fill stitch.

Click , and then, in the Browse dialog box that appeared, select the folder
containing the .pas file that you want to use. Double-click the desired pattern, or
select it, and then click OK.
Sets the stitch pattern width.
Width (horizontal length) Range: 2–10 mm (0.20–0.39 inch)
Default: 7.5 mm (0.30 inch)
Sets the stitch pattern height.
Height (vertical length) Range: 5–10 mm (0.20–0.39 inch)
Default: 7.5 mm (0.30 inch)
Allows you to rotate the angle of the stitch patterns. 90°
135° 45°
Range: 0–359 degrees
Direction Default: 0 degrees 180° 0°
225° 315°
270°
Sets the direction of the offset as row/column.
row
Direction
column
Programma- Offset
ble fill When the pattern’s arrangement is offset, sets the amount of offset.
Value Range: 0–99%
Default: 0%
Specifies the shape of stitching on the edges.
Available only when the Base Sew check box is
Stitch selected.
Type
Available settings: ,
Base
Sew Default:
Specifies Sets the pitch of the stitching for the base of a programmable fill stitch.
the base Available only when the Base Sew check box is Step pitch
stitching. Step Pitch selected.
(For details, Range: 1–10 mm (0.04–0.39 inch)
refer to the Default: 4.0 mm (0.16 inch)
illustration
Sets the spacial frequency steps of the stitching for the base of a programmable
below.)
fill stitch.
Available only when the Base Sew check box is 30% 0%
Frequency
selected.
Range: 0–99%
Default: 30%

The stitching for the base (area

other than the pattern indicated
Pattern by the diagonal lines) of the pro-
grammable fill stitch can be set.

The pattern is sewn with the

specified stitching.

94
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 95 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Center Stage 4 (Sew Setting Stage)

Motif stitch
Selects whether to use pattern 1 or pattern 2 for the motif stitch. If you choose to use both patterns, the data
is created to sew alternating rows of the two.
Pattern1 only: Uses only pattern 1 (Default)
Pattern2 only: Uses only pattern 2
Pattern1 and 2: Uses pattern 1 and pattern 2
Select a pattern for the motif stitch.

Click , and then, in the Browse dialog box that appeared, select the

Advanced Opreation
Design Center
folder containing the .pmf file that you want to use. Double-click the desired
pattern, or select it, and then click OK.
Sets the pattern width (the direction along the line).
Width (hori-
Range: 2–10 mm (0.08–0.39 inch)
zontal length)
Default: 5.0 mm (0.20 inch)
Sets the pattern height (the direction perpendicular to the line).
Pattern1 Height (verti-
Range: 2–10 mm (0.08–0.39 inch)
Pattern 2 cal length)
Default: 5.0 mm (0.20 inch)
H-Arrange Normal:
Sets the horizontal arrangement of the pattern. For
(horizontal
Motif patterns like , the patterns will be arranged along Mirror:
arrange-
the line as shown at the right.
ment) Alternate:
V-Arrange Normal:
Sets the vertical arrangement of the pattern. For pat-
(vertical
terns like , the patterns will be arranged along the Mirror:
arrange-
line as shown at the right.
ment) Alternate:
Allows you to rotate the angle of the motif stitch. 90°
135° 45°
Range: 0–359 degrees
Direction Default: 0 degrees 180° 0°
225° 315°
270°
Sets the amount of offset for each row.
Range: 0–10 mm (0.00–0.39 inch)
Row Offset
Default: 0.0 mm (0.00 inch)

Sets the pitch of the sewing.

Run Pitch Range: 1–10 mm (0.04–0.39 inch)
Default: 2.0 mm (0.08 inch)

Cross stitch
Sets the horizontal and vertical size of the pattern.
In Expert mode, the set value is converted automatically and displayed in the box for the other
Size measurement units.
Range: 1.5–5.0 mm (0.06–0.20 inch) or 5–17 counts
Default: 2.5 mm (0.10 inch) or 10 counts
Sets the number of times that the pattern will be sewn. Sews twice per time.
Times Range: Single, Double, Triple
Default: Single

Concentric circle stitch, radial stitch and spiral stitch

For details on moving the center point of the concentric circle stitch and the radial stitch, refer to “Moving the
center point of the concentric circle stitch and radial stitch” on page 97.
Sets the number of lines per millimeter.
Density Range: 0.5–7.0 lines per mm (13–178 lines per inch)
Default: 2.0 lines per mm (51 lines per inch)
Sets the pitch of the line sewing.
Run pitch Range: 1–10 mm (0.04–0.39 inch)
Default: 2.0 mm (0.08 inch)

95
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 96 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Center Stage 4 (Sew Setting Stage)

Notes on programmable fill stitches

When setting the sew type and pattern directions of Creating a gradation
a programmable fill stitch, lines will not be sewn if
With a satin stitch, fill stitch or programmable fill
the sew type and pattern direction settings cause a
stitch, the density of the color can be adjusted at
stitch to be sewn in the same direction as a line in
various locations to create a custom gradation
the stitch pattern.
pattern.
Use the Preview function to view exactly how the
stitch pattern will be sewn, and then set the stitch 1. In Expert mode of the Sewing Attribute
direction and pattern direction according to the Setting dialog box, select the Gradation
selected sew type or to the effect that you want to check box.
produce. To get an even better view, make test
samples of different settings. 2. Click Pattern.

Examples of programmable fill stitching: → The Gradation Pattern Setting dialog

box appears.
Example 1
Stitch direction: 45° (default)

Example 2
Stitch direction: 90° 3. To select a preset gradation pattern, click the
desired pattern under Select pattern.

4. Move the sliders to adjust the density of the

gradation pattern.

b Memo:
The preview area shows the setting changes
that you make.

5. Click OK.
Example 3
Stitch direction: 0°
b Memo:
To close the dialog box without applying the
changes to the gradation pattern, click
Cancel.

c “Previewing the Sewing Image” on

page 102 and “Programmable Stitch
Creator” on page 208

96
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 97 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Center Stage 4 (Sew Setting Stage)

Moving the center point of the Specifying hole sewing

concentric circle stitch and radial stitch By specifying hole sewing, the stitching in
overlapping regions will not be sewn twice. Hole
In order to increase the decorative effect, you can
sewing can be set only when one region completely
move the center point of regions set to the
encloses another.
concentric circle stitch or radial stitch.

1.

Advanced Opreation
Click on the Tool Box.
1.

Design Center
Click on the Tool Box.
→ The shape of the pointer changes to
→ The shape of the pointer changes to
.
.

2. Select the desired color and sew type

2. Click the region that completely encloses
another region.
(Concentric Circle Stitch or Radial Stitch).

3. Click the region.

→ The center point ( ) appears.

4. Drag the center point to the desired location. → A Set hole sewing dialog box similar to
the one shown below appears.

b Memo:
To cancel hole sewing, click the white inner
region. The inner region will be sewn twice
when it appears in the same color as the
outer region.

b Memo:

To move the center point later, click ,

and then click the region with the concentric
circle stitch or radial stitch applied. The
center point appears and can be moved. 3. Click OK to set hole sewing.

b Memo:
To quit applying hole sewing, click Cancel.

97
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 98 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Center Stage 4 (Sew Setting Stage)

Applying and Editing Stamps

Stamps created with Programmable Stitch Creator can be applied to regions in stage 4 (Sew Setting stage) of
Design Center. Some stamp patterns are provided with this application; however, by using Programmable
Stitch Creator, you can edit the patterns that are provided or you can create your own.

4. To change the orientation of the stamp, move

Applying a stamp the pointer over the red arrow inside of the
circle under Direction, and then drag the red
arrow to the desired angle.
1. Click on the Tool Box.

→ The shape of the pointer changes to

b Memo:
• The dialog box remains displayed so that
, and the Stamp Attribute Setting the size and orientation of the stamp can
be adjusted at any time.
dialog box appears. • To close the dialog box, click Close.
• To open the dialog box again after closing
it, click .

5. Click the region where you want to apply the

!!scr114.bmp!! stamp to select it.
→ “Marching lines” appear around the se-
lected region, and the shape of the pointer

2. In the dialog box, select a stamp pattern (.pas changes to whenever it is moved
file with stamp settings applied). over the selected region.

6.
b Memo:
Click the desired locations within the region
where you want to apply the stamp.
• Engraving and embossing stamp settings
appear as red- and blue-filled areas. → The stamps appear as dotted lines in the
• .pas files with no stamp settings are also region.
listed.
• To select a different folder, click .

b Memo:
In the Browse for Folder dialog box that • The whole stamp appears, even if it is
appeared, select the desired folder, and larger than the region that it has been
then click OK (or double-click the folder) to applied to, however, only the parts that are
close the Browse for Folder dialog box enclosed within the region will be sewn.
and display the stamp patterns from the • Stamps can only be applied to regions that
selected folder in the preview window. have the satin stitch, fill stitch and
programmable fill stitch applied.
• To apply several stamps within the same
3. To change the width and height of the stamp, region, continue clicking the region as
type or select the desired size (1 to 100 mm often as needed.
(0.04 to 3.94 in.)) under Size in the Stamp • If the pointer cannot fit within the selected
Attribute Setting dialog box. region, the stamp cannot be applied.
• The Stamp Attribute Setting dialog box
appears only after a stamp tool is selected.

98
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 99 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Center Stage 4 (Sew Setting Stage)

• Stamps are only sewn within the region

that they have been applied to. a Note:
• The size of stamps may change when they Only one stamp can be selected at a time. If
are imported into Layout & Editing if the you select another stamp, the previously
size of the design has been changed with selected stamp becomes deselected.
the Magnification setting in the Import
size dialog box.
4. To change the stamp pattern, select a
different pattern in the Stamp Attribute

Advanced Opreation
Setting dialog box, and then click Apply.

Design Center
Editing a stamp To change the stamp size and orientation,
specify the desired settings in the Stamp
Attribute Setting dialog, or adjust it by
1. Click on the Tool Box.
dragging the handles or rotation handle.
→ The shape of the pointer changes to To move a stamp, drag it to another location
within the region or partially positioned on the
, the Stamp Attribute Setting dia- region.
log box appears, and stamps that have To delete the stamp, select the menu
been applied are indicated by pink dotted command Edit – Delete, or press the
lines.
Delete key.

b Memo:
• Stamps appear only after a stamp tool is
selected.
• Stamps are only sewn within the region
that they have been applied to.
• To close the dialog box, click Close.

c “Editing Outlines” on page 78

b Memo:
If a region was already selected, “marching
lines” appear around the region, and its
stamps are indicated by dotted lines.

2. Click the region with the stamp that you want

to edit.
→ “Marching lines” appear around the se-
lected region.

3. Click the stamp that you want to edit.

→ Round handles appear around the stamp,
and a rotation handle appears at the top of
the stamp.

Rotation handle

Handles

99
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 100 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Center Stage 4 (Sew Setting Stage)

Viewing and Modifying the Sewing Order

The sewing order of pattern colors as well as the sewing order of pattern objects of the same color can be
checked and modified as necessary. (This function is available only in stage 4 (Sew Setting stage).)

Toolbar button:
b Memo:
• To select additional frames, hold down the
1. Click , or click Sew, then Sewing Order.
Shift or Ctrl key and select each
→ The Color tab of a Sewing Order dialog frame.
box similar to the one shown below ap- • In the Design Page, “marching lines”
pears. appear around the selected region or
along the selected outline.

3. To view the sewing order of multiple patterns

of the same color, select the frame that you
want to view, and then click the Part tab.
→ The individual patterns with the same col-
or appear in different frames.
b Memo:
• The frames containing regions are
separated from the frames containing
outlines with a thick vertical line. Frames
from one side of the line cannot be moved
to the other side.
• The patterns will be sewn in the order
shown, from left to right. All regions are
always sewn before the outlines. 4. To change the sewing order of a pattern,
• To enlarge the pattern for better viewing, select the frame for the pattern that you want
click . to move, and then drag the frame to the
desired position.
→ A red line appears, indicating the position
2. To change the sewing order of a color, select where the frame is being moved.
the frame for the color that you want to move,
and then drag the frame to the desired b Memo:
position.
• To select additional frames, hold down the
→ A red line appears, indicating the position Shift or Ctrl key and select each
where the frame is being moved. frame.
• In the Design Page, “marching lines”
appear around the selected region or
along the selected outline.

5. Click OK to apply the changes and to close the

dialog box.

b Memo:
To close the dialog box without applying the
changes to the sewing order, click Cancel.

c “Previewing the Sewing Image” on

page 102

100
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 101 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Center Stage 4 (Sew Setting Stage)

Checking the Stitching

The actual stitching as it will be performed by the sewing machine can be viewed using the stitch simulator.
(This function is available only in stage 4 (Sew Setting stage).)

Toolbar button:
b Memo:
The slider shows the current location in the
1. Click , or click Display, then Stitch simulation. In addition, adjust the slider to

Advanced Opreation
Design Center
Simulator. change the position in the simulation.
The Stitch Simulator dialog box appears,
and the embroidery pattern is cleared from the
Design Page.
Drag the slider indicated by to adjust the
simulation stitching speed.

b Memo:
To begin the stitching simulation, click
• The first number beside indicates the
. number of the current stitch, and the
second number indicates the total number
b Memo: of stitches.
• During the stitching simulation, this button • The first number beside indicates the
changes to a pause button ( ). number of the color being drawn, and the
second number indicates the total number
• A marker ( ) indicates the position in of colors used.
the simulation.
• To get a better view of the stitching, zoom
in on the design before opening the Stitch 2. Click in the upper-right corner of the
Simulator dialog box.
dialog box to close the dialog box.

To reverse the simulation to the beginning of

the previous color, click .

To advance the simulation to the beginning of

the next color, click .

To reverse the stitching by a specified number
of stitches, type or select the desired number

of stitches, and then click .

To advance the stitching by a specified
number of stitches, type or select the desired

number of stitches, and then click .

To stop the simulation and return to the

beginning, click .

101
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 102 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Center Stage 4 (Sew Setting Stage)

Previewing the Sewing Image

Once the embroidery pattern is complete or while you work on the design, you can preview the pattern’s
stitches. You can also view a realistic preview of the pattern in order to see how it will appear once it is sewn.
(These functions are available only in stage 4 (Sew Setting stage).)

1. To display a preview of the embroidery → A realistic preview of the embroidery pat-

pattern, click Display on the menu bar, and tern appears.
then click Preview.
An alternate method is to click the Toolbar
button indicated below.

Preview

→ A preview of the embroidery pattern ap-

pears.

b Memo:
To zoom in (or out), click (or ) on the
Tool Box, and then click the desired area of
the embroidery pattern.

4. To leave the realistic preview display, repeat

step 3., or press the Esc key.

a Note:
b Memo: • The embroidery pattern cannot be edited
while the realistic preview is displayed.
To zoom in (or out), click (or ) on the • The Realistic Preview function cannot
Tool Box, and then click the desired area of display a clean preview of the pattern if the
the embroidery pattern. monitor is set to 256 colors or less. The
monitor should be set to at least 16-bit
High Color (65536 colors).
2. To leave the preview display, repeat step 1.,
or press the Esc key.
Changing realistic preview
a Note: settings
The embroidery pattern cannot be edited
while the preview is displayed. You can change the realistic preview settings to
better view the embroidery pattern. (This function is
3. To display a realistic preview of the available only in stage 4 (Sew Setting stage).)
embroidery pattern, click Display on the menu 1. Click Display, then Realistic Preview
bar, and then click Realistic Preview.
Attribute Setting.
An alternate method is to click the Toolbar
button indicated below. → A Realistic Preview Attribute dialog box
similar to the ones shown below appears.

Realistic Preview

102
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 103 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Center Stage 4 (Sew Setting Stage)

2. Use the Thread Width slider to set how wide Or, click OK to save the settings for the next
the thread will appear. time that the Realistic Preview function is
select (when the realistic preview is not
3. Use the Contrast slider to set the contrast. displayed).

4. Use the Brightness slider to set how bright b Memo:

the display is. To close the dialog box without applying the
changes to the settings, click Close or
5. Click Apply to display a realistic preview of the Cancel.

Advanced Opreation
Design Center
patterns with the new settings (when the
realistic preview is displayed).
c “Previewing the Sewing Image” on
page 102

Viewing Patterns in the Reference

Window
All outlines and patterns in the Design Page are displayed in the Reference Window, giving you an overall view
of the pattern while you work on a detailed area. The display area frame (red rectangle) indicates the part of
the pattern displayed in the Design Page.

Zooming Moving the display area

The pattern displayed in the Reference Window can frame
be reduced to fit completely within the Reference
The part of the pattern displayed in the Design Page
Window or enlarged to display only the pattern.
can be selected from the Reference Window.

1. Click . 1. Move the pointer over the display area frame.

→ The shape of the pointer changes to .
→ The pattern is displayed so that it fills the
Reference Window. 2. Drag the display area frame so that it
surrounds the desired part of the pattern.
→ The selected part of the pattern is dis-
played in the Design Page.

Redrawing the display area

frame
Instead of moving the display area frame, the frame
can be redrawn to display the desired part of the
pattern in the Design Page.

1. Drag the pointer over the desired part of the

pattern in the Reference Window.
→ The display area frame is redrawn, and
the selected part of the pattern is dis-
played in the Design Page.

103
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 104 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Center Stage 4 (Sew Setting Stage)

Scaling the display area b Memo:

frame and are for scaling the height

and width.
1. Move the pointer over a corner of the display
area frame. 2. Drag the corner to adjust the display area
frame to the desired size.
→ The shape of the pointer changes to

or , depending on the corner that the

pointer is over.

Saving
2. Select the drive and the folder, and then type
Overwriting in the file name.

Once the image or pattern has been saved,

changes can easily be saved so that the latest
b Memo:
• The correct extension is automatically
version can be retrieved later.
selected.
• Image data from stage 1 (Original Image
Toolbar button: stage) can only be saved as a bitmap file
(.bmp).
1. Click , or click File, then Save. In stage 2 (Line Image stage), image data
is saved as a .pel file.
→ If the image or pattern has already been In stage 3 (Figure Handle stage) and stage
4 (Sew Setting stage), pattern data is
saved at least once, the file is saved im-
saved as a .pem file.
mediately.
→ If no file name has been specified or if the
file cannot be found, the Save As dialog a Note:
box appears. If you select a file type of a previous software
version, saved .pem files can be opened
with that version of the software; however,
Saving with a new name some information may be lost.

The current file can be saved with a different file

3. Click Save to save the data.
name in order to keep the original unchanged or to
keep various versions of the same image or pattern.
Files can be saved as bitmap files (.bmp) in stage 1
b Memo:
(Original Image stage), .pel files in stage 2 (Line • To quit the operation, click Cancel.
Image stage), and .pem files in stage 3 (Figure • If a file already exists with the name
specified in the Save As dialog box, the
Handle stage) and stage 4 (Sew Setting stage).
following message appears.
1. Click File, then Save As.
→ A Save As dialog box similar to the one
shown below appears.

• To overwrite the file, click Yes.

• If you do not want to overwrite the
existing file, click No. You can then
enter a different file name.

104
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 105 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Center Stage 4 (Sew Setting Stage)

Changing Software Settings

Changing the grid settings Changing the measurement
A grid of dotted lines or solid lines can be displayed units
or hidden, and the spacing for the grid can be
The measurements for values displayed in the
adjusted. (This function is available only in stage 3

Advanced Opreation
application can be in either millimeters or inches.

Design Center
(Figure Handle stage).)
1. Click Option, then Select System Unit, and
1. Click Display, then Grid Setup.
then select the desired measurement units
→ The Grid Setting dialog box appears. (mm or inch).

2. To display the grid, select the Show Grid

check box.
To hide the grid, clear the Show Grid check
box.

3. To set the grid spacing, type or select a value

in the Grid interval box. (The setting range is
0.1 to 25.4 mm (0.004 to 1.0 inch).)

4. To display the grid as solid lines, select the

with Axes check box.
To display the grid as dotted lines, clear the
with Axes check box.

a Note:
When the Show Grid check box is selected
and the with Axes check box is cleared,
only the intersecting points of the grid will be
displayed.

5. Click OK to apply the changes and to close the

dialog box.

b Memo:
To close the dialog box without applying the
changes to the grid, click Cancel.

105
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 106 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing

Layout & Editing is used to combine different objects into an embroidery pattern. The most complex objects
can be digitized in Design Center and imported into the Design Page, or created in Layout & Editing with the
wizard for automatically converting an image into an embroidery pattern. Furthermore, you can add text and
monograms, rectangles, circles, broken lines, curves, and manual punching patterns, and define sewing
attributes (thread color and sew type, including stitch patterns created in Programmable Stitch Creator) to the
different objects of the embroidery pattern. You can move all of the patterns to obtain the best layout, and cut
portions of patterns and rearrange them as desired.
Once the embroidery pattern is completed, you can save your work on the computer hard disk, print it, or
transfer it to an original card (or whatever media your sewing machine uses) so that it can be sewn from your
machine.

■ Inputting Images and Embroidery Patterns

Images from existing files, such as clip art or custom-made portrait drawings, and images from TWAIN devices
or the Clipboard can be imported into Layout & Editing. These images can be traced or used with the wizard
to automatically create embroidery patterns. In addition, embroidery patterns created in Design Center or a
pattern from an embroidery card can be imported into the Layout & Editing Design Page.

■ Editing Embroidery Patterns

The embroidery patterns in the Design Page can be edited by adding text and other drawn objects to
customize the embroidery pattern.

■ Checking Embroidery Patterns

After designing the embroidery pattern, you can preview it. In the preview, you can view the stitches. In the
realistic preview, you can see how the design will look when it is sewn. You can also view the sewing order for
each object in the design.

■ Saving and Printing

When the embroidery pattern is finished, it can be saved on the computer’s hard disk in one of many formats
(.pes, .dst, .hus, .exp, or, .pcs). In addition, the pattern can be transferred to an original card by using the USB
card writer, to a floppy disk, or to other types of media used by your sewing machine, such as CompactFlash
cards and USB media. In addition, the embroidery pattern can be printed.

■ Changing Software Settings

Grid settings for the Design Page and measurement units can be adjusted to help create the embroidery
pattern and place added objects.

■ Information for Optional Large-Size Hoop Users

Combined embroidery patterns can be created specifically for multi-position hoops, including the Jumbo Hoop
or Extra Large Hoop.

106
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 107 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing

Main Window
1 B
2
3 A
4 0
5 9

Advanced Opreation
Layout & Editing
6

1 Title bar 7 Reference Window

2 Menu bar Displays all patterns in the work area, giving you
Provides access to the functions. an overview while you work on a detailed area.
(For more details, refer to “Viewing Patterns in
3 Toolbar the Reference Window” on page 193.)
Provides shortcuts for the menu commands.
8 Design Page
4 Sewing Attributes bar The actual part of the work area that can be
Sets the sewing attributes (color and sew type) saved and sewn.
of lines and regions in the pattern.
9 Work area
5 Tool Box
0 Minimize button
Used to create, select and edit patterns.
A Maximize button
6 Status bar
Provides helpful information. B Close button

107
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 108 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing

Inputting Images and Embroidery Patterns

Creating a Design Page

→ The Design Page Property dialog box
Creating a new Design Page appears.

Toolbar button:

1. Click , or click File, then New.

→ If the current Design Page has already

been saved or has not been edited, a new
Design Page immediately appears.
→ If the current Design Page has not been
saved, you will be asked whether you
want to save the changes.
2. Select the Design Page size.
To adjust the Design Page size according to
the hoop size, select Hoop Size, and then
select the desired hoop size from the selector.
To specify a custom Design Page size, select
Custom Size, and then type or select the
desired width and height for the Design Page.
b Memo: (The setting range is 100 to 1000 mm (3.9 to
• To save the Design Page, click Yes. 39.4 inches).)
• To abandon the Design Page, click No. In order to make adjustments to the fabric with
• To return to the Design Page, for example, the layout adjustment function of your sewing
to modify it or save it with another file machine, select a Design Page size from the
name, click Cancel. Section Size (for Hoop Size) selector. These
Design Page sizes are 10 mm (0.39 in.)
smaller than regular embroidery hoops. (This
c “Opening a Layout & Editing file” below
and “Saving” on page 194 function is not for multi-position hooping. For
details on multi-position hoops, refer to
“Selecting the Design Page size” on
Specifying the Design Page page 203.)

The color and size of the Design Page in addition to b Memo:

the color of the background can be changed. You • The preview area shows the setting
can select a Design Page size according to the size changes that you make.
of hoop that you will be using with your sewing • When Hoop Size is selected, the sewing
machine. You can also customize the Design Page machine image shows the orientation of
for patterns that will be split into sections. the Design Page (hoop) in relation to the
machine.
1. Click Option, then Design Page Property.

3. From the Page selector, select the desired

color for the Design Page.

4. From the Background selector, select the

desired color for the background.

5. Click OK.

108
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 109 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Inputting Images and Embroidery Patterns

b Memo:
Opening a Layout & Editing file
• To return to the default settings (100 × 100
mm (4" × 4") of Hoop Size), click Default. An embroidery pattern that has previously been
• Before an embroidery pattern created in a saved as a Layout & Editing file (.pes file) can be
custom Design Page is saved or opened.
transferred to an original card, running
stitches, which cannot be edited, are
added at the edges of the pattern sections Toolbar button:
so that the pattern sections can easily be
aligned during sewing. This alignment 1. Click , or click File, then Open.
stitching appears in the NOT DEFINED
color. (For more details, refer to → A File Open dialog box similar to the one
“Embroidering” on page 65.) shown below appears.
• To close the dialog box without applying
the changes to the settings, click Cancel.

Advanced Opreation
Layout & Editing
a Note:
• The Design Page sizes 130 × 300 mm,
300 × 130 mm, 100 × 172 mm, and 172 ×
100 mm, indicated by “*”, are used to
embroider multi-position patterns using a
special embroidery hoop attached to the
sewing machine at three installation
positions. Check that you have the multi- b Memo:
position embroidery hoop and that these This dialog box can be resized so that the
multi-position patterns can be folder contents can be viewed better. The
embroidered using your sewing machine. size of the dialog box is retained until it is
• Do not select a hoop size larger than the changed again.
embroidery hoop that can be used with
your machine.
• Custom Design Page sizes cannot be 2. Select the drive and the folder.
saved for version 5 and earlier.
• Although a custom Design Page size can b Memo:
be specified, since processing will take too • If the Preview check box is selected, the
long when trying to create an extremely contents of the selected file will appear in
large pattern with the Photo Stitch the Preview box.
function, the message “Too large image to • To quit the operation and close the dialog
convert” will appear if the size exceeds a box, click Cancel.
width or height of 500 mm (19 3/4 in.).
After the message is closed, the photo is
automatically selected, and is ready to be
moved or reduced. a Note:
• Be sure to select a folder that contains.pes
files.
c “Specifying a Design Page size” on
page 60 and “Changing the measurement • If a .pes file is saved with objects
units” on page 202 extending off the Design Page or with the
number of stitches or number of colors for
the objects exceeding the Design Page
limitations, a preview of the image cannot
be displayed.

3. To view the contents of the .pes files in the

currently selected folder, click Browse.

109
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 110 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Inputting Images and Embroidery Patterns

→ A Browse dialog box similar to the one → If the current Design Page has not been
shown below appears. saved, you will be asked whether you
want to save the changes.

b Memo:
• To save the Design Page, click Yes.
• To abandon the Design Page, click No.
• To return to the Design Page, for example,
to modify it or save it with another file
b Memo: name, click Cancel.
• To return to the File Open dialog box, click
Cancel.
• To see a more detailed image, select a file,
c “Saving” on page 194

and then click Preview. A Preview dialog

box similar to the one shown below
appears.

• To open the displayed file, click Open.

• To return to the Browse dialog box,
click Cancel.

a Note:
If a .pes file is saved with objects extending
off the Design Page or with the number of
stitches or number of colors for the objects
exceeding the Design Page limitations, a
preview of the image cannot be displayed.

4. To open a file, select it, and then click Open,

or double-click the file’s icon.
→ If the current Design Page has already
been saved or has not been edited, the
contents of the selected file immediately
appear in the Design Page.

110
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 111 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Inputting Images and Embroidery Patterns

Importing Image Data

Importing image data a Note:
• With .pcd and .fpx files containing many
Image data from an existing file can be imported into pages, only the first page can be opened.
a Design Page and used as a guide for creating an Tiff files with LZW compression cannot be
embroidery pattern. The file name extension must opened.
be one of the following: Windows bitmap (.bmp), • You can change the size and position of
Exif (.tif, .jpg), ZSoftPCX (.pcx), Windows Meta File an imported image, and then save that
(.wmf), Portable Network Graphics (.png), information with the .pes file. The next
Encapsulated PostScript (.eps), Kodak PhotoCD time that you import the same image into
(.pcd), FlashPix (.fpx), JPEG2000 (.j2k). the saved .pes file, a message appears,
asking whether to input the image at its
1. previously saved position and size or at its

Advanced Opreation
Click Image, then Input, then from File.

Layout & Editing

original position (the center of the Design
→ An Open an image file dialog box similar Page).
to the one shown below appears. • Only one image can be added to the work
area. If you try to display a different image,
it will replace the previous one.

Importing image data from a TWAIN

device, such as a scanner
Images can be imported into the current Design Page
from a scanner or other TWAIN device and used as a
2. Select the drive, the folder and the desired file. template for creating an embroidery pattern.

b Memo: b Memo:
If the Preview check box is selected, the TWAIN is an application interface (API)
contents of the selected file will appear in the standardization for software that controls
Preview box. scanners and other devices.

3. Click Open to open the file. 1. Check that the scanner or other TWAIN
device is correctly connected to your
→ The image appears in the work area. computer.

b Memo: 2. Click Image, then Select TWAIN device.

• Double-clicking the file name also opens → A Select Source dialog box similar to the
the file and closes the dialog box.
one shown below appears.
• To quit the operation, click Cancel.
• If the image was saved at a specific
resolution, it is displayed at that resolution.
• If the image currently displayed in the
Design Page has not yet been saved, you
will be asked whether you want to save it.
• To display, hide, or display a faded copy of
the image that remains in the work area,
click Image, then Display Image, and 3. From the Sources list, click the desired device
then click the desired display setting. to select it.
• To display the original image, click
On.
• To display a faded copy of the image,
a Note:
click Faded. If no TWAIN device is installed, there will be
no names displayed in the Sources list.
• To hide the original image, click Off.
First, install the driver software for the
TWAIN device that you want to use.

111
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 112 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Inputting Images and Embroidery Patterns

4. Click Select to choose the selected device → The Portrait Properties dialog box ap-
and to close the dialog box. pears.

b Memo:
To quit the operation and close the dialog
box, click Cancel.

5. Click Image, then Input, then from TWAIN

device.
→ The driver interface for the device select-
ed in the Select Source dialog box ap-
pears.

6. Specify the necessary settings for importing 2. From the Facial Feature selector, select the
an image, and then import the image. overall contour (appearance) of the portrait
(for example, narrow, wide, or child-like)

a Note: b Memo:
For information on using the driver interface,
The preview area shows the setting changes
refer to the help manual for that interface, or
that you make.
contact the manufacturer of the interface.

→ When the image transfer between the 3. From the Part selector, select the part of the
scanner (or other device) and the driver is portrait to be changed.
completed, the imported image will be
pasted into the Design Page at its original b Memo:
size. The part of the portrait to be changed can
also be selected by clicking it in the preview
b Memo: area.
• If the image currently displayed in the
Design Page has not yet been saved, you
will be asked whether you want to save it. 4. Move the Part Variation slider to select the
• To display, hide, or display a faded copy of desired part variation.
the image that remains in the work area,
click Image, then Display Image, and b Memo:
then click the desired display setting. • To change both sides of a part together,
• To display the original image, click such as the eyes or ears, select the
On. Change Both Left and Right check box.
• To display a faded copy of the image, • The selected part variation is shown in the
click Faded. sample image.
• To hide the original image, click Off. • To display all variations of the selected

part, click .
a Note:
Only one image can be added to the work
area. If you try to display a different image, it
will replace the previous one.

Creating a portrait image

Combine images of facial features provided with the
application to create an original portrait image.

1. Click Image, then Input, then from Portrait.

112
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 113 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Inputting Images and Embroidery Patterns

• To display the images of all parts

combined, select the Display With Importing image data from
Other Parts check box in the Part
Variations List dialog box that the Clipboard
appeared.
• Select a part from the list, and then Image data can be imported into the Design Page
click OK. from the Clipboard. This allows you to import an
image without saving it first.

5. To select a part feature (for example, standard 1. Click Image, then Input, then from
size, slightly larger, slightly smaller, wider or Clipboard.
taller), move the Part Feature slider, if it is
available. a Note:
6. To change the color of the parts, click the This can only be done when there is image
data on the Clipboard.
Color tab, click the selector for the color that

Advanced Opreation
Layout & Editing
you want to change, and then select the
→ The image is displayed in the Design
desired color from the color list that appeared.
Page.

b Memo:
• The image is displayed with a resolution of
100 dpi for both the height and width.
• If the image currently displayed in the
Design Page has not yet been saved, you
will be asked whether you want to save it.

Changing the display

7. Click OK.
settings of images
→ The portrait image is displayed in the De- The image that remains in the work area can be
sign Page. displayed or hidden, or a faded copy of the image
can be displayed.
b Memo: 1. Click Image, then Display Image, and then
• If the image currently displayed in the select the desired setting.
Design Page has not yet been saved, you
will be asked whether you want to save it. To display the original image, click On.
• To display, hide, or display a faded copy of To display a faded copy of the image, click
the image that remains in the work area, Faded.
click Image, then Display Image, and
then click the desired display setting. To hide the original image, click Off.
• To display the original image, click
On. b Memo:
• To display a faded copy of the image, • This function is not available if no image
click Faded. has been imported into the Design Page.
• To hide the original image, click Off. • Press the shortcut key ( F6 ) to switch
between displaying the image to
displaying it faded to hiding the image.
a Note:
Only one image can be added to the work
area. If you try to display a different image, it
will replace the previous one.

113
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 114 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Inputting Images and Embroidery Patterns

Changing the Size and Position of the

Image
The size and position of the image can be adjusted.

1. Click Image, then Modify. Scaling an image:

→ A red line and handles appear around the 1. Move the pointer over one of the handles.
image.
→ The shape of the pointer changes to
, , or , depending
on the handle that the pointer is over.

b Memo:
• is for scaling the width.
• is for scaling the height.

• and are for scaling both

dimensions at the same time.
b Memo:
The status bar shows the dimensions (width
and height) of the image. 2. Drag the handle to adjust the image to the
desired size.

Moving an image: Deleting an image:

1. Move the pointer over the image. 1. Press the Delete key, or click Edit, then
→ The shape of the pointer changes to . Delete.
→ The image will be deleted from the Design
2. Drag the image to the desired location.
Page.

Saving the Image Data

The image can be saved as a file or outputted to the Clipboard.

■ Saving as a file
b Memo:
1. Click Image, then Output, then to File. • The correct extension is automatically
selected.
→ A dialog box similar to the one shown be-
• The image data can be saved in either of
low appears.
the following formats: Windows bitmap
(.bmp), Exif (.jpg).

4. Click Save to save the data.

b Memo:
To quit the operation, click Cancel.

■ Outputting to the Clipboard

2. Select the drive, the folder and the format in
1. Click Image, then Output, then to Clipboard.
which you want to save the image data. → The image data in the Design Page is
copied onto the Clipboard.
3. Type in the file name.

114
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 115 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Inputting Images and Embroidery Patterns

Automatically Converting Image Data Into

an Embroidery Pattern
The Image to Stitch Wizard gives step-by-step instructions for converting an image into an embroidery pattern.

Toolbar button: Cross Stitch:

Select this option to create a cross stitch
1. If no image is displayed in the Design Page, pattern.
use one of the commands on the Input sub-
Design Center:
menu of the Image menu to display the image
Select this option to start up Design Center
that you want to convert to an embroidery
with the Design Page image.
pattern.

2. Click Image, then Modify, and then re-size b Memo:

Advanced Opreation
Layout & Editing
and re-position the image for creating the To quit the operation and close the dialog
embroidery pattern. box, click Cancel.

3. Click , or click Image, then Image to

a Note:
Stitch Wizard. Although a custom Design Page size can be
→ The following dialog box appears. specified, since processing will take too long
when trying to create an extremely large
pattern with the Photo Stitch function, the
message “Too large image to convert” will
appear if the size exceeds a width or height
of 500 mm (19 3/4 in.). After the message is
closed, the photo is automatically selected,
and is ready to be moved or reduced.

■ If Auto Punch is selected

→ After the image characteristics are ana-
lyzed, an Image Analysis dialog box sim-
ilar to the one shown below appears.

a Note:
The dialog box will not appear if no image is
displayed in the Design Page. Instead, a
dialog box appears, allowing you to open an
image file.

4. Select the type of embroidery that you want to

create, and then click Next.
Auto Punch:
Select this option to automatically extract the
image for creating the embroidery pattern.
Photo Stitch 1:
Select this option to automatically create a 1. Select the desired settings.
realistic photo embroidery pattern. This option To display the resulting analyzed image, click
can be used to create embroidery patterns in the Result View tab. The embroidery pattern
color (Color) or black and white (Mono). will be created with this image.
Photo Stitch 2: To adjust the zoom ratio that the image is
Select this option to automatically create
realistic photo embroidery in 4 colors (Color) displayed in, move the slider between
or 1 color (Mono).
and .

115
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 116 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Inputting Images and Embroidery Patterns

To display the outline extracted from the 3. If necessary, in the Omit Colors list, click the
analyzed image, select the Show Outline colors to select whether or not they will be
check box. sewn.
Under Analysis Parameters, select the
desired image-analyzing settings.
Noise reduction: Sets the level of noise
(distortions) that is removed from the image.
Segmentation sensitivity: Sets the
sensitivity for the image analysis.
Outline smoothness: Sets the smoothness
of the extracted outline.
Max. Number of colors: Sets the number of
colors used.
b Memo:
From the Thread Chart selector, select the
Colors that are crossed out are set to not be
desired thread color chart. The most sewn.
appropriate thread colors from the selected
thread chart are selected. A user thread chart
can also be selected. 4. After selecting the desired settings, click
To display the original image, click the Finish.
Original View tab. → An embroidery pattern is created from the
analyzed data, the appropriate thread col-
b Memo: ors and sew type settings are applied, and
• After changing the settings, click Retry to then the pattern is displayed in the Design
display the image with the new settings Page.
applied. If Retry is not clicked, the new
settings are not applied. b Memo:
• To quit the operation and close the dialog The sew type settings of the created
box, click Cancel. embroidery pattern can later be changed in
• To return to the previous dialog box, click the same way as the settings for other
Previous. objects.

2. On the Result View tab, click the areas of the

■ If Photo Stitch 1 (Color) is
image to select whether or not they are to be
sewn.
selected
→ A Select Mask dialog box similar to the
b Memo: one shown below appears.
Areas not set to be sewn are shown filled
with a crosshatch pattern.

These areas
will not be sewn.

a Note:
If the width or height of the image exceeds
500 mm, the Photo Stitch functions cannot
be used.

116
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 117 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Inputting Images and Embroidery Patterns

Pattern edited with the adjustable mask

b Memo:
• To quit the operation and close the dialog
box, click Cancel.
• To return to the previous dialog box, click
Previous.

1. From the list at the bottom of the dialog box,

select the desired shape that the image will be
trimmed to (mask).

b Memo:
To automatically set a mask so that the
background is trimmed off, click Auto
Generate.

Advanced Opreation
a Note:

Layout & Editing

The mask size can be set in the range from
2. In the image preview box, move the handles of 64 × 64 dots to the size of the image.
the mask until it surrounds the desired part of
the image.
Image Tune
b Memo: Clicking the Image Tune button in the Select
• To display the Image Tune dialog box, Mask dialog box displays an Image Tune
where you can adjust the image, click dialog box similar to the one shown below.
Image Tune. (For more details, refer to
“Image Tune” on this page.)
• To display the image enlarged (or
reduced), move the ZOOM slider up (or
down).
• When the dialog box appears, the square
mask is selected.
• To create any shape of mask, select

, and then move, enter or delete

points to adjust the mask shape. To add
points, click the outline of the mask. To
delete points, select the point, and then
press the Delete key.

• If Auto Generate was clicked, is

selected, and the points in the outline of
the mask can be moved, added or deleted.
The image window displays the image
Pattern edited with the round mask resulting from the current settings.
Move the Original – Sharp slider to adjust the
sharpness of the image’s outlines. A setting
more towards Sharp makes a more
noticeable boundary between bright and dark
areas.
Move the Dark – Bright slider to adjust the
brightness of the image.
Move the Contrast Low – High slider to
adjust the contrast of the image.
Click OK to display the adjusted image in the
Select Mask dialog box and to close this
dialog box.

117
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 118 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Inputting Images and Embroidery Patterns

5.
b Memo:
Specify the settings for creating the
embroidery pattern.
To close the dialog box without applying the
changes to the settings, click Cancel.
b Memo:
• To return to the previous dialog box, click
3. In the Select Mask dialog box, click Next. Previous.
• To quit the operation and close the dialog
→ The image is analyzed, and the Check
box, click Cancel.
Mask Shape dialog box appears.

Sewing Option
Specifies how detailed the created
embroidery pattern will be. Selecting a
Detail setting closer to Fine creates more
details in the pattern and increases the
number of stitches.
Sets the sewing pitch. The pattern is
created with this setting value as the
Run pitch minimum length.
Range: 2 to 10 mm (0.08 to 0.39 inch)
Default: 3 mm (0.12 inch)
Select what parameter is given priority
when converting to embroidery pattern.
Stitch Quality: Creates a pattern while
giving priority to the stitching quality.
However, many jump stitches will result.
Conversion
b Memo: Priority Jump Stitch Reduction: Creates a
Areas not set to be sewn are shown filled pattern while giving priority to reducing
with a crosshatch pattern. the number of jump stitches in order to
reduce complications during
embroidering. However, the stitching
4. Click Next. quality will be slightly reduced.

→ The Photo Stitch 1 Parameters dialog

box appears. Image Type
If Photo is selected, the thread colors
will be mixed together, which will result
in a more natural look.
If Cartoon is selected, the thread colors
Photo/
will not be mixed together, which will
Cartoon
result in a more simply colored look.
Select Photo for image data from a
photograph, etc. Select Cartoon for
image data from an illustration, etc.

Design Page Color

If this check box is selected, the data for
the parts of the pattern that are the
same color as the Design Page will be
Sew Page
created. Clear the check box to keep
Color
the fabric the same color as the Design
Page.
Default: Selected

118
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 119 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Inputting Images and Embroidery Patterns

Auto Select Setting To move the color selected in the Color List
to the Use Color List, click Add. If no color is
Selects the thread chart for selecting
selected, or if the Use Color List already
the thread color with the Auto Select
function. contains 50 colors, this button cannot be
clicked.
The most appropriate thread colors
Thread Chart
from the selected thread chart are To delete the color selected in the Use Color
selected. List, click Remove. If no color is selected in
A user thread chart can also be the Use Color List, this button cannot be
selected. clicked.
Sets the number of colors selected by

Color Count
the Auto Select function. b Memo:
Range: 1 to 50 • The thread colors in the Color List and
Default: 10 Use Color List are listed, in order, starting
from the brightest. This order is the sewing
order and cannot be changed.

Advanced Opreation
Layout & Editing
Auto Select
• The maximum number of colors that can
Click this button to use the settings specified be added to the Use Color List is 50.
under Auto Select Setting and automatically • Thread colors displayed in the Use Color
select from the selected thread chart the most List are not displayed in the Color List.
appropriate thread colors for creating the • To select several colors, hold the Shift
photo embroidery. The selected thread colors key (to select adjacent colors) or the
appear in the Use Color List mentioned Ctrl key (to select colors that are not
below. adjacent), and then select the desired
This button can be clicked only if the settings colors.
under Auto Select Setting have been
changed. To apply the changes to the list and close the
dialog box, click OK. The edited settings will
Use Color List appear in the Photo Stitch 1 Parameters
dialog box. This button cannot be clicked if the
This list allows the selected thread colors to be Use Color List is empty.
checked and edited.
Thread colors selected for creating the
pattern are displayed, in order, by their
b Memo:
Use Color level of brightness. This order is the
To close the dialog box without applying the
List sewing order. The order cannot be
changes, click Cancel.
changed. The maximum number of
colors is 50.
6. In the Photo Stitch 1 Parameters dialog box,
Click this button to open the Edit List click Next.
dialog box, which lets you manually set
Edit List → A Preview dialog box similar to the one
the thread colors to be used when
creating the pattern (see below). shown below appears, allowing the creat-
ed embroidery pattern to be previewed.
Edit List
Click this button to display the Edit List dialog
box. In this dialog box, you can manually set
the thread colors to be used in the data
conversion.

119
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 120 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Inputting Images and Embroidery Patterns

3.
b Memo:
In the Select Mask dialog box, click Next.

• To return to the previous dialog box, click → A Gray Balance dialog box similar to the
Previous. one shown below appears.
• To quit the operation and close the dialog
box, click Cancel.

7. Click Finish.
→ An embroidery pattern is created and dis-
played in the Design Page.

■ If Photo Stitch 1 (Mono) is

selected
→ A Select Mask dialog box similar to the
one shown below appears.

4. Move the slider to specify which parts of the

image to create the embroidery pattern for.

a Note:
If the width or height of the image exceeds
500 mm, the Photo Stitch functions cannot
be used.

1. From the list at the bottom of the dialog box,

b Memo:
• Areas not set to be sewn are shown filled
select the desired shape that the image will be with a crosshatch pattern.
trimmed to (mask). • An embroidery pattern will be created from
any areas remaining in black.
b Memo: • To return to the previous dialog box, click
To automatically set a mask so that the Previous.
background is trimmed off, click Auto • To quit the operation and close the dialog
Generate. box, click Cancel.

2. In the image preview box, move the handles of

the mask until it surrounds the desired part of
the image

c For details on the settings, refer to

page 117.

120
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 121 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Inputting Images and Embroidery Patterns

5. In the Gray Balance dialog box, click Next. Image Type

→ The Photo Stitch 1 Parameters dialog If Photo is selected, the thread colors
box appears. will be mixed together, which will result
in a more natural look.
If Cartoon is selected, the thread colors
Photo/
will not be mixed together, which will
Cartoon
result in a more simply colored look.
Select Photo for image data from a
photograph, etc. Select Cartoon for
image data from an illustration, etc.

Use Color
Specifies the color of thread used to create the
embroidery pattern.

Advanced Opreation
Layout & Editing
The default setting is the darkest color in the
current thread chart.
In the list, select the color that you want
to change, and then click this button to
Change
open the Thread Color dialog box,
Color
which lets you change the thread color
6. Specify the settings for creating the used in the embroidery pattern.
embroidery pattern.
7. In the Photo Stitch 1 Parameters dialog box,
b Memo: click Next.
• To return to the previous dialog box, click → A Preview dialog box similar to the one
Previous. shown below appears, allowing the creat-
• To quit the operation and close the dialog ed embroidery pattern to be previewed.
box, click Cancel.

Sewing Option
Specifies how detailed the created
embroidery pattern will be. Selecting a
Detail setting closer to Fine creates more
details in the pattern and increases the
number of stitches.
Sets the sewing pitch. The pattern is
created with this setting value as the
Run pitch minimum length.
Range: 2 to 10 mm (0.08 to 0.39 inch)
Default: 3 mm (0.12 inch)
Select what parameter is given priority
when converting to embroidery pattern.
Stitch Quality: Creates a pattern while

b
giving priority to the stitching quality.
However, many jump stitches will result. Memo:
Conversion
Jump Stitch Reduction: Creates a • To return to the previous dialog box, click
Priority
pattern while giving priority to reducing Previous.
the number of jump stitches in order to • To quit the operation and close the dialog
reduce complications during box, click Cancel.
embroidering. However, the stitching
quality will be slightly reduced.

121
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 122 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Inputting Images and Embroidery Patterns

8. Click Finish. 3. In the Select Mask dialog box, click Next.

→ An embroidery pattern is created and dis- → The image is analyzed, and the Check
played in the Design Page. Mask Shape dialog box appears.

■ If Photo Stitch 2 (Color) is

selected
→ A Select Mask dialog box similar to the
one shown below appears.

b Memo:
Areas not set to be sewn are shown filled
with a crosshatch pattern.

4. Click Next.
→ The Photo Stitch 2 Parameters dialog
a Note: box appears.
If the width or height of the image exceeds
500 mm, the Photo Stitch functions cannot
be used.

1. From the list at the bottom of the dialog box,

select the desired shape that the image will be
trimmed to (mask).

b Memo:
To automatically set a mask so that the
background is trimmed off, click Auto
Generate.

2. In the image preview box, move the handles of

the mask until it surrounds the desired part of
the image

c For details on the settings, refer to

page 117. 5. Specify the settings for creating the
embroidery pattern.

b Memo:
• To return to the previous dialog box, click
Previous.
• To quit the operation and close the dialog
box, click Cancel.

122
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 123 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Inputting Images and Embroidery Patterns

Sewing Option Use Color List

Specifies the interval between parallel This list allows the selected thread colors to be
lines used to create the embroidery checked and edited.
pattern. Use Color
Range: 1.2 to 5 mm (0.05 to 0.2 inch) Displays the four selected thread colors.
List
Line Interval Default: 2 mm (0.08 inch)
In the list, select the color that you want
to change, and then click this button to
Change
Line interval open the Thread Color dialog box,
Color
which lets you change the thread color
Specifies the maximum density for used in the embroidery pattern.
areas of the created embroidery pattern
sewn with the zigzag stitch. The 6. In the Photo Stitch 2 Parameters dialog box,
embroidery pattern will be created with click Next.
Max. Density a density smaller than that set here.
→ A Preview dialog box similar to the one
Range: 2.5 to 5 lines per mm (64 to 127

Advanced Opreation
shown below appears, allowing the creat-

Layout & Editing

lines per inch)
Default: 3 lines per mm (76 lines per ed embroidery pattern to be previewed.
inch)

Auto Select Setting

Selects the thread chart for selecting
the thread color with the Auto Select
function.
The most appropriate thread colors
Thread Chart
from the selected thread chart are
selected.
A user thread chart can also be
selected.
Sets the combination of four colors used
when creating the embroidery pattern.
The color choices are: cyan (C),
magenta (M), yellow (Y), black (K), red
(R), green (G) and blue (B). Select one
Color Set
of the following combinations that
contains the colors most used in the
image. b Memo:
Color combinations: CMYK, RGBK, • To return to the previous dialog box, click
CRYK, BMYK Previous.
• To quit the operation and close the dialog
Auto Select box, click Cancel.

Click this button to select from the selected

thread chart the thread colors closest to the 7. Click Finish.
four colors in the selected color set. The → An embroidery pattern is created and dis-
selected thread colors appear in the Use played in the Design Page.
Color List mentioned below.
This button can be clicked only if the settings
under Auto Select Setting have been
changed.

123
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 124 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Inputting Images and Embroidery Patterns

■ If Photo Stitch 2 (Mono) is → A Gray Balance dialog box similar to the

selected one shown below appears.
→ A Select Mask dialog box similar to the
one shown below appears.

4. Move the slider to specify which parts of the

image to create the embroidery pattern for.

a Note:
If the width or height of the image exceeds
500 mm, the Photo Stitch functions cannot
be used.

1. From the list at the bottom of the dialog box,

select the desired shape that the image will be
trimmed to (mask).

b Memo:
To automatically set a mask so that the
background is trimmed off, click Auto
Generate.

2. In the image preview box, move the handles of b Memo:

the mask until it surrounds the desired part of • An embroidery pattern will be created from
the image any areas remaining in black.
• To return to the previous dialog box, click
c For details on the settings, refer to
page 117.
Previous.
• To quit the operation and close the dialog
3. In the Select Mask dialog box, click Next. box, click Cancel.

124
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 125 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Inputting Images and Embroidery Patterns

5. In the Gray Balance dialog box, click Next. 7. In the Photo Stitch 2 Parameters dialog box,
→ The Photo Stitch 2 Parameters dialog click Next.
box appears. → A Preview dialog box similar to the one
shown below appears, allowing the creat-
ed embroidery pattern to be previewed.

Advanced Opreation
Layout & Editing
6. Specify the settings for creating the
embroidery pattern.

b Memo:
• To return to the previous dialog box, click b Memo:
Previous. • To return to the previous dialog box, click
• To quit the operation and close the dialog Previous.
box, click Cancel. • To quit the operation and close the dialog
box, click Cancel.

Sewing Option 8. Click Finish.

Specifies the interval between parallel
→ An embroidery pattern is created and dis-
lines used to create the embroidery
pattern.
played in the Design Page.
Range: 1.2 to 5 mm (0.05 to 0.2 inch)
Line Interval
Default: 2 mm (0.08 inch) ■ If Cross Stitch is selected
→ The Cross Stitch Attributes dialog box
Line interval appears.

Specifies the maximum density for

areas of the created embroidery pattern
sewn with the zigzag stitch. The
embroidery pattern will be created with
Max. Density a density smaller than that set here.
Range: 2.5 to 5 lines per mm (64 to 127
lines per inch)
Default: 3 lines per mm (76 lines per
inch)
1. Specify the settings for creating the
Use Color embroidery pattern.

Specifies the color of thread used to create the b Memo:

embroidery pattern.
• To return to the previous dialog box, click
The default setting is the darkest color in the Previous.
current thread chart. • To quit the operation and close the dialog
Click this button to open the Thread box, click Cancel.
Change Color dialog box, which lets you select
Color the thread color used in the embroidery
pattern.

125
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 126 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Inputting Images and Embroidery Patterns

Sets the horizontal and vertical size of

• To adjust the zoom ratio that the image is
the pattern. displayed in, move the slider between
Cross size
Range: 1.5 to 5 mm (0.04 to 0.39 inch)
Default: 2.5 mm (0.08 inch) and .
Sets the number of times that the • To return to the previous dialog box, click
pattern will be sewn. Sews twice per Previous.
Stitch times time.
Range: Single, Double, Triple
Default: Single 4. If necessary, in the Omit Colors list, click the
Selects the thread chart for selecting
colors to select whether or not they will be
the thread color. sewn.
The most appropriate thread color from
Thread Chart
the selected thread chart is selected.
A user thread chart can also be
selected.
Sets the number of colors used in the
created pattern.
Max. The embroidery pattern is created using
Number of no more than the number of colors
Colors specified.
Range: 2 to 50
Default: 8 b Memo:
2. Click Next. Colors that are crossed out are set to not be
sewn.
→ A Cross Stitch Setting dialog box similar
to the one shown below appears.
5. After selecting the desired settings, click
Finish.
→ The cross stitch pattern is created and
displayed in the Design Page.

!!scr146.bmp!!

3. In the image in the dialog box, click the areas

to select whether or not they are to be sewn.

b Memo:
• Areas not set to be sewn are shown filled
with a crosshatch pattern. ■ If Design Center is selected
→ Design Center starts up, and a Design
Page is displayed with the image import-
These areas
will not be sewn. ed into it. For details, refer to “Design
Center” on page 69.

126
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 127 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Inputting Images and Embroidery Patterns

Importing Embroidery Patterns

→ A Browse dialog box similar to the one
Importing embroidery shown below appears.

patterns from a file

Embroidery patterns from embroidery cards (.pec)
and files created in the Tajima (.dst), Melco (.exp),
Pfaff (.pcs), Husqvarna (.hus) and embroidery
sewing machine (.phc) formats can be imported and
added to the current Design Page.
With this function, you can also add .pes files to the
Design Page, allowing you to combine several files

Advanced Opreation
Layout & Editing
created with this application.

Toolbar button:
a Note:
Be sure to select the correct file name
1. Click , or click File, then Import, then
extension from the Files of type box.
from File.
→ An Import from File dialog box similar to
the one shown below appears.
b Memo:
• This dialog box can be resized so that the
folder contents can be viewed better. The
size of the dialog box is retained until it is
changed again.
• To return to the Import from File dialog
box, click Cancel.
• To see a more detailed image, select a file,
and then click Preview. A Preview dialog
box similar to the one shown below
appears.

b Memo:
This dialog box can be resized so that the
folder contents can be viewed better. The
size of the dialog box is retained until it is
changed again.

2. Select the drive and the folder.

b Memo:
• If the Preview check box is selected, the
contents of the selected file will appear in
the Preview box.
• To quit the operation and close the dialog
box, click Cancel.

3. To view the contents of the files in the • To import the displayed file, click
currently selected folder, click Browse. Import.
• To return to the Browse dialog box,
click Cancel.

127
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 128 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Inputting Images and Embroidery Patterns

4. To import a pattern, select it, and then click

Import, or double-click the file’s icon. a Note:
• The embroidery pattern cannot be
→ The embroidery pattern is displayed in the
magnified to a size larger than the Design
Design Page. Page.
• The magnification factor cannot be set
a Note: below 25%.
• When importing patterns from other
makers, be sure to choose a pattern that 4. Under Orientation, select the desired
will fit in the Design Page.
orientation.
• The colors of patterns imported from .dst
(Tajima), .exp (Melco), .pcs (Pfaff) and 5. Click Import to import the embroidery pattern.
.hus (Husqvarna) files will be slightly
different. If this happens, you can change
the color with the menu command Sew – b Memo:
Sewing Order/Color. • To quit the operation and close the dialog
box, click Cancel.
• If Design Center has not been started up,
b Memo: if a .pem file has not been opened or if
• When importing some .pec files from Design Center is not in stage 4 (Sew
embroidery cards, the Select Import size Setting stage), one of the following
dialog box appears. If this happens, select messages appears.
the desired import size, and then click OK
to import the embroidery pattern.
• To quit the operation and close the dialog
box, click Cancel.

Importing embroidery
patterns from Design Center
An embroidery pattern in Design Center can be
imported directly into the Design Page. Click OK, and then start up Design Center
and open a .pem file.
Toolbar button:

1. Start up Design Center and open the file that c “Design Center” on page 69

you want to import into Layout & Editing.

Importing embroidery patterns
2. Click , or click File, then Import, then
from an embroidery card
from Design Center.
An embroidery pattern from an embroidery card
→ The Import size dialog box appears. inserted in the USB card writer module can be
imported into the Design Page.

1. Click File, then Import, then from Card.

→ If a card writer module is connected and if
an embroidery card is inserted into the
card writer module, the following mes-
sage appears and the embroidery pat-
terns are read from the card.

3. In the Magnification box, type or select the

magnification factor.

128
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 129 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Inputting Images and Embroidery Patterns

a Note: b Memo:
If a card writer module is connected but an • To see a more detailed image, select a
embroidery card is not inserted, the following pattern, and then click Preview. A
message appears. Preview dialog box similar to the one
shown below appears.

• Insert an embroidery card, and then click

Retry.
• To quit the operation, click Cancel.

Advanced Opreation
Layout & Editing
2. After the card has been read, a dialog box
similar to the one shown below appears.

• To import the displayed pattern, click

Import.
• To return to the Browse dialog box,
click Cancel.
• To quit the operation, click Cancel.

4. Click Import, or double-click the pattern to

import it.

b Memo: b Memo:
This dialog box can be resized so that the When importing some patterns, the Select
patterns can be viewed better. The size of Import size dialog box appears. If this
the dialog box is retained until it is changed happens, select the desired import size, and
again. then click OK to import the pattern.

3. Click a pattern to select it.

a Note:
Due to copyright issues, some embroidery
cards cannot be used with this function.

129
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 130 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing

Editing Embroidery Patterns

Editing Embroidery Patterns

Selecting patterns b Memo:
• You can also select patterns by dragging
To apply settings to an existing pattern, you must the pointer across the pattern that you
first select it. The Select Object tool is used to select want to select. As you drag the pointer, a
one or more patterns. Once a pattern is selected, selection frame is drawn. All patterns that
are contained in that selection frame are
you can move it, scale it, and change its direction by
selected when the mouse button is
rotating it or inverting it.
released.
• If you selected patterns that you did not
1. Click on the Tool Box. want, click a blank area of the Design
Page to deselect all patterns, and start
→ The shape of the pointer changes to again.

.
■ Selecting patterns in the created
2. Click the pattern that you want to select. order
→ Handles appear around the pattern.
With selected, press the Tab key to select
Handles the next object that was created. Hold down the
Shift key and press the Tab key to select the
previous object that was created.

If the Tab key (or the Shift and Tab keys)

b Memo: are pressed:
• The status bar shows the dimensions • and no object is selected, the first object (or
(width and height) of the pattern. the last object) that was created is selected.
• To deselect the pattern, select a different
pattern, click a blank area of the Design • and multiple objects are selected, all objects
Page, or click any other button in the Tool are deselected except the soonest (or latest)
Box. object that was created.
• and the last (or first) object that was created
3. To select an additional pattern, hold down the is selected, the first (or last) object is
selected.
Ctrl key and click the other pattern.
■ Selecting all embroidery patterns
All patterns in the Design Page can easily be
selected.

1. Make sure that on the Tool Box is

selected.

2. Click Edit, then Select All.

130
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 131 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Editing Embroidery Patterns

→ The selected patterns are aligned as

Moving patterns shown below.

1. Move the pointer over a selected pattern or

group of selected patterns. Top

→ The shape of the pointer changes to

.
Middle

2. Drag the pattern to the desired location.

Bottom
b
Left Center Right
Memo:
• To move the pattern horizontally or
vertically, hold down the Shift key while
dragging it.

Advanced Opreation
Layout & Editing
• Pressing the arrow keys moves the
selected pattern 0.5 mm (about 0.02 inch)
in the direction of the arrow on the key. b Memo:
• If Snap to Grid is selected, each press of To choose a different alignment, select the
an arrow key moves the pattern one grid menu command Edit – Undo, and then
mark in the direction of the arrow on the repeat step 2.
key.
• The arrow keys cannot be used to move
text on a path if just the text is selected.
The path must also be selected in order to Text on a path
move using the arrow keys. Text on a path can be aligned by selecting other
objects on the Design Page together with the text,
the path, or both the text and the path. The selected
■ Moving embroidery patterns to patterns are aligned on their outlines.
the center
The selected patterns can easily be moved to the
center of Design Page.

1. Select one or more patterns.

2. Click Edit, then Center.

→ All selected patterns move to the center of 1. Text is selected.
Design Page.

■ Aligning embroidery patterns

The selected patterns can easily be aligned as
specified.

1. Select the patterns which you want to align.

2. Click Edit, then Align, then Left, Center, 2. Path is selected.

Right, Top, Middle, or Bottom, depending on
how you want to align the patterns.

3. Both the text and path

are selected.

131
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 132 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Editing Embroidery Patterns

Patterns set for hole sewing

b Memo:
If just the inside pattern is selected, the pattern is
• As you drag the handle, the current size is
aligned on the outline of the inside area. If the displayed on the status bar.
outside of the pattern is also selected, the pattern is • For more precise resizing, select the menu
aligned on the outline of the outside area. command Edit – Numerical Setting –
Size, as described below.

a Note:
• Stamp settings remain independent from
the patterns that they are applied to. If a
pattern containing a stamp is edited, be
1. Inside area is selected. sure to check the stamp after editing is
finished.
• Some patterns imported from embroidery
cards cannot be scaled.
• When scaling stitch patterns, the number
of stitches remains the same, resulting in
a loss of quality. To maintain the quality of
2. Outside area is selected. the embroidery pattern, hold down the
Ctrl key while scaling.

■ Scaling numerically
1. Select the pattern or patterns that you want to
resize.

3. Both the inside and outside areas are selected. 2. Click Edit, then Numerical Setting, then
Size.
→ The Size dialog box appears.
Scaling patterns
■ Scaling manually
1. Select the pattern or patterns that you want to
resize.

2. Move the pointer over one of the handles of a

selected pattern or group of patterns.
→ The shape of the pointer changes to
, , or , depending
on the handle that the pointer is over.

b Memo:
• is for scaling the width.
3. To change the width and height proportionally,
• is for scaling the height. select the aspect check box.

• and are for scaling both 4. Select the whether the width and height will be
dimensions at the same time. set as a percentage (%) or a dimension
(millimeters or inches).
3. Drag the handle to adjust the selected 5. Type or select the desired width and height.
pattern(s) to the desired size.

132
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 133 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Editing Embroidery Patterns

b Memo: a Note:
• Select 100% to leave the pattern • You cannot enter a size that will cause the
unchanged. pattern to exceed the size of the Design
• If aspect is selected, changing one Page.
dimension automatically changes the • The minimum value is 1 mm (0.04 inch).
other so that the proportion of the width
and height remains unchanged.
• The specified size is for the region. If the c “Changing the measurement units” on
page 202
pattern has a line, the size of the entire
pattern can be viewed under Region +
Line Size at the bottom of the dialog box.
Flipping patterns
6. To resize the selected pattern while horizontally or vertically
maintaining the original density and fill pattern,
1.

Advanced Opreation
Select the pattern that you want to flip (up/

Layout & Editing

select the Keep density and fill pattern
check box. down) or vertically (left/right).

2.
b Memo:
To flip the pattern horizontally, click Edit, then

The Keep density and fill pattern check Mirror, then Horizontal, or click on the
box is available only if stitch data is selected. Toolbar.
To flip the pattern vertically, click Edit, then
7. Click OK.
Mirror, then Vertical, or click on the

b Memo:
Toolbar.
• To view the pattern at the new size in the
Design Page, click Preview. a Note:
• To close the dialog box without applying Some patterns imported from embroidery
the changes to the settings, click Cancel. cards cannot be flipped.

Region (without line)

Rotating patterns
■ Rotating manually
1. Select the pattern that you want to rotate.

2. Click Edit, then Rotate, or click on the

Toolbar.
→ The handles around the selected pattern
are replaced by smaller squares at the
four corners of the selected pattern.
Region + line 3. Move the pointer over one of the four rotation
handles.
→ When the pointer is moved over a rotation
handle, the shape of the pointer changes

to .

4. Drag the rotation handle clockwise or

counterclockwise to rotate the pattern in 1°
increments.

133
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 134 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Editing Embroidery Patterns

b Memo: a Note:
To rotate the pattern in 15° increments, hold The range of values that can be entered is
down the Shift key while dragging the between 0 and 359 degrees, in 1-degree
rotation handle. increments.

Grouping embroidery
patterns
Several individual objects can be grouped so that
the same changes apply to all of the patterns within
the group. Grouped objects can however still be
edited independently.

1. Select several objects.

2. Click Edit, then Group.

→ The selected objects are grouped.

■ Rotating numerically b Memo:

• If you select only the text fit to a path or
1. Select the pattern that you want to rotate. only the path, both the path and text will be
included in the group.
2. Click Edit, then Numerical Setting, then
• When selecting an object set as part of a
Rotate. hole sewing pattern, the entire hole sewing
→ The Rotate dialog box appears. pattern will be included in the group.
• To ungroup the objects, select the group,
and then click Edit, then Ungroup.

■ Editing grouped objects

individually
Even after patterns are grouped, they can be edited
3. Type or select the desired rotation angle. individually.

b Memo:
1. To select a single object within a group, hold
• The angle can also be specified by moving down the Alt key while clicking the
the pointer over the red arrow inside of the object.
circle, then dragging the red arrow to the To select multiple objects within a group, or to
desired angle. When the pointer is moved select grouped and ungrouped objects, hold
over the red arrow, its shape changes to
down the Alt and Ctrl keys while
. clicking the objects.
• Select 0 degree to leave the pattern
unchanged. b Memo:
A light blue frame appears around the
grouped objects whenever the group or an
4. Click OK. individual object is selected.

b Memo:
• To view the pattern rotated the specified 2. Edit the object as desired.
angle in the Design Page, click Preview.
• To close the dialog box without applying b Memo:
the changes to the settings, click Cancel. Grouping is cancelled if objects are deleted
to leave only one.

134
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 135 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Editing Embroidery Patterns

Editing Points in Embroidery Patterns

To deselect the current point and select the
Selecting points following point in the direction of the end point,
hold down the Ctrl key and press the
→ or ↓ key. To deselect the current point and
1. Click on the Tool Box.
select the following point in the direction of the
→ Two buttons appear: . start point, hold down the Ctrl key and
press the ← or ↑ key.
2. Click . → The selected point appears as a small
black square.
→ The shape of the pointer changes to
. a Note:

Advanced Opreation
Layout & Editing
The points of some patterns cannot be
3. Click the pattern that you want to edit. selected.
→ The points in the pattern appear as small
empty squares.
Moving points
1. Click on the Tool Box.

→ Two buttons appear: .

2. Click .

→ The shape of the pointer changes to

.

b Memo: 3. Click the pattern that you want to edit.

The pattern can be a broken line, a curve, an → The points in the pattern appear as small
arc, a fan shape, an arc & string, a manual empty squares.
punching pattern, or stitch data.
b Memo:
4. To select a single point, click an empty square. The pattern can be a broken line, a curve, an
arc, a fan shape, an arc & string, a manual
To select additional points, hold down the punching pattern, or stitch data.
Ctrl key and click each point, or drag the
pointer over the points that you want to select.
4. Click the point that you want to move.
To select all points between the selected point
and the next point selected, hold down the → The selected point appears as a small
black square.
Shift key while clicking the next point.
To select an additional point in the direction of a Note:
the end point, hold down the Shift key and If you click the outline of the pattern instead
press the → or ↓ key. To select an additional of a point, a new point is inserted.
point in the direction of the start point, hold
down the Shift key and press the ← or ↑
key. Holding down the Shift key and
pressing the opposite arrow key deselects the
point.

135
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 136 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Editing Embroidery Patterns

5. Drag the point to the new location.

Inserting points
New points can be inserted in order to change the
shape of a pattern. In the case of a new point on a
curve, you can also use the handle to reorient the
tangent to the new point.

1. Click on the Tool Box.

→ Two buttons appear: .

2. Click .

→ The shape of the pointer changes to

.

3. Click the pattern that you want to edit.

→ The points in the pattern appear as small
empty squares.

a Note: b Memo:
You must drag a point that is selected. If you The pattern can be a broken line, a curve, a
start dragging by clicking elsewhere on the manual punching pattern, or stitch data.
outline of the pattern, a new point will be
inserted or the selected point(s) will be 4. Click the outline to add a point.
deselected.
→ A new point appears selected (as a small
black square and, in the case of a curve,
b Memo: with a control handle).
• All of the selected points move in the same
direction.
• To move the point of a broken line, a curve,
a manual punching pattern, or stitch data
horizontally or vertically, hold down the
Shift key while dragging it.
• Pressing the arrow keys moves the
selected point 0.5 mm (about 0.02 inch) in
the direction of the arrow on the key.
• If Snap to Grid is selected, each press of
an arrow key moves the point one grid
mark in the direction of the arrow on the
key.
• The arrow keys cannot be used to move
the end points of an arc.
• Points in patterns set for hole sewing can
also be moved. However, the point cannot
be moved to cross an outline. In order to
move the point in this way, cancel hole
sewing first.

b Memo:
If a manual punching block pattern was
selected, a pair of new points are inserted.

136
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 137 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Editing Embroidery Patterns

Deleting points Transforming straight lines into

curves or curves into straight lines
1. Click on the Tool Box.

→ Two buttons appear: . 1. Click on the Tool Box.

→ Two buttons appear: .

2. Click .
2. Click .
→ The shape of the pointer changes to
. → The shape of the pointer changes to
.
3. Click the pattern that you want to edit.

Advanced Opreation
Layout & Editing
3. Click the pattern that you want to edit.
b Memo:
→ The points in the pattern appear as small
The pattern can be a broken line, a curve, a
empty squares.
manual punching pattern, or stitch data.
4. Click the point that you want to transform.
→ The points in the pattern appear as small
→ The selected point appears as a small
empty squares.
black square.
4. Click the point that you want to delete.
5. To transform a straight line to a curve, click
→ The selected point appears as a small Edit, then Change To Curve, or right-click the
black square. point, and then click To Curve on the menu
that appeared.
5. Click Edit, then Delete, or press the
To transform a curve to a straight line, click
Delete key to remove the point. Edit, then Change To Straight, or right-click
the point, and then click To Straight on the
menu that appeared.
→ A point on curve is transformed to a cor-
ner, and a corner point is transformed to a
point on a curve.

b Memo:
If a point of a manual punching block pattern
was selected, the pair of points are deleted.

137
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 138 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Editing Embroidery Patterns

b Memo: a Note:
If the point is on a curve, you can use the The entry and exit points of stitch data, text,
control handles to adjust the curve. and manual punching patterns cannot be
edited.

This is the entry point for the outline

Moving entry/exit points and stitching. The previous pattern is
the center point connected to this point.
This is the exit point for the outline
■ Moving the entry/exit points stitching. Stitching continues from this
point to the next pattern.
You can reposition the entry and exit points of
objects created with the tools on the Tool Box in This is the entry point for the inside
order to adjust the stitching. region stitching. The previous pattern
is connected to this point.
1. Click on the Tool Box. This is the exit point for the inside
region stitching. Stitching continues
→ Two buttons appear: . from this point to the next pattern.

2. Click . b Memo:
If the outline or the inside region are set to
→ The shape of the pointer changes to not be sewn, the corresponding point does
not appear.
.
4. Drag the arrow for the point that you want to
a Note: move to the desired location on the outline.
If the entry and exit points have been
optimized (a check mark appears in front of
the Optimize Entry/Exit points command
on the Sew menu), the entry and exit points
of the patterns cannot be edited. In order to
use this tool for editing the entry and exit
points, select the menu command Sew –
Optimize Entry/Exit points to cancel the
setting.
a Note:
3. Click the object that you want to edit. • Only entry and exit points for objects
created with the Circle or Arc, Rectangle
→ The entry and exit points of the object ap- and Outline tools can be edited. Stitch
pear. data or objects created with the Text tools
or Manual Punch tools cannot be edited.
b Memo: • If the menu command Sew – Optimize
If the region has the concentric circle stitch or Entry/Exit points is selected to optimize
radial stitch applied, the center point of the the entry and exit points, all manual
stitching also appears. (For details on adjustments of the entry and exit points
moving the center point, refer to “Moving the will be lost, and the positions of the points
center point” on page 139.) will be automatically optimized.

138
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 139 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Editing Embroidery Patterns

■ Moving the center point

The center point for regions set to the concentric a Note:
circle stitch or radial stitch can be repositioned for a • Only entry and exit points for objects
more decorative effect. created with the Circle or Arc, Rectangle
and Outline tools can be optimized.
• If the menu command Sew – Optimize
1. Click on the Tool Box. Entry/Exit points is selected to optimize
the entry and exit points, the entry and exit
→ Two buttons appear: . points cannot be moved with the Entry/
Exit point tool.
2. Click .
→ If the check mark does not appear beside
→ The shape of the pointer changes to Optimize Entry/Exit points, the entry
and exit points are not optimized. If the
. optimizing of the entry and exit points is

Advanced Opreation
Layout & Editing
cancelled, the entry point and exit point
3. Click the region set to the concentric circle positions are retained. In addition, the po-
stitch or radial stitch that you want to edit. sitions of the entry and the exit points can
→ The entry and exit points and the center be manually changed with the Entry/Exit/
point of the object appear. Center point tool.

Optimize Entry/Exit points not selected

4. Drag the center point to the desired location.

■ Optimizing the entry/exit points

The positions of the entry and the exit points for the
objects can be adjusted automatically in order to
optimize stitching.

1. Click Sew, then Optimize Entry/Exit points.

To optimize the entry and exit points, select
this command so that a check mark appears.
To cancel optimizing, select this command so
Optimize Entry/Exit points selected
that no check mark appears.
→ If a check mark appears beside Optimize
Entry/Exit points, the entry and exit
points for the stitching of connected ob-
jects with the same color are optimized (in
other words, they are connected by the
shortest distance possible).

139
 Advanced_02.fm Page 140 Friday, July 9, 2004 1:45 PM

Layout & Editing Editing Embroidery Patterns

Editing Stitch Data

Converting objects to stitch data Editing stitch points of stitch
Objects drawn with the tools in Layout & Editing can data
be converted into stitch data, allowing you to make
detailed changes by modifying the position of
1. Click on the Tool Box.
individual stitches.
→ Two buttons appear: .
1. Select the object that you want to convert.

2. Click Sew, then Convert to Stitch. 2. Click .

The selected object is converted to stitch data.
→ The shape of the pointer changes to
.

3. Click the object that you want to edit.

→ The stitch points in the stitch data appear
as small empty squares.

a Note:
Stitch data are surrounded with a dotted line.
If the object is not surrounded by a dotted
line, it cannot be edited. Select the menu
command Sew – Convert to Stitch to
convert the object to stitch data.

4. To select a single stitch point, click an empty

square.
→ The selected stitch point appears as a
small black square.

b Memo:
If you click a feed, the points at both ends are
selected.
→ The dotted line around the converted data
indicates that it is stitch data. Each stitch
To select multiple stitch points, hold down the
of the converted data can be edited with
the Edit Point tool. Ctrl key and click each of the other points
that you want to select, or drag the pointer
b Memo: over the stitch points that you want to select.
• Related text, lines and patterns set for hole
sewing will all be converted to stitch data, b Memo:
even if some of the objects are not • To select all stitch points (in the stitching
selected. order) between the selected stitch point
• Patterns that do not have sewing attributes and the next point selected, hold down the
applied are deleted when the object is Shift key while clicking the next stitch
converted to stitch data. point.

140
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 141 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Editing Embroidery Patterns

• To select an additional stitch point in the ■ Deleting stitch points

stitching order, hold down the Shift key
and press the → or ↓ key. To select an 1. Press the Delete key to delete the
additional stitch point in the opposite selected stitch point.
direction of the stitching order, hold down
the Shift key and press the ← or b Memo:
↑ key. Holding down the Shift key and If the end point of a feed is deleted, that feed
pressing the opposite arrow key deselects segment is deleted and the stitches before
the stitch point. and after the feed are connected.
• To deselect the current stitch point and
select the following point in the stitching
direction, hold down the Ctrl key and ■ Editing entry/exit points for each
press the → or ↓ key. To deselect the color of the stitch data
current stitch point and select the previous
point in the stitching direction, hold down
the Ctrl key and press the ← or ↑ key. 1. Click on the Tool Box.

Advanced Opreation
Layout & Editing
• To select all stitch points in the next color,
→ Two buttons appear: .
press the Tab key. To select all stitch
points in the previous color, hold down the
2. Click .
Shift key and press the Tab key.

→ The shape of the pointer changes to

→ Selected points appear as small black
squares. .

a Note 3. Click the object that you want to edit.

When selecting stitch points, be sure to click → The stitch points in the object appear as
the stitch point (do not click a blank area of small empty squares.
the Design Page), otherwise all of the
selected points will be deselected. 4. To select the entry point of the first thread
color, press the Ctrl and Home keys.
■ Moving stitch points To select the exit point of the last thread color,
1. Drag the selected stitch points to the new press the Ctrl and End keys.
location.
To select the entry point of a given color,
b Memo:
select at least one point in that color, and then
• To move the selected stitch point press the Home key.
horizontally or vertically, hold down the To select the exit point of a given color, select
Shift key while dragging it. at least one point in that color, and then press
• Pressing the arrow keys moves the
selected stitch point 0.1 mm in the the End key.
direction of the arrow on the key.

■ Inserting stitch points and feeds

1. Click a line between two stitch points to add a
new point at that position.

b Memo:
To insert a stitch point and change the
previous line into a feed, hold down the
Ctrl and Shift keys while clicking on
the line.

141
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 142 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Editing Embroidery Patterns

Changing colors of stitch data b Memo:

To close the dialog box without applying the
The colors of imported stitch data or objects changes to the settings, click Cancel.
converted to stitches can be changed in the following
way.

Toolbar button: Converting stitch data to blocks

Imported stitch data or patterns converted to stitch
1. Click , or click Sew, then Sewing Order/ data can be converted into blocks (manual punching
data), allowing you to change some of their sewing
Color.
attributes and to scale individual colors while keeping
→ The Sewing Order/Color dialog box ap- their stitching quality.
pears with each data in the pattern in a
separate frame. 1. Select the stitch data imported into the Design
Page where you want to apply the setting.

2. Click Sew, then Stitch to Block.

→ The Stitch to Block sensitivity dialog
box appears.

2. Select the frame for the data whose color you

want to change.

3. Click .
→ The Thread Color dialog box appears.

3. Move the slider to select the desired

sensitivity.

b Memo:
The Normal setting should provide
satisfactory results in most cases, but
depending on the complexity of the pattern,
you may need to select a setting more
towards Coarse or Fine.

4. Click OK.
→ The data in the blocks are grouped so that
any setting change will affect the whole
pattern, and the Sewing Attributes bar ap-
pears as shown below.

4. Select the desired color, and then click OK.

→ The object appears in the new color in the
Sewing Order/Color dialog box and in
the Design Page.

5. Repeat steps 2. to 4. for each data whose

color you want to change.

6. Click OK.
→ The pattern is displayed with the new col-
ors.

142
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 143 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Editing Embroidery Patterns

b Memo: c “Specifying sewing attributes” on

page 171, “Scaling patterns” on page 132
• To quit the operation, click Cancel. and “Selecting points” on page 135
• To modify the sewing attributes of all
blocks of the same color within the pattern,
hold down the Alt key while selecting a Splitting off parts of stitch data
block whose color or sew type settings you
want to change. (An alternate method is to The Split stitch tool in the Tool Box allows you to
first ungroup the colors of the pattern by split a pattern after tracing an enclosure around the
selecting the menu command Edit – parts that you want to cut off. You can then move the
Ungroup.) Use the zoom tools to zoom cutoff sections to rearrange the pattern, combine it
into the design to select the color more with other patterns or even delete it.
easily. All blocks of that color are selected
and the block color and sew type appear in
the Sewing Attributes bar.
b Memo:
• When you scale blocks, the number of This tool is available only for stitch data, and

Advanced Opreation
Layout & Editing
stitches sewn automatically adapt to the when the Text, Outline, and Manual Punch
new size of the blocks, allowing you to tools are not selected.
keep the original embroidery quality.

a Note:
Patterns created with the drawing or Text
tools of Layout & Editing need to be
converted into stitches before they can be
cut with the Split stitch tool.

Without Stitch to Block 1. Click on the Tool Box.

2. Click the stitch data that you want to cut a

section from.

b Memo:
You can also click the Split stitch tool after
selecting stitch data.
With Stitch to Block
→ All other stitch data disappear from the
display, and the shape of the pointer
a Note: changes to .
• The Stitch to Block command cannot be
used with some stitch data imported from
embroidery cards. 3. Click in the Design Page at the point where
• Some fill patterns are lost when scaled you want to start drawing the enclosing lines.
after setting the Stitch to Block function,
therefore it is recommended to scale while b Memo:
holding down the Ctrl key or by In the Tool Box, only the Zoom tool is
selecting the menu command Edit – available, allowing you to zoom in on the
Numerical Setting – Size. stitch data to better view the area.

b Memo: 4. Continue clicking in the Design Page to

• The selected color blocks can be moved or specify each corner of the enclosure around
scaled individually, therefore, if you want the area to be cut off.
to move the whole pattern once it has been
ungrouped, be sure to carefully regroup
each individual color pattern by selecting
the menu command Edit – Group.
• You can further modify the pattern by
using the Point Edit tool.

143
 Advanced_02.fm Page 144 Friday, July 9, 2004 1:46 PM

Layout & Editing Editing Embroidery Patterns

→ The dotted line that is drawn when you

move the pointer changes to a solid line a Note:
when the next point is specified. • Only one cutoff section can be specified
from the pattern at one time. Repeat the
procedure for each piece of the pattern
that you want to cut off.
• The cutoff piece moves to the end of the
sewing order and the thread color order
appears in the order selected for the
original pattern.

b Memo:
• To remove the last point that was entered,
click the right mouse button. Each
successive right-click removes points, one
by one, in the opposite order that they
were entered. Once all points are deleted,
the Tool Box buttons are available again,
however, the application remains in Split
stitch mode.
• An enclosure is valid only if it contains
stitch data. If it contains no stitch data, an
error message appears, and the enclosure
is erased, but the application remains in
Split stitch mode.
• Sections enclosed several times by lines
of an intricate figure alternate between
being selected and deselected. Therefore,
in a figure like a pentagram for instance,
only the points are selected, and the
center is deselected as it has been
enclosed twice.

5. Double-click in the Design Page to specify the

section to be split off.

6. Edit the cutoff section as desired.

144
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 145 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Editing Embroidery Patterns

Drawing Circles and Arcs

The Circle or Arc tool allows you to create several curved patterns: regular circles (or ovals), arcs, fan shapes
and arc & strings.
2. Click in the Arc shape selector, and then
select Circle.

3. Drag the pointer in the Design Page.

→ The point where you start dragging is con-
Circle Oval Arc
sidered a corner of an imaginary rectan-
gle around the oval. The point where you
release the mouse button is the diagonal-
ly opposite point of the rectangle. The
oval will fit inside this imaginary rectangle

Advanced Opreation
Layout & Editing
(its greater axis is along the longer edge
Fan shape Arc & string of the rectangle, and its smaller axis is
All of these patterns, except arcs have an outline along the smaller edge).
and a inside region, and can independently be
assigned different sewing attributes. Arcs are simple b Memo:
outlines. To draw a circle, hold down the Shift key
while dragging the pointer.
a Note:
When drawing a shape with this tool, select
the shape before drawing. You cannot, for
example, draw a circle, then change it to an Drawing an arc
arc afterward.
The setting is applied to all patterns that you
will create with the Circle or Arc tool, until the
1. Click on the Tool Box.
setting is changed.
→ The shape of the pointer changes to

, and the Sewing Attributes bar ap-

Drawing a circle or an oval pears similar to the one shown below.

1. Click on the Tool Box.

→ The shape of the pointer changes to b Memo:

• You can change the color and sew type
, and the Sewing Attributes bar ap- either before or after drawing the shape.
For more details on changing these
pears similar to the one shown below. settings, refer to “Color” on page 169 and
“Sew type” on page 170.
• You can also use the settings in the
b Memo:
Sewing Attribute Setting dialog box to
define other attributes of the shape. (For
• You can change the color and sew type more details, refer to “Specifying sewing
either before or after drawing the shape. attributes” on page 171.) If you do not
For more details on changing these change these settings at this time, the
settings, refer to “Color” on page 169 and current settings will be applied, however
“Sew type” on page 170. you can modify them later.
• You can also use the settings in the
Sewing Attribute Setting dialog box to
define other attributes of the shape. (For 2. Click in the Arc shape selector, and then click
more details, refer to “Specifying sewing Arc.
attributes” on page 171.) If you do not
change these settings at this time, the
current settings will be applied, however
you can modify them later. 3. Proceed as you would to draw a circle or an
oval.

145
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 146 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Editing Embroidery Patterns

→ A radial line appears on the oval when the 2. Click in the Arc shape selector, and then click
mouse button is released. Fan Shape.
4. Move the pointer to the start point of the arc,
and then click.
3. Proceed as you would to draw a circle or an
→ The radial line disappears. oval.
5. Move the pointer until the arc has the desired → A radial line appears on the oval when the
shape, and then click. mouse button is released.

4. Move the pointer to the start point of the fan

shape, and then click.
→ The radial line disappears.

5. Move the pointer until the fan has the desired

Click at start point. shape, and then click.

Click at start point.

Move to end point.

Click at end point.

Move to end point.

Click at end point.

Drawing a fan shape
1. Click on the Tool Box.

→ The shape of the pointer changes to

, and the Sewing Attributes bar ap-

pears similar to the one shown below.

b Memo:
• You can change the color and sew type
either before or after drawing the shape.
For more details on changing these
settings, refer to “Color” on page 169 and
“Sew type” on page 170.
• You can also use the settings in the
Sewing Attribute Setting dialog box to
define other attributes of the shape. (For
more details, refer to “Specifying sewing
attributes” on page 171.) If you do not
change these settings at this time, the
current settings will be applied, however
you can modify them later.

146
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 147 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Editing Embroidery Patterns

5. Move the pointer until the arc & string has the
Drawing an arc & string desired shape, and then click.

1. Click on the Tool Box.

→ The shape of the pointer changes to

Click at start point.
, and the Sewing Attributes bar ap-
pears similar to the one shown below.

b Memo:
• You can change the color and sew type
either before or after drawing the shape.

Advanced Opreation
Layout & Editing
Move to end point.
For more details on changing these
settings, refer to “Color” on page 169 and Click at end point.
“Sew type” on page 170.
• You can also use the settings in the
Sewing Attribute Setting dialog box to
define other attributes of the shape. (For
more details, refer to “Specifying sewing
attributes” on page 171.) If you do not
change these settings at this time, the
current settings will be applied, however
you can modify them later.
Specifying the geometric
attribute
2. Click in the Arc shape selector, and then click
Arc & String. ■ Arc shape
Use this selector to select the type of arc.

3. Proceed as you would to draw a circle or an b Memo:

oval. The Arc shape selector appears in the

→ A radial line appears on the oval when the Sewing Attributes bar when on the
mouse button is released. Tool Box is selected.
4. Move the pointer to the start point of the arc &
string, and then click. 1. Click in the Arc shape selector.
→ The radial line disappears. → The settings appear.

2. Click one of the settings.

→ The setting is applied to all patterns that
will be created with the Circle or Arc tool,
until the setting is changed.

147
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 148 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Editing Embroidery Patterns

Drawing a Rectangle
With the Rectangle tool, you can draw rectangles with sharp or rounded corners. A rectangle will automatically
have an outline and an inside region that can independently be assigned different sewing attributes.

Specifying the geometric

attribute

Rectangle Square
■ Edge radius
Use this selector to select the shape of the rectangle
corners.
1. Click on the Tool Box.

→ The shape of the pointer changes to b Memo:

The Edge radius selector appears in the
, and the Sewing Attributes bar ap- Sewing Attributes bar when on the
pears similar to the one shown below.
Tool Box is selected. It also appears when a
rectangle in the Design Page has been
selected.
b Memo:
• You can change the edge radius, color and 1. Click in the Edge radius selector.
sew type either before or after drawing the
shape. For more details on changing these
settings, refer to “Edge radius” on
page 148, “Color” on page 169 and “Sew
type” on page 170.
• You can also use the settings in the
Sewing Attribute Setting dialog box to
define other attributes of the stitch. (For
more details, refer to “Specifying sewing
attributes” on page 171.) If you do not
change these settings at this time, the
current settings will be applied, however
you can modify them later.
2. Type the desired radius (0 to 100 mm (0 to
3.93 inches)) and press the Enter key, or
2. Drag the pointer in the Design Page. click the desired value.
→ The point where you start dragging is con- → The setting is applied to all patterns that
sidered a corner of the rectangle. The will be created with the Rectangle tool,
point where the mouse button is released until the setting is changed.
is the diagonally opposite corner of the
rectangle. → If a rectangle was selected, the setting is
also applied to that rectangle.
b Memo: Example 1 Example 2
Edge radius: 0.0 mm Edge radius: 20.0 mm
To draw a square, hold down the Shift key
while dragging the pointer.

148
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 149 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Editing Embroidery Patterns

Drawing Straight Lines and Curves

The Outline tools allow you to add straight lines and curves to your pattern.
If the straight line or curve is set to be open (Open Path), it will end at the last point entered. Since this type
of pattern is a simple outline and does not have an inside region, line sew type and color settings can only be
applied to the line itself.
If the straight line or curve is set to be closed (Close Path), the last point will automatically connect with the
first one. Since this type of pattern has an outline and an inside region, each part can be assigned different
sew types and colors. However, if the line of the pattern crosses itself, the inside region cannot be filled,
and the line must be uncrossed so that the fill can be applied.
While creating the pattern, you can freely switch between drawing straight lines or curves, and once they are
drawn, straight lines can be transformed into curves, and curves into straight lines.
Furthermore, if an image is used as a template, one tool can be used to semi-automatically extract the image

Advanced Opreation
Layout & Editing
boundary.

is for drawing curves. (Shortcut key:

End point
X )
Start point
is for semi-automatically drawing lines.
Open line Closed line (Shortcut key: C )
2. Click the button for the type of line that you
want to draw.
→ The shape of the pointer changes to

, or , and the Sewing At-

This closed line crosses itself,
so the regions will not be filled. tributes bar appears similar to the one
shown below.
End point

Start point
b Memo:
Open curve Closed curve • You can change the path shape, color and
sew type either before or after creating the
shape. For more details on changing these
settings, refer to “Path shape” on
page 150, “Color” on page 169 and “Sew
type” on page 170.
• You can also use the settings in the
Sewing Attribute Setting dialog box to
define other attributes of the shape. (For
This closed curve crosses itself, more details, refer to “Specifying sewing
so the regions will not be filled. attributes” on page 171.) If you do not
change these settings at this time, the
current settings will be applied, however
1. Click on the Tool Box. you can modify them later.

→ Three buttons appear: 3. Click in the Design Page to specify the start
point.
is for drawing straight lines. (Shortcut

key: Z )

149
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 150 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Editing Embroidery Patterns

4. Click in the Design Page to specify the next → The setting is applied to all patterns that
point. will be created with the Outline tools, until
the setting is changed.
b Memo: → If a broken line or curve was selected, the
To remove the last point that was entered, setting is also applied to that broken line
click the right mouse button. or curve.

5. Continue clicking to specify every point, and

then double-click the last end point.

a Note:
• While drawing the pattern, you can freely
switch between the different line types
either by clicking a different button or by
pressing the shortcut key.
• Even after the pattern is drawn, you can
transform straight lines into curves and
vice versa. For more details, refer to
“Transforming straight lines into curves or
curves into straight lines” on page 137.
• If Close Path is set, double-clicking will
automatically draw a line between the last
and the first points of the line.
• When drawing a straight line, hold down
the Shift key while moving the pointer
to draw vertically or horizontally.
• A template image is needed in order to
draw using the Semi-Automatic tool. If
there is no image, this tool will draw like
the Straight Line tool.

Specifying the geometric

attribute
■ Path shape
Use this selector to select whether the broken lines
and curves will be open or closed.

b Memo:
The Path shape selector appears in the
Sewing Attributes bar when on the Tool
Box is selected. It also appears when a
broken line or curve in the Design Page has
been selected.

1. Click the Path shape selector.

→ The settings appear.

2. Click the desired option.

150
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 151 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Editing Embroidery Patterns

Creating Manual Punching Data

The Manual Punch tools are used to create patterns that look like manual embroidery. With manual punching,
you can create data with any sewing order, direction and orientation that you want.
Letters that you design yourself constitute a typical example of patterns that look better using manual punching
patterns. The illustrations below show two previews of the letter “O”.
The one shown below has been designed using two concentric ovals without a line sewing attribute, filling the
larger oval with the fill stitch, and turning off the region sewing attribute inside the small oval. The pair was then
set for hole sewing.

Fill stitch
(The stitching has a constant direction.)

Advanced Opreation
Layout & Editing
The letter shown below has been drawn using the Manual Punch tools. To do this, we duplicated the letter
shown above, removed the inside region, and created a manual punching pattern using the outlines of the
ovals as guides. The ovals were then deleted.

Manual punching
(The direction of the stitching follows the curve.)

The stitch density for both letters was set to a minimum in order to make it easier to see the difference between
the two patterns on the preview display.
When creating a manual punching pattern, it is easier to use an image in the background as a guide. In the
above example, we used two ovals that we removed after completing the manual punching pattern.

151
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 152 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Editing Embroidery Patterns

Another possibility is to load a template image and → The shape of the pointer changes to
redraw it using manual punching patterns. The
advantage of this method is that you have a better , and the Sewing Attributes bar ap-
control on the thread orientation. pears similar to the one shown below.

1. Open a template or prepare an image that you

will use as a guide.
b Memo:
2. Click on the Tool Box. • You can change the color and sew type
either before or after creating the pattern.
→ Five buttons appear: For more details on changing these
settings, refer to “Color” on page 169 and
!!btn59.bmp!!
“Sew type” on page 170.
• You can also use the settings in the
Sewing Attribute Setting dialog box to
is for creating straight block-type define other attributes of the pattern. (For
more details, refer to “Specifying sewing
punching patterns. (Shortcut key: Z ) attributes” on page 171.) If you do not
change these settings at this time, the
is for creating curved block-type current settings will be applied, however
you can modify them later.
punching patterns. (Shortcut key: X )
4. Click in the Design Page to specify point 1
is for semi-automatically creating block- (start point).

type punching patterns. (Shortcut key: C ) 5. Refer to the illustration below, and click in the
Design Page to specify points 2 through 8.
is for creating running-type punching
8 9
patterns (the broken line is sewn). (Shortcut
key: V ) 7

11 10
is for creating feed-type punching 6
patterns (the broken line is not sewn). 5
12 13
(Shortcut key: B )
While creating a manual punching pattern,
4
you can alternate between the various types. 3
For example, you can start with a straight
block-type pattern, then switch to a running-
type pattern (to draw an outline of the block-
type pattern), then switch to the feed type to 1 2
move to the beginning of the next block-type
pattern. The whole pattern, consisting of
different types of punching patterns, will be
considered a single object (all parts will have
the same sew type and color).
In this example, we start with a straight block-
type pattern, use the feed-type pattern to
move the pointer, and then create a running-
type pattern.

3. Click to start creating a straight block-

type pattern.

152
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 153 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Editing Embroidery Patterns

to specify point 9 (the start point of the

8 9 running-type pattern).

7 7. Click (running-type pattern button), and

Run pitch
11 10
then click in the Design Page to specify points
6
10, 11, and 12, as shown in the above
5 illustration.
12 13
8. To complete the pattern, double-click point 13
4
(the last point of the entire pattern).
3
b Memo:
• When entering points, change the punch
type by pressing the appropriate shortcut
1 2

Advanced Opreation
key.

Layout & Editing

• A template image is needed in order to use
b Memo: the semi-automatic block-type punch tool.
If there is no image, this tool will create a
To remove the last point that was entered,
punching pattern like the straight block-
click the right mouse button.
type punch tool.
• Once the pattern is drawn, you can still
6. After clicking point 8 (the last point of the transform straight block-type patterns into
curved block-type patterns and vice versa.
block-type pattern), click (feed-type For details, refer to “Transforming straight
lines into curves or curves into straight
pattern button), and then in the Design Page lines” on page 137.

Entering Text
• You can also use the settings in the
1. Click on the Tool Box. Sewing Attribute Setting dialog box and
the Text Attribute Setting dialog box to
→ Two buttons appear: . define other attributes of the text. (For
more details, refer to “Specifying sewing
attributes” on page 171 and “Specifying
2. Click .
text attributes” on page 157.) If you do not
change these settings at this time, the
→ The shape of the pointer changes to current settings will be applied, however
you can modify them later.
, and the Sewing Attributes bar ap-
pears similar to the one shown below.
a Note:
• If one of the fonts provided with this
3. If necessary, change the font, text size, color application (01 to 35) is selected, the line
sewing attributes cannot be changed.
and sew type.

b Memo: 4. Click in the Design Page where you want the

• You can change the font, text size, color, text to appear.
and sew type either before or after creating → The Edit Text Letters dialog box ap-
the text. For more details on changing pears, containing a chart with all charac-
these settings, refer to “Font” on page 154, ters available with the selected font.
“Text Size” on page 156, “Color” on
page 169 and “Sew type” on page 170.

153
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 154 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Editing Embroidery Patterns

a Note:
If you entered a character that is not
available for the selected font, an error
message appears. Click OK to close the
message and return to the Edit Text Letters
dialog box, where you can correct the text.

Specifying text attributes

■ Font
Use this selector to select a font for the text.

b Memo:
a Note: The Font selector appears when on the
Text created using certain TrueType fonts Tool Box is selected. It also appears when
may not be converted correctly into an text or a character in the Design Page has
embroidery pattern due to the shape of the been selected.
character. These characters cannot be
embroidered correctly. Before sewing your
project, embroider a trial piece of fabric. 1. Click in the Font selector.
In addition, text created using some
TrueType fonts cannot be converted at all. In → A list of fonts appears.
this case, the area containing the converted
text will be empty or a warning message will
appear.

5. Type the text.

b Memo:
• Press the Enter key to enter a new line
of text.
• You can also enter a character by
selecting it in the character table, then
clicking Insert, or simply by double-
clicking it. This is particularly useful if you Types of characters
have to enter accented characters that are Font Font sample available
not available on your keyboard. number
• An enlarged image of the character
appears below the pointer when it is
moved over a character in the character 2. Click the desired font.
table, providing a better view of the
character. → The setting is applied to all text patterns
that you will create, until the setting is
changed.
6. Click OK.
→ If text patterns or characters in a text pat-
→ The text is displayed in the Design Page. tern were selected, the setting is also ap-
plied to the selected text.
b Memo:
• To quit the operation, click Cancel.
• If you want to edit the entered text,
select it, and then select the menu
command Text – Edit Letters. Edit the
text in the Edit Text Letters dialog box
that appears. (For more details, refer to
“Editing entered text” on page 156.)

154
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 155 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Editing Embroidery Patterns

The available fonts and the types of

characters available with each font are listed Uppercase letters of the English
below. alphabet
Lowercase letters of the English
alphabet

Numerals

Punctuation marks, brackets and

other symbols
Uppercase and lowercase accented
letters
The names and samples of installed TrueType
fonts appear after the fonts listed in the table

Advanced Opreation
Layout & Editing
above.

b Memo:
TrueType font settings can be changed in the
TrueType Font Attribute Setting dialog
box, which is displayed by clicking the menu
command Text – TrueType Font Attribute
Setting. For more details, refer to
“Specifying TrueType text attributes” on
page 161.

a Note:
Some TrueType fonts may not convert well
into clean embroidery patterns due to their
design and shape.

c “Entering Text” on page 153, “Editing

Points in Embroidery Patterns” on
page 135 and “Specifying TrueType text
attributes” on page 161

155
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 156 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Editing Embroidery Patterns

■ Text Size 2. Click Text, then Edit Letters.

Use this selector to select the size of the text. → The Edit Text Letters dialog box ap-
pears.
b Memo:
The Text Size selector appears in the
Sewing Attributes bar when on the Tool
Box is selected. It also appears when text or
a character in the Design Page has been
selected.

1. Click in the Text Size selector.

3. The selected text is displayed in the text field.

4. Edit the text as needed.

2. Type the desired height (5 to 100 mm (0.20 to

b Memo:
• Press the Enter key to enter a new line
3.93 inches)) and press the Enter key, or of text.
click the desired value. • You can also enter a character by
→ The setting is applied to all text patterns selecting it in the character table, then
clicking Insert, or simply by double-
that you will create, until the setting is
clicking it. This is particularly useful if you
changed. have to enter accented characters that are
→ If text patterns or characters in a text pat- not available on your keyboard.
tern were selected, the setting is also ap- • An enlarged image of the character
plied to the selected text. appears below the pointer when it is
moved over a character in the character
c “Entering Text” on page 153 and “Editing
Points in Embroidery Patterns” on
table, providing a better view of the
character.
page 135

5. Click OK.
Editing entered text → The edited text is displayed in the Design
Page.
Text that has been entered can easily be edited.

1. Select the text that you want to edit. b Memo:

• To close the dialog box without applying
a Note: the changes, click Cancel.
• If text converted from a TrueType font is
You cannot edit more than one text pattern selected, the list of characters displayed is
at a time. If you select more than one text for the font of the first letter in the text.
pattern, this menu command is not available.

a Note:
If you entered a character that is not
available for the selected font, an error
message appears. Click OK to close the
message and return to the Edit Text Letters
dialog box, where you can correct the text.

c “Entering Text” on page 153

156
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 157 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Editing Embroidery Patterns

5. Change the font, size, color, sew type and

Selecting characters other attributes.

1. Click on the Tool Box.

→ Two buttons appear:

2. Click !btn29..

→ The shape of the pointer changes to

.

3. Click the text that you want to edit.

Advanced Opreation
Layout & Editing
→ The points in the text appear as small
empty squares.

4. To select a single character, click the point for

the character that you want to select.
b Memo:
To select multiple characters, hold down the With TrueType fonts, the outline can be set
Ctrl key and click each point for the other to be sewn or not, and settings can be
characters, or drag the pointer over the selected for the color and sew type.
characters that you want to select.
→ The points for the selected characters ap-
pear as a small black squares. Specifying text attributes
b Memo: Various character attributes for text can be set in the
• To select all characters between the Text Attribute Setting dialog box.
selected character and the next character
selected, hold down the Shift key while Toolbar button:
clicking the next character.
• To select an additional character in the 1. Select the text that you want to edit.
direction of the last character, hold down
the Shift key and press the → or 2. Click , or click Text, then Text Attribute
↓ key. To select an additional character in
the direction of the first character, hold Setting.
down the Shift key and press the ← or → The Text Attribute Setting dialog box
↑ key. Holding down the Shift key and appears.
pressing the opposite arrow key deselects
the character.
• To deselect the current character and
select the following character in the
direction of the last character, hold down
the Ctrl key and press the → or ↓ key.
To deselect the current character and
select the following character in the
direction of the first character, hold down
the Ctrl key and press the ← or ↑ key.

157
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 158 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Editing Embroidery Patterns

3. If necessary, change the text attributes. Horizontal

b Memo: Specifies whether

To return a parameter to its default setting, characters will be Vertical
click Default beside it. Direction
positioned horizontally
or vertically.

4. Click Apply to confirm the effect of the setting.

b Memo:
To close the dialog box, click Close.
b Memo:
• Vertical text will be displayed in vertically
0.0 mm
on the Design Page.
Sets the spacing • Both Kerning and Character Spacing set
between individual the spacing between characters.
characters. 5.0 mm Character Spacing is always applied to
Kerning
Range: -100 to 100 mm (between “A” the entire text pattern, while Kerning can
(-3.94 to 3.94 inches) and “b”) be applied to individual characters.
Default: 0 Applying Kerning to the entire text in the
pattern is the same as specifying
0.0 mm Character Spacing. Refer to “Selecting
characters” on page 157 for more details
Moves the text vertically. about selecting individual characters in a
Vertical Range: -100 to 100 mm text pattern.
Offset (-3.94 to 3.94 inches) 2.0 mm
Default: 0
c “Specifying text arrangement” below and
“Transforming text” on page 160
0 degree

Rotates the characters.

Rotate
angle
Range: 0 to 359 degrees
20 degrees
Specifying text arrangement
Default: 0
A line of text can be arranged along a path.

0.0 mm Toolbar button:

Sets the spacing
Character
between all characters. 1. Select the text and a path.
Range: -100 to 100 mm
Spacing 2.0 mm
(-3.94 to 3.94 inches)
Default: 0

Sets the spacing 100%

between lines as a per-
Line centage of the character
Spacing height. 150%
Range: 0–1000%
Default: 0 2. Click , or click Text, then Fit Text to
Center Path Setting.
→ The Fit Text to Path Attribute Setting di-
Aligns several lines of text
Alignment
to the left, center or right. Right
alog box appears.

158
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 159 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Editing Embroidery Patterns

3. From the Horizontal Alignment, Vertical

Alignment and Text Orientation selectors,
b Memo:
select the desired settings. To quit the operation, click Cancel.

b Memo:
To position the text on the other side of the
a Note:
path, select the other side check box. When text arrangement is specified, the text
transformation is cancelled. Only one string of
text can be arranged on a single path.
4. Click OK to apply the settings.

Advanced Opreation
Layout & Editing
Sets the distribution of characters along
Horizontal Alignment
the path.

Sets the distance between the text and

Vertical Alignment
the path.

Sets the orientation of the characters

Text Orientation
relative to the path.

The other side Reverses the characters.

c “Canceling text arrangement” on

page 160

159
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 160 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Editing Embroidery Patterns

■ Canceling text arrangement

The text arrangement on a path can be cancelled. a Note:
A text pattern created from a TrueType font
Toolbar button: contains data for both line and region
sewing. Therefore, if this command is
1. Select text that is arranged on a path (Fit to selected, depending on the form of the
TrueType font, there may be a gap between
Path).
the line and the region in the text.

2. Click , or click Text, then Release Text

c “Canceling text transformation” below
from Path.
■ Transform level
Use this selector to select the level of
transformation.

b Memo:
The Transform level selector appears in the
Sewing Attributes bar when transformed text
c “Specifying text arrangement” on
page 158
in the Design Page has been selected.

1. Click in the Transform level selector

Transforming text
A preset transform shape can be applied to text.

Toolbar button:

1. Select the text that you want to transform.

2. Click , or click Text, then Transform

2. Type the desired value (0 to 100%) and press
Text.
the Enter key, or click the desired value.
→ The Text Transform Setting dialog box
→ The setting is applied to all transformed
appears.
text patterns that you will create, until the
setting is changed.
→ If a text pattern was selected, the setting
is applied to the selected text.

50% 100%
3. Select the desired transformation shape, and
then click OK, or double-click the shape to c “Entering Text” on page 153 and
“Transforming text” on this page
apply the transformation.
■ Canceling text transformation
The original shape of the text can be restored.

b Memo:
Toolbar button:
• To quit the operation, click Cancel. 1. Select the transformed text.
• If necessary, set the level of
transformation. For details, refer to
“Transform level” on this page.

160
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 161 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Editing Embroidery Patterns

2. Click , or click Text, then Clear b Memo:

To close the dialog box without changing any
Transformation.
settings, click Cancel.

a Note:
• The settings for Font Style and Script
differ depending on the TrueType font that
Specifying TrueType text attributes is selected.
• If text created from multiple TrueType
Various character attributes, such as the style, can fonts is selected, this command is not
be specified for TrueType fonts converted to an available.
embroidery pattern. In addition, if text of the same font but
different font styles or scripts is selected,
1. Select the TrueType text that you want to edit. this dialog box appears with the attribute

Advanced Opreation
Layout & Editing
settings for the first letter in the text.
2. Click Text, then TrueType Font Attribute In either case mentioned above, selecting
Setting. only one character from within text
displays a dialog box containing only that
→ A dialog box similar to the one shown be- character’s attributes.
low appears. If any characters converted
from a TrueType font are selected, the at-
tributes for the selected characters are c “Entering Text” on page 153 and
“Specifying text attributes” on page 157
displayed.

Converting text to outline data

Outline data can be created from text converted to a
TrueType font.

1. Select the text pattern that has been

converted to a TrueType font.

b Memo: 2. Click Text, then Convert to Outline Object.

• The name of the selected font appears → The selected text pattern is converted to
beside Font. outlines.
• The Sample box shows a sample of the
font with the selected attributes.

3. To change the font style, select the desired

style from the Font Style list.

4. To change the character set for the font, select

the desired character set from the Script
selector.

5. Click OK to set the attributes and to close the

dialog box. No sewing attributes are specified for the
converted outline; therefore, it appears as
→ The attribute settings are applied to all
dotted lines. Specify the sewing attributes
text patterns that you will create from a
as necessary.
TrueType font, until the setting is
changed.
b Memo:
→ If a text pattern converted from a True- In order to prevent the pattern from losing its
Type font was selected, the attribute set- shape, group the objects or specify hole
tings are also applied to the selected text. sewing.

161
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 162 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Editing Embroidery Patterns

Entering Monograms
The monogram function allows you to create monograms composed of one to three uppercase letters and
arrange a decorative pattern around them.

5. Type the monogram text (uppercase

1. Click on the Tool Box.
characters).
→ Two buttons appear: .
b Memo:
• You can also enter a character by
2. Click . selecting it in the character table, then
clicking Insert, or simply by double-
→ The shape of the pointer changes to clicking it.
• You can enter up to three uppercase
, and the Sewing Attributes bar ap- characters with the monogram function.
pears similar to the one shown below.

a Note:
3. If necessary, change the font, text size, color You cannot insert line feeds. If you press the
Enter key, the dialog closes and the
and sew type.
monogram is displayed in the Design Page.
b Memo:
• You can change the font, text size, color, 6. To add a decorative pattern around or at the
and sew type either before or after creating sides of the monogram, select the Decorative
the monogram. For more details on Pattern check box.
changing these settings, refer to → The currently selected pattern appears in
“Monogram Font” on page 163,
the preview window.
“Monogram Size” on page 163, “Color” on
page 169 and “Sew type” on page 170.
• You can also use the settings in the
Sewing Attribute Setting dialog box to
define other attributes of the monogram.
(For more details, refer to “Specifying
sewing attributes” on page 171.) If you do
not change these settings at this time, the
current settings will be applied, however
you can modify them later.

4. Click in the Design Page where you want the

monogram to appear.
→ The Edit Monogram Letters dialog box
appears.

7. To change the decorative pattern, click Select

Pattern.
→ The Browse dialog box appears. The
new decorative pattern can be selected.

162
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 163 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Editing Embroidery Patterns

8. Click a decorative pattern to select it, and then 2. Click the desired font.
click Select (or double-click the pattern) to → The setting is applied to all monogram
close the Browse dialog box and display the patterns that you will create, until the set-
pattern in the preview window. ting is changed.
9. After selecting the desired settings, click OK. → If a monogram was selected, the setting is
also applied to the selected monogram.
→ The monogram is displayed in the Design
Page with the selected decorative pattern.
■ Monogram Size
Use this selector to select the size of the monogram.

b Memo:
The Monogram Size selector appears in the

Sewing Attributes bar when on the

Advanced Opreation
Layout & Editing
b Memo: Tool Box is selected. It also appears when a
To quit the operation, click Cancel. monogram in the Design Page has been
selected.

1. Click in the Monogram Size selector.

Specifying monogram
attributes
■ Monogram Font !!sew37.bmp!!

Use this selector to select a font for the monograms.

b Memo:
The Monogram Font selector appears in the

Sewing Attributes bar when on the

2. Type the desired height (5 to 100 mm (0.20 to
Tool Box is selected. It also appears when a
monogram in the Design Page has been 3.93 inches)) and press the Enter key, or
selected. click the desired value.
→ The setting is applied to all text patterns
1. Click in the Font selector. that you will create, until the setting is
changed.
→ A list of monogram fonts appears.
→ If a monogram was selected, the setting is
also applied to the selected monogram.

Editing monograms
Monogram font sample A monogram that has been entered can easily be
Monogram font
name edited.

1. Select the monogram that you want to edit.

a Note:
You cannot edit more than one monogram at
a time. If you select more than one
monogram, this menu command is not
available.

163
 Advanced_02.fm Page 164 Friday, July 9, 2004 1:50 PM

Layout & Editing Editing Embroidery Patterns

2. Click Text, then Edit Letters.

→ The Edit Monogram Letters dialog box
Editing monogram characters
appears, where the characters of the se- and the decorative pattern
lected monogram are displayed in the text
field and the selected decorative pattern
is displayed in the preview window. 1. Click on the Tool Box.

→ Two buttons appear: .

2. Click .

→ The shape of the pointer changes to

.

3. Click the monogram that you want to edit.

→ The points in the monogram appear as
small empty squares.

4. To select a single character or the decorative

pattern, click the point for the character that
you want to select or for the decorative
3. Edit the text as needed.
pattern.

b Memo: To select multiple characters and the

• You can also enter a character by decorative pattern, hold down the Ctrl
selecting it in the character table, then key and click each point for the other
clicking Insert, or simply by double- characters or decorative pattern, or drag the
clicking it. pointer over the characters or the decorative
• To change the decorative pattern, click pattern that you want to select.
Select Pattern, and then select the new
pattern in the Browse dialog box that → The points for the selected characters or
appeared. decorative pattern appear as a small
• To remove the decorative pattern, clear black squares, and the Sewing Attributes
the Decoration check box. bar appears similar to the one shown be-
low.

a Note:
You cannot insert line feeds. If you press the 5. Change the color or sew type.
Enter key, the dialog closes and the
monogram is displayed in the Design Page.

4. Click OK.
→ The edited monogram is displayed in the
Design Page.

b Memo:
• To close the dialog box without applying
the changes, click Cancel.

c “Entering Monograms” on page 162

164
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 165 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Editing Embroidery Patterns

Applying and Editing Stamps

Stamps can be applied to regions of objects drawn with the Circle or Arc tool, Rectangle tool, Outline tools,
Text tools and the Manual Punch tools. Some stamp patterns are provided with this application; however, by
using Programmable Stitch Creator, you can edit the patterns that are provided or you can create your own.

4. To change the width and height of the stamp,

Applying a stamp type or select the desired size (1 to 100 mm
(0.04 to 3.94 in.)) under Size in the Stamp
Attribute Setting dialog box.
1. Click on the Tool Box.
5. To change the orientation of the stamp, move
→ Two buttons appear: . the pointer over the red arrow inside of the
circle under Direction, and then drag the red
2. Click . arrow to the desired angle.

Advanced Opreation
Layout & Editing
→ The shape of the pointer changes to b Memo:
• The dialog box remains displayed so that
, and the Stamp Attribute Setting the size and orientation of the stamp can
dialog box appears. be adjusted at any time.
• To close the dialog box, click Close.
• To open the dialog box again after closing
it, click .

6. Click the object where you want to apply the

stamp to select it.
→ “Marching lines” appear around the se-
lected object, and the shape of the pointer

changes to whenever it is moved

3. In the dialog box, select a stamp pattern (.pas
over the selected object.
file with stamp settings applied).
7. Click the desired locations within the object
b Memo: where you want to apply the stamp.
• Engraving and embossing stamp settings
appear as red- and blue-filled areas. → The stamps appear as dotted lines in the
• .pas files with no stamp settings are also object.
listed.
• To select a different folder, click .

In the Browse for Folder dialog box that

appeared, select the desired folder, and
then click OK (or double-click the folder) to
close the Browse for Folder dialog box
and display the stamp patterns from the
selected folder in the preview window.

165
 Advanced_02.fm Page 166 Friday, July 9, 2004 4:49 PM

Layout & Editing Editing Embroidery Patterns

3.
b Memo:
Click the object with the stamp that you want
to edit.
• The whole stamp appears, even if it is
larger than the object that it has been → “Marching lines” appear around the se-
applied to, however, only the parts that are lected object.
enclosed within the object will be sewn.
• Stamps can only be applied to objects 4. Click the stamp that you want to edit.
drawn with the Circle or Arc tool, → Round handles appear around the stamp,
Rectangle tool, Outline tools, Text tools and a rotation handle appears at the top of
and the Manual Punch tools and that have
the stamp.
the satin stitch, fill stitch and
programmable fill stitch applied.
Rotation handle
• To apply several stamps within the same
object, continue clicking the object as often
as needed.
• If the pointer cannot fit within the selected
object, the stamp cannot be applied.
• The Stamp Attribute Setting dialog box Handles
appears only after a stamp tool is selected.
• Stamps are only sewn within the object
that they have been applied to.

a Note:
Only one stamp can be selected at a time. If
Editing a stamp you select another stamp, the previously
selected stamp becomes deselected.

1. Click on the Tool Box. 5. To change the stamp pattern, select a

different pattern in the Stamp Attribute
→ Two buttons appear: .
Setting dialog box, and then click Apply.
To change the stamp size and orientation,
2. Click .
specify the desired settings in the Stamp
Attribute Setting dialog, or adjust it by
→ The shape of the pointer changes to
dragging the handles or rotation handle.
, the Stamp Attribute Setting dia- To move a stamp, drag it to another location
log box appears, and stamps that have within the object or partially positioned on the
been applied are indicated by pink dotted object.
lines. To delete the stamp, select the menu
command Edit – Delete, or press the
Delete key.

b Memo:
• When a pattern with a stamp applied is
moved, the stamp is moved together with
the pattern. However, changes to the size
and orientation of the pattern do not affect
the size and orientation of the stamps.
After editing the shape of an object, it may
be necessary to check the region and
b Memo: adjust the stamps.
If an object was already selected, “marching • Stamps appear only after a stamp tool is
lines” appear around the region, and its selected.
stamps are indicated by dotted lines. • Stamps are only sewn within the region
that they have been applied to.
• To close the dialog box, click Close.

c “Scaling patterns” on page 132 and

“Rotating patterns” on page 133

166
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 167 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Editing Embroidery Patterns

Applying Sewing Attributes to Lines and

Regions
The Sewing Attributes bar allows you to set the Geometric attributes
following attributes: Arc shape: Selects the page
• geometric attributes (arc shape, rectangle type of arc. 145
edge radius, and path shape) Edge radius: Sets the
page
• text attributes (font, size and transformation corner radius of
148
rectangles.
level)
Path shape: Opens and
• embroidery attributes (thread color and sew page
closes broken lines and
type, outline and inside region on/off) 150
curves.
The sewing attributes that are available depend on

Advanced Opreation
Layout & Editing
the tool selected in Tool Box, and the type of Text attributes
embroidery pattern selected.
Font: Selects a font for page
Example 1: When the Select Object tool is selected, text. 154
but no object or pattern is selected
Text Size: Selects the page
size for text. 156
Transform level: Selects page
Example 2: When a text tool is selected, or text is the level of transformation. 160
selected
Embroidery attributes
When the pointer is positioned over a button or
Line sew: Switches on/off
selector in the Sewing Attributes bar, a label
sewing for the line. When
indicating the name of that element appears. In the sewing for the outline is page
following instructions, we will refer to the elements switched off, it is not sewn 168
of the Sewing Attributes bar according to these (and you cannot set its
labels. color or sew type).
Region sew: Switches
on/off sewing for the
region. When sewing for
page
the inside region is
169
switched off, it is not sewn
(and you cannot set its
color or sew type).
Line color, Region color,
Text color, Punch color:
Sets the thread color for page
As a general rule, the different characteristics outlines, inside regions, 169
available for a given pattern can be set either just text and manual punching
before creating the pattern, or after the pattern is patterns.
created. For example, when drawing a rectangle, Special colors
page
you can set the colors and the corner radius just 170
after starting the rectangle drawing mode. When the Line sew type: Sets the page
rectangle is created, you can select it and change its sew type for the outlines. 170
characteristics. Region sew type: Sets
The only exception to that rule is when you use the the sew type for an inside
page
!!sew4.bmp!! region, text and manual
circle and arc drawing mode: you must decide what 170
punching patterns.
kind of pattern you want (circle, arc, etc.) before
actually creating it. In addition, you will not be able
to change the pattern type once the pattern is
created.

167
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 168 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Editing Embroidery Patterns

1. Click the Line sew button.

Setting the thread color and sew type This button has two settings:
All patterns can be assigned at least one color and On: The Line color button and the Line sew
sew type. Patterns with an outline and an inside type selector are displayed.
region can be assigned two different thread colors
Off: The Line color button and the Line sew
and sew types. If a gradation is set, an additional
type selector are not displayed.
color can be added to the region. (For details on
gradations, refer to “Creating a gradation” on Clicking the button switches between the two
page 179.) In addition, each character in a text settings.
pattern can be assigned individual thread colors and
sew types.
Patterns with an outline and a inside region: text
converted from TrueType fonts, circles, fan shapes,
arcs & strings, rectangles, closed broken lines, and Line sew
closed curves. For these patterns, it is possible to Line color Line sew type
switch on and off sewing for the outline and the
regions. → The settings are applied to all patterns
Patterns with only an outline: arcs, open broken that you will create with an outline, until
lines, and open curves. For these patterns, it is still the setting is changed.
possible to switch on and off sewing for the outline. → If a pattern is selected, the settings are
Patterns with only a region: text created with fonts applied to the selected pattern.
provided with this software and manual punching Line sewing on: Line sewing off:
patterns. For these two types of patterns, it is not
possible to switch on and off sewing of the inside
region.
Manual punching patterns: You can set a color for
three manual punching pattern types (block, semi-
automatic block and running), but you can only set a
sew type for manual punching block patterns.
2. To switch on outline sewing, click the Line
sew button again.
■ Line sew
Clicking this button switches on/off sewing for an
a Note:
outline. If one of the fonts included in this software
(font number 1 through 35) are selected, the
line sewing attributes cannot be changed.
b Memo:
• The Line sew button is available only
when the Select Object tool is selected c “Color” on page 169 and “Sew type” on
page 170
and no patterns are selected, when you
select a pattern that has an outline (text
converted from a TrueType font, circles,
arcs, fan shapes, arcs & strings,
rectangles, broken lines, curves), or when
you click , , , or on
the Tool Box to start drawing such a
pattern.
• When line sewing is switched off, the line
is not sewn (and you cannot set its color or
sew type).

168
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 169 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Editing Embroidery Patterns

■ Region sew ■ Color

Clicking this button switches on/off sewing for an Click this button to set the thread color for outlines,
inside region. inside regions, texts and manual punching patterns.

b Memo: b Memo:
• The Region sew button is available only • The Line color and Region color buttons
when the Select Object tool is selected appear in the Sewing Attributes bar (if they
and no patterns are selected, when you have not been switched off with the Line
select a pattern that has an inside region sew or Region sew buttons) when the
(text, fan shapes, arcs & strings, Select Object tool is selected and no
rectangles, closed broken lines, curves), patterns are selected.
or when you click , , , or • When you enter one of the drawing modes
or text input mode, or select an existing
on the Tool Box to start drawing pattern, the color button for the
such a pattern. corresponding pattern appears.

Advanced Opreation
Layout & Editing
• When region sewing is switched off, the
region is not sewn (and you cannot set its
color or sew type).
1. Click the Color button.
→ A Thread Color dialog box similar to the
one shown below appears.
1. Click the Region sew button.
This button has two settings:
On: The Region color button and the Region
sew type selector are displayed.
Off: The Region color button and the Region
sew type selector are not displayed.
Clicking the button switches between the two
settings.

Region sew

b
Region color Region sew type
Memo:
To view a list of only the thread colors, clear
→ The settings are applied to all patterns
the View Details check box.
that you will create with an inside region,
until the setting is changed.
→ If a pattern is selected, the settings are 2. From the Thread Chart selector, select a
applied to the selected pattern. system chart or a user thread chart.

3. From the list of thread colors, select the

desired color.

b Memo:
• The color can also be selected by double-
2. To switch on region sewing, click the Region clicking it.
sew button again. • For details on the four buttons under the
list, refer to “Special colors” on page 170.
c “Color” on page 169 and “Sew type” on
page 170
4. Click OK.

b Memo:
To quit the operation, click Cancel.

169
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 170 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Editing Embroidery Patterns

→ This setting is applied to all patterns of the ■ Sew type

same type that you will create, until the
setting is changed. The color button of
each category shows the current color for
Use these to set the sew type for outlines, inside
that category.
regions, text, and manual punching patterns.
→ If a pattern is selected, the setting is ap-
plied to the selected pattern. b Memo:
c For details on specifying a user thread
chart or for information on how machines
• The Line sew type and Region sew type
selectors appear in the Sewing Attributes
handle thread colors, refer to “Editing bar (if they have not been switched off with
User Thread Color Lists” on page 190. the Line sew or Region sew buttons)
when the Select Object tool is selected.
c “Line sew” on page 168 and “Region sew”
on page 169
• When you enter one of the drawing modes
or select an existing pattern, the sew type
selector for the corresponding pattern
■ Special colors appears.

1. Click in a sew type selector.

→ The available settings that appear differ
depending on the object that is selected.
Object Line sew type
Region sew type settings
type settings
Text
(built-in None
fonts) Satin Stitch, Fill Stitch,
Zigzag Stitch, and Prog. Fill Stitch
NOT Text
Running Stitch (programmable fill stitch)
DEFINED APPLIQUE (TrueType
Motif Stitch,
APPLIQUE fonts)
and E/V Stitch
POSITION
Satin Stitch, Fill Stitch,
Manual
and Prog. Fill Stitch
punching None
(programmable fill stitch),
APPLIQUE MATERIAL pattern
Piping Stitch
• NOT DEFINED: Sewing machines that Satin Stitch, Fill Stitch,
feature automatic thread color display will Prog. Fill Stitch
Zigzag Stitch,
(programmable fill stitch),
automatically switch the display to the Running Stitch
Others Motif Stitch, Cross Stitch,
specified color. If you are using such a Motif Stitch,
Concentric Circle Stitch,
machine and if you want to be able to select and E/V Stitch
Radial Stitch and
manually the color for a monochrome Spiral Stitch
pattern, you can select NOT DEFINED.
• Colors for creating appliqués: You can 2. Click the desired sew type.
create appliqués using the three special → This setting is applied to all patterns of the
colors shown in the above illustration. same type that you will create, until the
APPLIQUE MATERIAL marks the outline of setting is changed.
the region to cut from the appliqué material.
→ If a pattern is selected, the setting is ap-
APPLIQUE POSITION marks the position plied to the selected pattern.
on the backing material where the appliqué
must be sewn.
APPLIQUE sews the appliqué on the back-
a Note:
ing material. You can set the sewing attributes for the
selected line and region sew types in the
b Memo:
Sewing Attribute Setting dialog box.
When you select Prog. Fill Stitch or Motif
By using the Applique Wizard, appliqués can Stitch, you also need to select a pattern in
easily be created. For details, refer to “Using the Sewing Attribute Setting dialog box, as
the Applique Wizard” on page 181. there is no default pattern setting.

170
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 171 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Editing Embroidery Patterns

c “Line sew” on page 168, “Region sew” on

page 169 and “Specifying sewing
3. To display only basic sewing attributes and
simpler settings, click To Beginner mode.
attributes” below
To display all of the sewing attributes and
settings available for the selected sew type,
click To Expert mode.
Specifying sewing attributes
Various sewing attributes for lines and regions can b Memo:
be set in the Sewing Attribute Setting dialog box • Settings that cannot be selected in
Beginner mode are retained from the
Toolbar button: previous setting in Expert mode.
• To hide the preview box, click Hide Hint.
1. Click one of the Tool Box buttons used to draw To display the preview box, click Show
or select objects. Hint.
When the Hide Hint button is displayed,
the preview box is displayed, allowing you
2. Click in the Toolbar

Advanced Opreation
Layout & Editing
to view a stitching sample when the pointer
→ The Sewing Attribute Setting dialog box is moved over the setting. The preview box
appears. shows the setting changes that you make.

Beginner mode: 4. If necessary, change the sewing attributes

displayed under Line Sew or Region Sew.

b Memo:
• In some cases, you may need to scroll
through the settings, or resize the dialog
box by dragging one of its corners in order
to view all of the sewing attributes.
• The method for entering settings varies
according to the attribute. When entering
numerical values in Expert mode, click the
arrow buttons to select the value or enter
the value directly. In Beginner mode, use
the slider to change the settings. If
appears, click the button to return to the
default setting.
Expert mode:

c For details on the different sewing

attributes and settings, refer to “Line
sewing attributes” on page 172 and
“Region sewing attributes” on page 173.

a Note:
All settings made in the dialog box are
retained and will be applied regardless of the
mode, until they are changed.

5. Click the Apply button in the dialog box to

apply the new sewing attributes.

6. Click Close to close the dialog box.

b Memo:
• An alternate method is to select the menu
command Sew – Setting Attribute.
• The sewing attributes displayed in the
dialog box depend on the selected sew
type.

171
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 172 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Editing Embroidery Patterns

■ Line sewing attributes

The available attributes differ depending on the selected sew type.
Zigzag stitch
Sets the width of the zigzag.
Zigzag width Range: 1–10 mm (0.04–0.39 inch)
Default: 2.0 mm (0.08 inch)
Sets the number of lines per millimeter (inch).
Density Range: 1–7 lines per mm (25–178 lines per inch)
Default: 4.5 lines per mm (114 lines per inch)
Sets half stitching on or off.
If one side of the zigzag stitching is dense, a half stitch could On:
Half Stitch be sewn automatically to provide a more even density.
Available for text and objects created with the drawing tools.
Off:
Default: Off

Running stitch
Sets the pitch of the line sewing.
Run pitch Range: 1–10 mm (0.04–0.39 inch)
Default: 2.0 mm (0.08 inch)
Sets the number of times that the border will be sewn.
Run times Range: 1–5
Default: 1

Motif stitch
Sets the pitch of the line sewing.
Run pitch Range: 1–10 mm (0.04–0.39 inch)
Default: 10.0 mm (0.39 inch)
Select a pattern for the motif stitch.

Click , and then, in the Browse dialog box that appeared, select the folder con-
taining the .pmf file that you want to use. Double-click the desired pattern, or select it,
and then click OK.
Sets the pattern width (the direction along the line).
Width (horizontal
Range: 2–10 mm (0.08–0.39 inch)
length)
Default: 5.0 mm (0.20 inch)
Sets the pattern height (the direction perpendicular to the line).
Height (vertical
Range: 2–10 mm (0.08–0.39 inch)
length)
Motif Default: 5.0 mm (0.20 inch)
Sets the horizontal arrangement of the pattern. For pat-
Normal:
H-Arrange terns like , the patterns will be arranged along the line
(horizontal as shown at the right. Mirror:
arrangement)
Alternate:

Sets the vertical arrangement of the pattern. For patterns

V-Arrange like , the patterns will be arranged along the line as Normal:
(vertical arrange- shown at the right. Mirror:
ment)
Alternate:

172
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 173 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Editing Embroidery Patterns

E/V stitch
Selects the E stitch or V stitch.
Sets the distance between stitches.
E stitch V stitch
Range: 1.0–20.0 mm (0.04–0.79 inch)
Interval Default: 5.0 mm (0.20 inch)

Sets the pattern height (the direction per-

E stitch V stitch
pendicular to the line).
Stroke width Range: 1.0–10.0 mm (0.04–0.39 inch)
Default: 2.5 mm (0.10 inch)

Sets the pitch of the line sewing.

E stitch V stitch
Range: 1.0–10.0 mm (0.04–0.39 inch)
Run pitch Default: 2.0 mm (0.08 inch)

Advanced Opreation
Layout & Editing
E Stitch
V Stitch

Sets the reverse stitching for the running stitches. With the V stitch, the “V” is
included in the run times.
Run time(s)
Range: 1, 3, 5
Default: 1
Sets the number of strokes of the yarn carrier.
Available only if E Stitch is selected.
Stroke times
Range: 1–3
Default: 1
Sets the inside/outside arrangement of
E stitch V stitch
the E stitch or V stitch.
Arrange

■ Region sewing attributes

The available attributes differ depending on the selected sew type.
Satin stitch
Sets underlay stitching on or off. Try to use underlay stitching for wide areas, in order to pre-
vent shrinking during stitching. Depending on the shape of the region, however, it may not be
Under sewing possible to select this setting.
On: Underlay stitching will be sewn.
Off: Underlay stitching will not be sewn.
Sets the number of lines per millimeter.
Density Range: 1–7 lines per mm (25–178 lines per inch)
Default: 4.5 lines per mm (114 lines per inch)
Sets the density gradation setting on or off.
Available when the type of sewing direction is set to Constant.
Gradation Click Pattern to set the gradation pattern.
Default: Off
For details on this attribute, refer to“Creating a gradation” on page 179.
[Type] Specifies the type of sewing direction.
Constant: Sews at a fixed angle. The angle is specified by the angle setting.
Variable: Varies the sewing direction according to the object being sewn.
[Angle] Specifies the sewing angle. 90°
Direction 135° 45°
Available only when the sewing direction type is
set to Constant. 180° 0°
Range: 0–359 degrees 225° 315°
Default: 45 degrees 270°

173
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 174 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Editing Embroidery Patterns

Sets half stitching on or off.

Available for text, manual punching patterns and objects cre- On:
ated with the drawing tools, and for geometric shapes when
Half Stitch the type of sewing direction is set to Variable.
Off:
If one side of the satin stitching is dense, a half stitch could
be sewn automatically to provide a more even density.
Default: Off
Sets the running path of the stitching. Inside of region:
Available when the type of sewing direction is set to Constant.
Available settings:
• Inside of region (shortest route) Along outline:
Running Stitch Path • Along outline (along the inner side)
• Onto outline (on the outline)
The inside of region setting is available only when the Gradation Onto outline:
check box is cleared.
Default: Inside of region
Lengthens the sewing region in the stitch pattern’s sewing direction to prevent pattern shrink-
age during sewing.
Pull Compensation
Range: 0–2 mm (0.00–0.08 inch)
Default: 0.0 mm (0.00 inch)
Fill stitch
Sets underlay stitching on or off. Try to use underlay stitching for wide areas, in order to pre-
vent shrinking during stitching. Depending on the shape of the region, however, it may not be
Under sewing possible to select this setting.
On: Underlay stitching will be sewn.
Off: Underlay stitching will not be sewn.
Sets the number of lines per millimeter.
Density Range: 1–7 lines per mm (25–178 lines per inch)
Default: 4.5 lines per mm (114 lines per inch)
Sets the density gradation setting on or off.
Available when the type of sewing direction is set to Constant.
Gradation Click Pattern to set the gradation pattern and its density.
Default: Off
For details on this attribute, refer to“Creating a gradation” on page 179.
[Type] Specifies the type of sewing direction.
Constant: Sews at a fixed angle. The angle is specified by the angle setting.
Variable: Varies the sewing direction according to the object being sewn.
[Angle] Specifies the sewing angle. 90°
Direction 135° 45°
Available only when the sewing direction type is
set to Constant. 180° 0°
Range: 0–359 degrees 225° 315°
Default: 45 degrees 270°
Specifies the shape of stitching on the edges.

Available settings: ,
Stitch Type
Default: (for all objects other than text)

(for text)
Sets half stitching on or off.
Available for text, manual punching patterns and objects cre- On:
ated with the drawing tools, and for geometric shapes when
Half Stitch the type of sewing direction is set to Variable.
Off:
If one side of the fill stitching is dense, a half stitch could be
sewn automatically to provide a more even density.
Default: Off

174
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 175 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Editing Embroidery Patterns

Sets the running path of the stitching. Inside of region:

Available when the type of sewing direction is set to Constant.
Available settings:
• Inside of region (shortest route) Along outline:
Running Stitch Path • Along outline (along the inner side)
• Onto outline (on the outline)
The inside of region setting is available only when the Gradation Onto outline:
check box is cleared.
Default: Inside of region
Sets the pitch of the stitching. Step pitch
Range: 1–10 mm (0.04–0.39 inch)
Step Pitch Default: 4.0 mm (0.16 inch)

Sets the spacial frequency steps. 30% 0%

Range: 0–99%
Frequency

Advanced Opreation
Layout & Editing
Default: 30%

Lengthens the sewing region in the stitch pattern’s sewing direction to prevent pattern shrink-
age during sewing.
Pull Compensation
Range: 0–2 mm (0.00–0.08 inch)
Default: 0.0 mm (0.00 inch)

Programmable fill stitch

Sets underlay stitching on or off. Try to use underlay stitching for wide areas, in order to pre-
vent shrinking during stitching. Depending on the shape of the region, however, it may not be
Under sewing possible to select this setting.
On: Underlay stitching will be sewn.
Off: Underlay stitching will not be sewn.
Sets the number of lines per millimeter.
Density Range: 1–7 lines per mm (25–178 lines per inch)
Default: 4.5 lines per mm (114 lines per inch)
Sets the density gradation setting on or off.
Available when the type of sewing direction is set to Constant.
Gradation Click Pattern to set the gradation pattern and its density.
Default: Off
For details on this attribute, refer to“Creating a gradation” on page 179.
[Type] Specifies the type of sewing direction.
Constant: Sews at a fixed angle. The angle is specified by the angle setting.
Variable: Varies the sewing direction according to the object being sewn.
[Angle] Specifies the sewing angle. 90°
Direction 135° 45°
Available only when the sewing direction type is
set to Constant. 180° 0°
Range: 0–359 degrees 225° 315°
Default: 45 degrees 270°
Sets half stitching on or off.
Available for text, manual punching patterns and objects cre- On:
ated with the drawing tools, and for geometric shapes when
Half Stitch the type of sewing direction is set to Variable.
Off:
If one side of the fill stitching is dense, a half stitch could be
sewn automatically to provide a more even density.
Default: Off
Sets the running path of the stitching. Inside of region:
Available when the type of sewing direction is set to Constant.
Available settings:
• Inside of region (shortest route) Along outline:
Running Stitch Path • Along outline (along the inner side)
• Onto outline (on the outline)
The inside of region setting is available only when the Gradation Onto outline:
check box is cleared.
Default: Inside of region

175
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 176 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Editing Embroidery Patterns

Lengthens the sewing region in the stitch pattern’s sewing direction to prevent pattern shrink-
age during sewing.
Pull Compensation
Range: 2–10 mm (0.08–0.39 inch)
Default: 0.0 mm (0.00 inch)
Select a pattern for programmable fill stitch.

Click , and then, in the Browse dialog box that appeared, select the folder
containing the .pas file that you want to use. Double-click the desired pattern, or
select it, and then click OK.
Sets the stitch pattern width.
Width (horizontal length) Range: 2–10 mm (0.08–0.39 inch)
Default: 7.5 mm (0.30 inch)
Sets the stitch pattern height.
Height (vertical length) Range: 5–10 mm (0.20–0.39 inch)
Default: 7.5 mm (0.30 inch)
Allows you to rotate the angle of the stitch patterns. 90°
135° 45°
Range: 0–359 degrees
Direction Default: 0 degrees 180° 0°
225° 315°
270°
Sets the direction of the offset as row/column.
row
Direction
column
Offset
Programma- When the pattern’s arrangement is offset, sets the amount of offset.
ble fill Value Range: 0–99%
Default: 0%
Specifies the shape of stitching on the edges.
Available only when the Base Sew check box is
selected.
Stitch
Type Available settings: ,

Default: (for all objects other than text)

(for text)
Base
Sew Sets the pitch of the stitching for the base of a programmable fill stitch.
Specifies Available only when the Base Sew check box is Step pitch
the base Step Pitch selected.
stitching. Range: 1–10 mm (0.04–0.39 inch)
Default: 4.0 mm (0.16 inch)
Sets the spacial frequency steps of the stitching for the base of a programmable
fill stitch.
Available only when the Base Sew check box is 30% 0%
Frequency
selected.
Range: 0–99%
Default: 30%

The stitching for the base (area

other than the pattern indicated
Pattern by the diagonal lines) of the pro-
grammable fill stitch can be set.

The pattern is sewn with the

specified stitching.

176
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 177 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Editing Embroidery Patterns

Motif stitch
Selects whether to use pattern 1 or pattern 2 for the motif stitch. If you choose to use both patterns, the data
is created to sew alternating rows of the two.
Pattern1 only: Uses only pattern 1 (Default)
Pattern2 only: Uses only pattern 2
Pattern1 and 2: Uses pattern 1 and pattern 2
Select a pattern for the motif stitch.

Click , and then, in the Browse dialog box that appeared, select the
folder containing the .pmf file that you want to use. Double-click the desired
pattern, or select it, and then click OK.
Sets the pattern width (the direction along the line).
Width (hori-
Range: 2–10 mm (0.08–0.39 inch)
zontal length)
Default: 5.0 mm (0.20 inch)
Sets the pattern height (the direction perpendicular to the line).

Advanced Opreation
Height (verti-

Layout & Editing

Pattern1
Range: 2–10 mm (0.08–0.39 inch)
Pattern 2 cal length)
Default: 5.0 mm (0.20 inch)
H-Arrange Normal:
Sets the horizontal arrangement of the pattern. For
(horizontal
Motif patterns like , the patterns will be arranged along Mirror:
arrange-
the line as shown at the right.
ment) Alternate:
V-Arrange Normal:
Sets the vertical arrangement of the pattern. For pat-
(vertical
terns like , the patterns will be arranged along the Mirror:
arrange-
line as shown at the right.
ment) Alternate:
Allows you to rotate the angle of the motif stitch. 90°
135° 45°
Range: 0–359 degrees
Direction Default: 0 degrees 180° 0°
225° 315°
270°
Sets the amount of offset for each row.
Range: 0–10 mm (0.00–0.39 inch)
Row Offset
Default: 0.0 mm (0.00 inch)

Sets the pitch of the sewing.

Run Pitch Range: 1–10 mm (0.04–0.39 inch)
Default: 10.0 mm (0.39 inch)

Cross stitch
Sets the horizontal and vertical size of the pattern.
In Expert mode, the set value is converted automatically and displayed in the box for the other
Size measurement units.
Range: 1.5–5.0 mm (0.06–0.20 inch) or 5–17 counts
Default: 2.5 mm (0.10 inch) or 10 counts
Sets the number of times that the pattern will be sewn. Sews twice per time.
Times Range: Single, Double, Triple
Default: Single

Concentric circle stitch, radial stitch and spiral stitch

For details on moving the center point of the concentric circle stitch and the radial stitch, refer to “Moving the
center point” on page 139.
Sets the number of lines per millimeter.
Density Range: 0.5–7.0 lines per mm (13–178 lines per inch)
Default: 2.0 lines per mm (51 lines per inch)
Sets the pitch of the line sewing.
Run pitch Range: 1–10.0 mm (0.04–0.39 inch)
Default: 2.0 mm (0.08 inch)

177
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 178 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Editing Embroidery Patterns

Piping stitch
Stitches run parallel through the length of adjacent blocks.
Available only for manual punching patterns.

Sets the number of lines per millimeter.

Density Range: 0.5–7.0 lines per mm (13–178 lines per inch)
Default: 2.0 lines per mm (51 lines per inch)
Sets the pitch of the line sewing.
Run pitch Range: 1–10.0 mm (0.04–0.39 inch)
Default: 4.0 mm (0.16 inch)
Sets the spacial frequency steps. 30% 0%
Range: 0–99%
Frequency
Default: 30%

Manual punch
Sets which edge of the stitching that the feathered edge is applied to.
Feather edge applied to the top:
Top: Feathered edge is sewn on the top edge.
Bottom: Feathered edge is sewn on the bottom edge.
When creating data with a Manual Punch tool, the top edge is the side
containing the first and third points, and the bottom edge is the side con-
taining the second and fourth points.
Feathered
edge Select a pattern for the feathered edge.

Click , and then, in the Browse dialog box that appeared, double-click the desired pat-
tern, or select it, and then click OK.
Sets the length of the feathered edge.
Length Range: 0.2–100 mm (0.01–3.94 inches)
Default: 3 mm (0.12 inch)

Notes on programmable fill stitches and Examples of programmable fill stitching:

stamps
Example 1
When setting the sew type and pattern directions of Stitch direction: 45° (default)
a programmable fill stitch or a stamp, lines will not
be sewn if the sew type and pattern direction
settings cause a stitch to be sewn in the same
direction as a line in the stitch pattern.
Use the Preview function to view exactly how the
stitch pattern will be sewn, and then set the stitch
direction and pattern direction according to the
selected sew type or to the effect that you want to
produce. To get an even better view, make test
samples of different settings.

178
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 179 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Editing Embroidery Patterns

Example 2
Stitch direction: 90° Creating a gradation
The density of one or two colors can be adjusted at
various locations to create a custom gradation
pattern.

1. In Expert mode of the Sewing Attribute

Setting dialog box, select the Gradation
check box under Region sew.

2. Click Pattern.
→ The Gradation Pattern Setting dialog
box appears.
Example 3

Advanced Opreation
Stitch direction: 0°

Layout & Editing

3.
c “Previewing the Sewing Image” on
page 187 and “Programmable Stitch
To change the thread color, click . Select
a color in the Thread Color dialog box that
Creator” on page 208 appeared, and then click OK.

4. To select a preset gradation pattern, click the

desired pattern under Select pattern.

5. Move the sliders to adjust the density of the

gradation pattern.

b Memo:
The preview area shows the setting changes
that you make.

6. To blend two colors, select the Use additional

color check box, click under Use
additional color. Select a color in the Thread
Color dialog box that appeared, and then click
OK.

7. Click OK.

b Memo:
• If the Use additional color check box is
cleared, the gradation settings are applied
to the remaining color.
• To close the dialog box without applying
the changes to the gradation pattern, click
Cancel.

179
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 180 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Editing Embroidery Patterns

Specifying hole sewing

Sewn twice Sewn once
By specifying hole sewing, the stitching in
overlapping regions will not be sewn twice. Hole
sewing can be set only when one region completely
encloses another. Hole sewing not set Hole sewing set

1. Select a pair of patterns, for example, a circle

included in an oval. 3. Click OK to remove the message.

b Memo: b Memo:
For a pair to be valid, one of the patterns • Once a pair of patterns has been set for
must be completely enclosed within the other hole sewing, they will move together if you
pattern, and not contain text, manual try to move one of the patterns. To select
punching patterns or stitch data. only one pattern to be moved or resized,
hold down the Alt key while selecting
it. (An alternate method is to cancel hole
sewing.)
• The outline of patterns created with the
Outline, Fan Shape and Arc & String tools
can be edited with the Point Edit tool if they
are first selected while the Alt key is
Valid
held down.
2. Click Sew, then Set Hole Sewing.
a Note:
To see better what the hole sewing setting
does, previewing the patterns before and
after setting hole sewing (For details, refer to
“Previewing the Sewing Image” on
page 187.)
Invalid

→ If the selected pair can be set for hole

sewing, the following message appears. ■ Canceling hole sewing
1. Select a pattern that has been set for hole
sewing.

2. Click Sew, then Cancel Hole Sewing.

The pair of patterns can now be moved
independently.

→ If the selected pair cannot be set for hole

sewing, the following message appears.

180
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 181 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Editing Embroidery Patterns

7. Click OK to finish the Applique Wizard and

Using the Applique Wizard display the design in the Design Page.

The Applique Wizard provides instructions for easily

creating appliqués.
b Memo:
To quit the operation and close the dialog
1. Select a pattern with a closed shape, such as box, click Cancel.
a circle or square.

b Memo:
• A pattern with lines that cross over
themselves cannot be selected.
• The pattern selected for creating the
appliqué will be deleted after the Applique
Wizard is used.

Advanced Opreation
Layout & Editing
2. Click Sew, then Applique Wizard.
→ The Applique Wizard dialog box ap-
pears.

3. Under Applique Material, select whether

(Yes) or not (No) the outline of the appliqué is
to be sewn onto the appliqué fabric as a guide
for cutting it out.

4. Under Applique Position, select whether or

not the outline of the appliqué positioning
outline is to be sewn onto the base fabric.

5. Under Tack down, select whether (Yes) or

not (No) the appliqué is to be basted onto the
base fabric. If Yes is selected, select the
basting stitch from the selector. You can also
select which stitch (satin stitch, E stitch or V
stitch) to use for the basting.
Satin stitch E stitch V stitch

6. Under Covering Stitch, select the sew type

and other attributes for finishing the appliqué.

181
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 182 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing

Checking Embroidery Patterns

Measuring the Distance Between Two

Points
1. Click on the Tool Box.
→ The shape of the pointer changes to

2. Move the pointer to the beginning of the part of

the object that you want to measure, and then
hold down the mouse button.
→ A small circle appears, indicating the start
point of the measurement.

3. Drag the pointer to view the measurement in

the status bar. The value beside Length
shows the length along a straight line between
the start point and the end point. The value
beside Width shows the horizontal distance
between the start point and the end point. The
value beside Height shows the vertical
distance between the start point and the end
point.

182
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 183 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Checking Embroidery Patterns

Specifying the Sewing Area

The sewing area can be specified.

1. Click Sew, then Select Sewing Area.

→ The following dialog box appears.

A
Design Page (on your screen)

2. Select the desired sewing area (Design Page

Advanced Opreation
Layout & Editing
area or Use existing design area).

3. Click OK.

b Memo:
To quit the operation, click Cancel. A
Sewing area = Design Page area
→ If Design Page area was selected, the
patterns will be sewn so that the needle
position when you start sewing is aligned
with the center of your Design Page.
A
b Memo:
When Design Page area is selected, the
dimension of the pattern matches the size of Sewing area = Use existing design area
the Design Page, therefore reducing the
ability to move a pattern around the layout c “Specifying the Design Page” on
page 108
screen of your embroidering machine.

→ If Use existing design area was select-

ed, the patterns will be sewn so that the
needle position when you start sewing is
aligned with the center of the actual pat-
terns.

b Memo:
When Use existing design area is selected,
the actual pattern size is maintained,
therefore allowing greater mobility when
using the layout functions of your
embroidering machine.

183
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 184 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Checking Embroidery Patterns

Checking and Editing the Sewing Order/

Color
The sewing order of pattern colors as well as the
sewing order of pattern objects of the same color b Memo:
can be checked and modified as necessary. • When multiple patterns are combined into
one frame, appears to the left of the
Toolbar button: number of that frame.
Click to display the combined
1. Click , or click Sew, then Sewing Order/ patterns in separate frames.
Color.
→ A Sewing Order/Color dialog box similar
to the one shown below appears.

appears under the first frame, and

each frame is displayed with a subnumber
following the first, to indicate its sewing
order within the patterns of the same color.
b Memo: Click to recombine all of the patterns
The dialog box can be made longer so that back into one frame.
all parts of the pattern can be viewed. • To close the dialog box without applying
the changes to the settings, click Cancel.
To enlarge each pattern to fill its frame, click
.
Selecting data
To display in one frame all patterns of the
same color that will be sewn together, click 1. Select a pattern in the Sewing Order/Color
dialog box.
.
→ The selected pattern has a pink line
around it, and “marching lines” appear
around the corresponding pattern in the
Design Page.

b Memo:
• To select multiple patterns, hold down the
2. Click OK to apply the settings and to close the Shift or Ctrl key while clicking the
dialog box. frames for the desired patterns. In
addition, multiple frames can be selected
by dragging the pointer over them.
• When the Sewing Order/Color dialog box
is closed, the pattern that was selected in
the dialog box remains selected in the
Design Page, unless it is a locked pattern.

184
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 185 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Checking Embroidery Patterns

Editing the sewing order Combining patterns of the same color

The sewing order can be changed by selecting the When a Design Page contains a combination of
frame containing the pattern that you want to move, patterns, those patterns with the same color can be
then dragging the frame to the new location. A grouped together from the Sewing Order/Color
vertical red line appears, indicating the position dialog box. Simply drag the frame of the patterns
where the frame is being moved. with the same color to position them beside each
other.

b Memo:
Check the stitching after changing the
sewing order to be sure that overlapping
patterns will not be sewn in the wrong order.

An alternative method for moving the frames is by

clicking the buttons at the bottom of the dialog box. Editing the color

Advanced Opreation
Layout & Editing
To move the selected pattern to the beginning
1. Select the frame for the pattern whose color
of the sewing order, click . you want to change, and then click .
To move the selected pattern ahead one → The Thread Color dialog box appears.
position in the sewing order, click .

To move the selected pattern back one

position in the sewing order, click .

To move the selected pattern to the end of the

sewing order, click .

b Memo:
When dragging a frame containing combined
patterns, the patterns will display in separate 2. Select the desired color, and then click OK.
frames after you release them. Click to → The object appears in the new color in the
the left of the first pattern for that color to Sewing Order/Color dialog box and in
recombine them into one frame. Dropping a the Design Page.
frame containing combined patterns next to
another frame containing combined patterns 3. Click OK.
of the same color displays all patterns in
separate frames. → The pattern is displayed with the new col-
or.

a Note: b Memo:
• Pieces of patterns that have been cut with To close the dialog box without applying the
the Split stitch tool appear at the end of the changes to the settings, click Cancel.
sewing order, depending on the sewing
order of the original pattern and can be
edited as any other pattern.
• The sewing order of the separate pattern
sections cannot be edited. It is
automatically determined by the order set
for the whole design.
• Objects with no sewing attributes appear
in a dotted frame, and there is no number
for the sewing order below the frame.

185
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 186 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Checking Embroidery Patterns

Zooming
You can zoom in to work on details of the embroidery pattern or you can zoom out to work on any part of the
embroidery pattern that cannot be viewed in the work area.

Zooming in Zooming on selected

objects
1. Click on the Tool Box.
1. Select the objects that you want to zoom on.
→ Five buttons appear: .
2. Click on the Tool Box.
2. Click .
→ Five buttons appear: .
→ The shape of the pointer changes to

.
3. Click .

→ The Design Page is zoomed to display

3. Click the area that you want to view enlarged.
only the selected objects.

b Memo:
To zoom in on a specific area, move the
pointer near the desired area, and then drag
Zooming Design Page to
the pointer diagonally over the desired area. window
1. Click on the Tool Box.
Zooming out → Five buttons appear: .

1. Click on the Tool Box. 2. Click .

→ Five buttons appear: . → The entire Design Page is displayed to fit
within the window.
2. Click .

→ The shape of the pointer changes to

3. Click the area that you want to view reduced.

Zooming to actual size

1. Click on the Tool Box.

→ Five buttons appear: .

2. Click .

→ The Design Page is displayed at its actual

size.

186
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 187 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Checking Embroidery Patterns

Previewing the Sewing Image

Once the embroidery pattern is complete, you can display a preview of it in order to see how the stitching is
connected, or you can display a realistic preview of it in order to see how the pattern will appear once it is sewn.

1. To display a preview of the embroidery

pattern, click Display on the menu bar, and
b Memo:
then click Preview. To zoom in (or out), click on the Tool
An alternate method is to click the Toolbar
Box, click (or ), and then click the
button indicated below.
desired area of the embroidery pattern.

Preview
4. To leave the realistic preview display, repeat
→ A preview of the embroidery pattern ap- step 3., or press the Esc key.
pears.

Advanced Opreation
Layout & Editing
a Note:
• The embroidery pattern cannot be edited
while the realistic preview is displayed.
• The Realistic Preview function cannot
display a clean preview of the pattern if the
monitor is set to 256 colors or less. The
monitor should be set to at least 16-bit
High Color (65536 colors).

Changing realistic preview

b Memo: settings
To zoom in (or out), click on the Tool Set the realistic preview settings for the desired
Box, click (or ), and then click the realistic preview display.
desired area of the embroidery pattern.
1. Click Display, then Realistic Preview
Attribute Setting.
2. To leave the preview display, repeat step 1.,
→ A Realistic Preview Attribute dialog box
or press the Esc key. similar to the ones shown below appears.
When a realistic pre- When a realistic pre-
3. To display a realistic preview of the
view is displayed view is not displayed
embroidery pattern, click Display on the menu
bar, and then click Realistic Preview.
An alternate method is to click the Toolbar
button indicated below.

Realistic Preview

→ A realistic preview of the embroidery pat-

tern appears.

2. Use the Thread Width slider to set how wide

the thread will appear.

3. Use the Contrast slider to set the contrast.

4. Use the Brightness slider to set how bright

the display is.

187
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 188 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Checking Embroidery Patterns

5. Click Apply to display a realistic preview of the

patterns with the new settings (when the
b Memo:
realistic preview is displayed). To close the dialog box without applying the
changes to the settings, click Close or
Or, click OK to save the settings for the next Cancel.
time that the Realistic Preview function is
select (when the realistic preview is not
displayed). c “Previewing the Sewing Image” on
page 187

Checking the Stitching

The actual stitching as it will be performed by the sewing machine can be viewed using the stitch simulator.
You can choose to view the stitching simulation of whole designs or, for large patterns created on a custom-
sized Design Page, view it by pattern section.

Toolbar button: of stitches, type or select the desired number

of stitches, and then click .

1. Click , or click Display, then Stitch
To reverse the stitching to the previous pattern
Simulator.
The Stitch Simulator dialog box appears, section, click .
and the embroidery pattern is cleared from the To advance the stitching to the next pattern
Design Page.
section, click .

b Memo:

To begin the stitching simulation, click and appear only for

patterns created on custom-sized Design
. Pages.

b Memo: To stop the simulation and return to the

• During the stitching simulation, the play
previous display, click .
button ( ) changes to a pause

button ( ). b Memo:
The slider shows the current location in the
• A marker ( ) indicates the current simulation. In addition, the slider can be
position in the simulation. moved to change the position in the
• To get a better view of the stitching, zoom simulation.
in on the design before opening the Stitch
Simulator dialog box.

To reverse the simulation to the beginning of

Drag the slider indicated by to adjust the
the previous color, click . simulation stitching speed.
To advance the simulation to the beginning of
b Memo:
the next color, click .
• The first number beside indicates the
To reverse the stitching by a specific number number of the current stitch, and the
of stitches, type or select the desired number second number indicates the total number
of stitches.
of stitches, and then click .
• The first number beside indicates the
To advance the stitching by a specific number
number of the color being drawn, and the

188
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 189 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Checking Embroidery Patterns

second number indicates the total number

of colors used. 2. Click in the upper-right corner of the

• The first number beside indicates the dialog box to close the dialog box.
pattern section that is displayed, and the
second number indicates the total number b Memo:
of hoop sections in the pattern. This If a pattern was selected when the Stitch
indicator appears only for patterns created Simulator dialog box was displayed, only
on custom-sized Design Pages. the selected pattern is drawn in the
simulation.

Checking Embroidery Pattern Information

Sewing information such as dimensions, needle count, color count and color order of patterns can be checked

Advanced Opreation
Layout & Editing
in the Design Property dialog box.

1. Click Option, then Design Property. hoop, and a Design Property dialog box
similar to the one shown below appears.
→ The Design Property dialog box ap-
pears.

b Memo: a Note:
• You can select and check the properties of If a pattern is larger than the Design Page or
individual objects within the embroidery if it is positioned so that it does not
pattern by selecting the pattern before completely fit within the Design Page, the
opening this dialog box. error message “Please change the object
• To display the colors as the machine’s size or position.” appears instead of this
preset color names, select the With Basic dialog box. After the pattern causing the
Color check box. error is displayed selected, change its size
• This dialog box can be resized. The size of or position. (If more than one pattern causes
the dialog box is retained until it is changed the error message to appear, they will be
again. displayed in the sewing order.)
• To close the dialog box, click Close.
b Memo:
→ If the Design Page was set to Custom
• The Design Page is automatically zoomed
Size and no object in the Design Page is in on or zoomed out from to fit in the entire
selected, the sewing information for the window.
entire Design Page is displayed hoop by • The first line of the dialog box shows the
position of the displayed pattern section
within the embroidery hoop installation
order.
• Only the patterns within the corresponding
section appear in the Design Page and are
outlined in red.

189
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 190 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Checking Embroidery Patterns

• To display information for other pattern

sections, click Previous or Next. a Note:
• The pattern sections are displayed in order The Previous button cannot be clicked
from left to right, top to bottom. Pattern when the design corresponding to the first
sections that do not contain any stitching hoop is already displayed. In addition, the
will not be displayed. Next button cannot be clicked when the
• To close the dialog box, click Close. design corresponding to the last hoop is
already displayed.

Editing User Thread Color Lists

Original thread color charts can be created and
edited. b Memo:
A saved chart can be selected from the User
1. Click Option, then Edit User Thread Chart. Thread Chart selector, then edited.
→ A dialog box similar to the one shown be-
low appears.
Deleting a chart
1. From the User Thread Chart selector, select
the chart that you want to delete.

2. Click Delete Chart to delete the selected

chart.

Editing a chart
1. From the User Thread Chart selector, select
the chart that you want to edit.

User thread charts can be created and edited

to contain a list of threads that are used most
often or a list of all threads that you have.
Thread data from system thread charts can be
included or new thread data can be added.

Creating a new thread chart

1. Click New Chart.
→ The New Thread Chart dialog box ap-
pears.

a Note:
If no chart is selected, the editing operation
cannot be performed.

2. Type in the name of the chart, and then click

OK to save the chart with the entered name.

190
Advanced_02.fm Page 191 Friday, July 9, 2004 1:53 PM

Layout & Editing Checking Embroidery Patterns

Adding an item from a system thread chart Adding a new item

1. From the System Thread Chart selector, 1. Click New Item.
select the brand of thread that you want to → The Edit Thread dialog box appears.
add.

2. From the list at the bottom of the dialog box,

click the thread colors that you want to add.

b Memo:
To add multiple items, hold down the Shift
or Ctrl keys while selecting thread colors.
2. To create a new color, click Mix.
3. Click . → A dialog box similar to the one shown be-

Advanced Opreation
Layout & Editing
low appears.
→ The selected items are added to the list in
the user thread chart.

3. Specify the color, and then click OK to add the

specified color to the Edit Thread dialog box.

4. If necessary, type in the code, brand and

description into the appropriate boxes.

b Memo:
Only numbers can be entered for the code.

191
 Advanced_02.fm Page 192 Friday, July 9, 2004 1:53 PM

Layout & Editing Checking Embroidery Patterns

5. Click OK to add the new item to the user → The following dialog box appears.
thread chart.

2. Edit the item details in the same way as

adding an item.

b Memo:
As with newly added items, an asterisk (*)
appears in front of the index number of
edited items.

b Memo:
Changing the order of items
An asterisk (*) appears in front of the index
number of newly added items. From the list for the user thread chart, select the
item to be moved, and then click up or down to
change the order of the item.
Deleting an item
From the list for the user thread chart, select the a Note:
item to be deleted, and then click Delete Item to Thread colors in embroidery patterns
delete the item from the user thread chart. created with this software may appear
differently on the embroidering machine.
Editing an item 1. Embroidering machines without a function
for displaying thread color information
An item registered in the list for a user thread chart The specified thread information cannot be
can be edited to change the color or thread number. displayed on some machines.
2. Embroidering machines with a function for
1. From the list for the user thread chart, select displaying thread colors
the item to be edited, and then click Edit Item. Of the thread information specified in the
embroidery pattern, only the thread colors
are displayed on the machine. However, the
thread color names that are displayed are
limited to the machine’s preset thread color
names. Therefore, use thread color names
in the embroidery pattern that are closest to
the machine’s preset thread color names.
3. Machines with a thread color index
Some machines can display the thread
information (such as the color, the color
name as well as the brand name and thread
number) specified with this software. The
machines can display the color, the color
name as well as the brand name and thread
number.
However, for items edited or added by the
user (items marked with an asterisk (*)), only
the thread number is displayed.

192
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 193 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Checking Embroidery Patterns

Viewing Patterns in the Reference

Window
All outlines and patterns in the Design Page are displayed in the Reference Window, giving you an overall view
of the pattern while you work on a detailed area. The display area frame (red rectangle) indicates the part of
the pattern displayed in the Design Page.

2. Drag the display area frame so that it

Zooming surrounds the desired part of the pattern.

The pattern displayed in the Reference Window can → The selected part of the pattern is dis-
be reduced to fit completely within the Reference played in the Design Page.
Window or enlarged to display only the pattern.

Advanced Opreation
Layout & Editing
1. Click .
Redrawing the display area
frame
→ The pattern is displayed so that it fills the
Reference Window. Instead of moving the display area frame, the frame
can be redrawn to display the desired part of the
pattern in the Design Page.

1. Drag the pointer over the desired part of the

pattern in the Reference Window.
→ The display area frame is redrawn, and
the selected part of the pattern is dis-
played in the Design Page.

Scaling the display area

frame
1. Move the pointer over a corner of the display
area frame.

→ The shape of the pointer changes to

or , depending on the corner that the

pointer is over.

b Memo:
and are for scaling the height
and width.
Moving the display area
frame 2. Drag the corner to adjust the display area
frame to the desired size.
The part of the pattern displayed in the Design Page
can be selected from the Reference Window.

1. Move the pointer over the display area frame.

→ The shape of the pointer changes to .

193
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 194 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing

Saving and Printing

Saving
Overwriting a Note:
• If you select a file type of a previous
Once the image or pattern has been saved, software version, saved .pes files can be
changes can easily be saved so that the latest opened with that version of the software;
version can be retrieved later. however, all saved data will be converted
to stitch data.
Toolbar button: • Custom-sized Design Pages cannot be
saved in a software version prior to
version 6.
1. Click , or click File, then Save. • Custom-sized Design Pages will be saved
in one file, but the stitch data is saved
→ If the image or pattern has already been separately for all hoop sizes.
saved at least once, the file is saved im-
mediately.
3. Click Save to save the data.
→ If no file name has been specified or if the
file cannot be found, the Save As dialog b Memo:
box appears. • To quit the operation, click Cancel.
• If a file already exists with the name
specified in the Save As dialog box, the
Saving with a new name following message appears.
The current file can be saved with a different file
name in order to keep the original unchanged or to
keep various versions of the same image or pattern.
The files are saved as .pes files.

1. Click File, then Save As.

→ A Save As dialog box similar to the one • To overwrite the file, click Yes.
shown below appears. • If you do not want to overwrite the
existing file, click No. You can then
enter a different file name.

→ The new file name appears in the title bar

of the Layout & Editing window.

2. Select the drive and the folder, and then type

in the file name.

194
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 195 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Saving and Printing

Outputting data in a a Note:

Be sure that the hoop size of the pattern
different format does not exceed the hoop that will be used
The data shown in the Design Page can be exported on the embroidering machine.
as a file of a different format (.dst, .hus, .exp, and
.pcs). Toolbar button:

1. Click File, then Export. 1. Insert an original card into the USB card writer
→ A dialog box similar to the one shown be- module.
low appears.
a Note:
• The original card is inserted correctly
when you hear it snap into place.
• The sewing machine must be turned off

Advanced Opreation
Layout & Editing
before original cards are inserted or
removed. However, it is not necessary to
turn off the computer when original cards
are inserted or removed from the USB
card writer module.

2. Select the drive and the folder, and then type

2. Click , or click File, then Write to Card,
in the file name. then Current Design.
→ The following message appears.
3. Select the format (.dst, .exp, .pcs, or .hus) in
which you want to export the file.

b Memo:
With the DST format, jump codes are used to
indicate when the thread must be cut in order
to change the thread color. Since the number
of codes differ depending on the sewing
machine being used, type or select the
appropriate value in the Number of jumps
a Note:
for trim box. (This setting can only be • If the original card is not brand new, make
specified if the .dst format is selected.) sure that the patterns already stored on
the card are no longer needed.
• If no original card is inserted, the following
message appears
a Note:
• Some patterns imported from embroidery
cards cannot be exported.
• Patterns designed on a custom-sized
Design Page will be exported as a simple
file, and will not be split into sections.

• Correct the problem, and then click

Writing an embroidery Retry.
• To quit the operation, click Cancel.
pattern to an original card • If a .pes file is saved with objects
extending off the Design Page or with the
You can save a displayed embroidery pattern onto number of stitches or number of colors for
an original card in order to transfer it to a sewing the objects exceeding the Design Page
machine. limitations, the patterns cannot be saved
on an original card.

195
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 196 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Saving and Printing

b Memo: b Memo:
Patterns created on a custom-sized Design To quit the operation, click Cancel.
Page are written to cards split into their various
sections.
If the total size of the pattern exceeds the 4. Click OK to close the message.
capacity of the original card or if your Design
Page is set to a custom size of 90 × 90 cm (3.54” b Memo:
× 3.54”), and is split into over 80 sections, you “Overwriting” on page 194 and “Saving with
will need to split the pattern into sections and a new name” on page 194
write them onto several original cards.
In this case, the Select Hoop Sections dialog
box appears to let you select the sections that
can be written in the available space on the card.
Writing multiple embroidery
files to an original card
You can save multiple .pes files to an original card
at the same time.

1. Insert an original card into the USB card writer

module.

a Note:
• The original card is inserted correctly
when you hear it snap into place.
• The sewing machine must be turned off
before original cards are inserted or
removed. However, it is not necessary to
turn off the computer when original cards
are inserted or removed from the USB
card writer module.
The progress bar at the top of the dialog box
shows the available space on the card as you
select pattern sections to be written to the card. 2. Click File, then Write to Card, then Other
The space used by the selected pattern sections PES files.
appears in blue. If, however, you select a pattern
section that exceeds the size limit, the space → The following dialog box appears with the
used appears in yellow, and if you select several contents of the last folder accessed dis-
pattern sections which exceed the size limit, the played in the available patterns list.
space used appears in red.
Click each pattern section to select it, and
then click Write to write the selected pattern
sections to the card. To deselect a pattern
section, simply click it again. (The Write
button is available only when a section is
selected and the space on the card is
sufficient to receive the selected patterns.)

3. Click OK.
→ The message “Now writing” appears while
the current embroidery pattern is trans-
ferred to the original card, and then the
following message appears. Available patterns Selected patterns

196
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 197 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Saving and Printing

b Memo: b Memo:
• Patterns that are either too large or have • To deselect a file, simply click it again.
too many stitches for the embroidery hoop • To switch between the large and small
size selected with the Hoop size selector, display size of the embroidery pattern
are displayed with a red crossed-out hoop
images shown in the lists, click .
( ).
• To display the information (size, number of
• Patterns created for the optional extra- stitches, and colors) for the pattern
large embroidery hoop are displayed with
selected in either list, click . (This
the symbol.
• Patterns created on a custom-sized button is available only if a single pattern is
selected.)
Design Page are displayed with the • To display a three-dimensional image of
the pattern selected in either list, click

Advanced Opreation
symbol.

Layout & Editing

. (This button is available only if a
3. From the Hoop size selector, select the single pattern is selected.)
appropriate size of embroidery hoop. • shows the
capacity of the patterns selected in the
selected patterns list.

b Memo: 6. To add the embroidery pattern selected in the

• Do not select a hoop size larger than the available patterns list to the selected patterns
embroidery hoop that can be used with
your embroidering machine. Otherwise, list, click .
the created original card will not work
correctly with the embroidering machine.
• Make sure to select a hoop size that is the
same or larger than the largest hoop size
of the files you want to write to the card,
otherwise the pattern cannot be written to
a card and “×” appears.

4. Click , and then select the folder where

the desired pattern file (.pes) is saved. The
available pattern list displays the image of the
embroidery pattern files (.pes).

b Memo:
If an original card was selected, the patterns
saved on the inserted card are displayed.

5. In the available patterns list, click the pattern

that you want to write onto a card to select it.

197
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 198 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Saving and Printing

b Memo: b Memo:
• To remove the embroidery pattern During this process, the card capacity
selected in the selected patterns list, click indicator allows you to plan which patterns
you would like to save on an original card.
. The space used by patterns in the selected
• Patterns created on a custom-sized patterns list appears in blue. The space used
Design Page are written to cards split into by the files selected in the available patterns
their various hoop sections. list appears in light blue. If several files
If the total size of the pattern exceeds the exceed the available space, the progress bar
capacity of the original card or if your hoop appears in yellow.
size is 90 × 90 cm (3.54” × 3.54”) and the
Design Page is split into over 80 sections,
the available space appears in yellow on

the progress bar. When is clicked,

the Select Hoop Sections dialog box
appears, allowing you to select the pattern
sections to be written in the available
space on the card. 8. After the embroidery patterns to be written to
the original card appear in the selected
patterns list, click to write the patterns to
the card.
→ The patterns are written to an original
card in the order that they are listed after
all data already on the card is erased.
After the patterns are written to the origi-
nal card, the card containing the patterns
can be used with the embroidery ma-
chine.

a Note:
• Since original cards are erased
completely before patterns are written to
it, it is useful to keep a copy with the
The progress bar at the top of the dialog box contents of each card in the card folder
shows the available space on the card as that comes with the software so that you
you select pattern sections to be written to can easily recover the files that were on
the card. The space used by the selected the card.
pattern sections appears in blue. If, however, • To check the contents of the original card,
you select a pattern section that exceeds the open the Browse dialog box, and then
size limit, the space used appears in yellow, click , which appears at the top of the
and if you select several pattern sections
which exceed the size limit, the space used list in the Browse window. The patterns
appears in red. saved on the inserted card appear in the
available patterns list.
Click each pattern section to select it, and
then click Write to write the selected pattern • Do not remove the card or unplug the USB
sections to the card. To deselect a pattern cable while patterns are being written to
section, simply click it again. (The Write the card (while the LED indicator is
button is available only when a section is flashing).
selected and the space on the card is
sufficient to receive the selected patterns.)
9. Click in the upper-right corner of the

7. Continue until all embroidery patterns that you dialog box to close the dialog box.
want to write to an original card are selected.

198
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 199 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Saving and Printing

Adding comments to saved

.pes files
You can enter comments and information about the
pattern to a saved .pes file.

1. Click File, then Property.

→ The File Property dialog box appears.

Advanced Opreation
Layout & Editing
b Memo:
The stitch count is the total of all stitches.

2. To enter or change the information, type it in.

3. Click OK to save the entered information.

b Memo:
• The entered information will be saved to
the file the next time that it is saved.
• To quit the operation and close the dialog
box, click Cancel.
• Files can be searched for in Design
Database according to the entered
information.

199
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 200 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Saving and Printing

Printing
axes for the data. (This setting is only avail-
Specifying print settings able when Actual Size is selected.)
Print template grid: Select this check box to
Before printing, you may need to change the print print green lines to represent the grid printed
settings for the embroidery pattern files that you on the embroidery sheet included with the
want to print. hoop.
Print hoop section boundaries onto the
1. Click File, then Print Setup.
first page: Select this check box to print the
→ A Print Setup dialog box similar to the pattern sections of a pattern for which the
one shown below appears. Design Page has been set to a custom size
or to a multi-position hoop. The pattern sec-
tions are printed in red.
Divide embroidery image into 2 pages:
Select this check box to print in actual size
and on A4- or Letter-size paper patterns that
are larger than the paper size by dividing
them in two and printing each half on differ-
ent pages. (This setting is only available
when Actual size is selected in the Print
Setup dialog box and when the Design Page
is set to the larger hoop sizes [300 × 200 mm
(11 3/4" × 7 3/4"), 200 × 300 mm (7 3/4" × 11
3/4"), 180 × 300 mm (7" × 11 3/4"), 300 × 180
mm (11 3/4" × 7") when set to Hoop Size,
and 175 × 295 mm (180 × 300 mm) 6.89" ×
11.61" (7" × 11 3/4") or 295 × 195 mm (300 ×
200 mm) 11.61" × 7.68" (11 3/4" × 7 3/4")
2. Under Paper and Orientation, select the when set to Custom Size].) With this split
appropriate settings.
printing feature, / or / is
3. Under Print type, Print Option and Stitch printed in the lower-right corner of the paper
image, select how the data is to be printed. to indicate which half is printed.
Print type Stitch image
Actual Size: Select this option to print the Normal: Select this option to print the pat-
pattern in actual size and the sewing infor- tern as lines and dots.
mation (dimensions of the embroidery, the Realistic: Select this option to print a realis-
sewing color order and the stitch count, the tic image of the pattern. To change the set-
hoop position) on separate pages. If the pat- tings of the realistic image, click Attributes.
tern size is larger than the paper size, de- (For details, refer to “Changing realistic pre-
pending on the Design Page settings, a view settings” on page 187.)
reduced version of the large pattern and the
different pattern sections in actual size are a Note:
printed. • If the Divide embroidery image into 2
Reduced Size: Select this option to print a pages check box is cleared and you print
reduced image together with all of the above- on a larger paper size, the pattern does
mentioned information on a single page for not print in two halves. Likewise, if you
Design Pages set to Hoop Size, and on the print on a smaller paper size, the pattern
same page as the image for each hoop sec- might be cut off.
tion of custom-sized Design Pages. • The stitch and hoop position information is
printed on a separate page, after the
Print option image or pattern section halves.
Print sewing area box & center axes: Se-
lect this check box to print black lines to indi-
cate the sewing area (refer to “Specifying the
Sewing Area” on page 183) and the center

200
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 201 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Saving and Printing

4. Click OK. • To open the Print dialog box, click Print.

• If you need to view an image in detail,
b Memo:
displaying only one page at a time allows
you to enlarge it more.
• To change the printer settings, click If you want to check the sewing
Properties. information for individual objects in your
• To quit the operation, click Cancel. embroidery pattern, select the menu
command Option – Design Property.
c “Previewing the Sewing Image” on
page 187
c “Specifying print settings” on page 200,
“Printing” below and “Checking
Embroidery Pattern Information” on
Checking the print image page 189

You can preview the contents of the Design Page,

including the separate hoop sections of large-size Printing

Advanced Opreation
Layout & Editing
embroidery patterns, and check the sewing color
order, the dimensions and the stitch count before You can print the Design Page together with its
printing. sewing information.

1. Click File, then Print Preview. 1. Click File, then Print.

→ If Actual Size was selected in the Print → A Print dialog box similar to the one
Setup dialog box, the Layout & Editing shown below appears.
window appears as shown below.

b Memo: 2. Select the necessary settings.

• To enlarge and reduce the page, click
Zoom In or Zoom Out. Enlarge the image 3. Click OK to begin printing.
either by clicking Zoom In, or by clicking
directly the location that you want to b Memo:
enlarge. To reduce the size of the image, • To change the printer settings, click
click Zoom Out. Properties.
• To display the following page, click Next • To quit the operation, click Cancel.
Page. (For Design Pages set to Hoop
Size, this button is not available if
Reduced Size was selected in the Print 4. Follow the instructions for the printer to finish
Setup dialog box.) printing.
• To go back to the display of the
embroidery, click Prev Page. (For Design → Depending on the Print Type setting, one
Pages set to Hoop Size, this button is not or two pages will be printed for one pat-
available if Reduced Size was selected in tern or one hoop position.
the Print Setup dialog.)
• To display two pages at the same time,
click Two Page. (The Two Page button
becomes the One Page button.)
• To display one page at a time, click One
Page.

201
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 202 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing

Changing Software Settings

Changing the Settings

Changing the grid settings b Memo:
To close the dialog box without applying the
A grid of dotted lines or solid lines can be displayed changes to the grid, click Cancel.
or hidden, and the spacing for the grid can be
adjusted.
c “Changing the measurement units” below
1. Click Display, then Grid Setup.
→ The Grid Setting dialog box appears. Changing the measurement
units
The measurements for values displayed in the
application can be in either millimeters or inches.

1. Click Option, then Select System Unit, and

then select the desired measurement units
(mm or inch).

2. To display the grid, select the Show Grid

c “Changing the grid settings” on this page
and “Specifying the Design Page” on
check box. page 108.
To hide the grid, clear the Show Grid check
box.

3. To use the grid for aligning patterns or creating

patterns of the same size, select the Snap to
Grid check box.

b Memo:
The pointer will move by the amount set in
Grid interval.
The snap feature works whether or not the
grid is displayed.

4. To set the grid spacing, type or select a value

in the Grid interval box. (The setting range is
0.1 to 25.4 mm (0.04 to 1.0 inch).)

5. To display the grid as solid lines, select the

with Axes check box.
To display the grid as dotted lines, clear the
with Axes check box.

a Note:
When the Show grid check box is selected
and the with Axes check box is cleared,
only the intersecting points of the grid will be
displayed.

6. Click OK to apply the changes and to close the

dialog box.
202
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 203 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing

Information for Optional Large-Size Hoop Users

Creating Patterns for Multi-Position Hoops

This program enables you to create multi-position patterns that you can stitch in any multi-position hoop
attached to your sewing machine.

ABC

a a

Advanced Opreation
Layout & Editing
b b
c c

Example of multi-position hoop: 100 × 172 mm hoop

Although the size of the pattern that can be embroidered using an multi-position hoop is 130 × 180 mm (or 100
× 100 mm, depending on the sewing area of the embroidering machine), first determine which of the three
installation positions (indicated as a, b, and c in the illustration above) the multi-position hoop will be installed
at and determine the orientation of the pattern.

When creating the pattern, each pattern section can only be as large as the sewing field of the machine.

2. Select Hoop Size, and then choose a Design

Selecting the Design Page Page size of 130 × 300 mm, 300 × 130 mm,
100 × 172 mm, or 172 × 100 mm from the
size selector.
1. In Layout & Editing, click Option, then Design
Page Property.
b Memo:
• Settings for multi-position hoops are
→ The Design Page Property dialog box indicated by “*”.
appears. • Choose the appropriate setting after
checking the size of the hoop available for
your machine.

a Note:
Multi-position hoop settings are not available
in the Design Page Property dialog box of
Design Center.

203
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 204 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Information for Optional Large-Size Hoop Users

• Each pattern must completely fit within a

Creating the pattern single area (a, b, or c).
1: The position of this pattern is correct since
1. The Design Page appears on the screen as it fits completely within area a.
shown below. 2: The position of this pattern is correct since
it fits completely within either area b or
area c.
a 3: The size of this pattern is acceptable, but
its position must be corrected since it
does not fit completely within any of the
areas.
4: This pattern must be corrected since it is
too large.
b
a Note:
If a pattern does not meet the conditions
mentioned above, a warning will appear
when continuing to the next step.
c

Optimizing hoop changes

b Memo: With the Optimize hoop change function, the sewing
Area a: Embroidering area when the multi- order of patterns in a Design Page for multi-position
position hoop is installed at the top hoops is automatically optimized, therefore
installation position. reducing the risk of the embroidery being sewn
Area b: Embroidering area when the multi-
incorrectly or the fabric not feeding evenly when the
position hoop is installed at the middle
installation position. hoop position is changed too often.
Area c: Embroidering area when the multi-
position hoop is installed at the bottom
1. Click Sew, then Optimize hoop change.
installation position.
The dotted lines separate each area. b Memo:
• A check mark appears when this function
is turned on; no check mark is displayed
2. Create the pattern, making sure that it meets when this function is turned off.
the following conditions.
• The size of one pattern must be no larger
than 100 × 100 mm (or 130 × 180 mm).
5 a
(If the pattern is imported from Design
Center, only these size settings are
available.)
3 1

a
b
2
1 4

b
4
2 3 6 c

204
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 205 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Information for Optional Large-Size Hoop Users

• When the Optimize hoop change function

is selected, the sewing order that you have
set is optimized to reduce the number of
Checking the pattern
times that the hoop installation position is
changed. a Note:
For the example shown on page 204, the Make sure that no pattern has been selected
sewing order is: a (pattern 1) → b (pattern before clicking this command. If a pattern
2) → a (patterns 3 & 5) → c (patterns 4 & 6) has already been selected, only the
If the Optimize hoop change function is not information for that pattern is displayed.
selected, each pattern is sewn according
to the sewing order that you have set.
Therefore, since the number of times for 1. Click Option, then Design Property.
changing the hoop installation position is
→ At the same time that the Design Proper-
not optimized, it may be changed more
often than if it was optimized. ty dialog box appears, the Design Page is
For the example shown on page 204, the automatically enlarged or reduced to fit in
sewing order is: a (pattern 1) → b (pattern the entire window.

Advanced Opreation
Layout & Editing
2) → a (pattern 3) → c (pattern 4) → a
(pattern 5) → c (pattern 6)

a Note:
Since the pattern may not be sewn correctly
or the fabric may not feed evenly if the hoop
installation position is changed too often, we
recommend selecting the Optimize hoop
change function. Selecting this function will
change the sewing order that you have set,
therefore, check the sewing order before you
begin embroidering.

b Memo:
• The first line of the dialog box shows the
position in the hoop installation order for
the currently displayed pattern.
• Only the patterns that would be sewn at
the current position in the hoop installation
order appear in the Design Page, and the
embroidering area for the current hoop
position is outlined in red.
• To display information for patterns at other
positions in the hoop installation order,
click Previous or Next. At this time, the
corresponding pattern and hoop position
appear in the Design Page.

205
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 206 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Information for Optional Large-Size Hoop Users

pattern is saved as a combination of multiple

a Note: patterns.
• If pattern is larger than the embroidery
area or if a pattern is positioned so that it
does not completely fit within an
embroidery area, the error message
“Please change the object size or
position.” appears instead of this dialog
box. After the pattern causing the error is
displayed selected, change its size or
position. (If more than one pattern causes
the error message to appear, they will be
displayed in the sewing order.)

2. To preview the image, click Display, then

Preview, or click on the Toolbar.

Saving the pattern

1. Click File, then Save or Save As, and then
save the pattern. If the pattern shown above is written to an
original card and the written pattern is
→ The entire pattern is saved as a single file checked on the embroidery machine, it
(.pes). appears as shown below.

b Memo:
If the file size or the number of color changes
is larger than the specified number, or if one
of the patterns does not completely fit within
an embroidery area, the message “Please
change the object size or position. Do you
want to save the data anyway?” appears.
: This pattern is sewn when the hoop is
installed at the top installation position
(position a).
a Note:
: This pattern is sewn when the hoop is
• The saved file cannot be opened in Layout
& Editing versions 1 and 2.0x. installed at the middle installation position
(position b).
: This pattern is sewn when the hoop is
Writing the pattern to an installed at the bottom installation position
(position c).
original card Therefore, the frame installation position
sewing order for the pattern shown above is b,
1. If your pattern is displayed in the Design Page, a, then c.
click File, then Write to Card, or click on 2. After the embroidery pattern is saved on the
the Toolbar, and then write the pattern to an computer, click File, then Write to Card, then
original card. Other PES files to write the embroidery
pattern to an original card.
A pattern for a multi-position hoop is created
by considering the pattern in each hoop As with the Current Design command, all
installation position as one pattern, then embroidery patterns are written to the original
combining them. card at the same time.
Therefore, when this type of pattern is written Furthermore, if there is space on the original
to an original card, one multi-position hoop card, other embroidery patterns can be written
to it at the same time.

206
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 207 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing Information for Optional Large-Size Hoop Users

Notes on embroidering using the multi-

position hoop Printing a Design Page for a
• Before embroidering your project, sew a trial multi-position hoop
sample of the pattern on a scrap piece of
fabric from your project, making sure to use If a Design Page for a multi-position hoop is
the same needle and thread. selected, a complete image of the Design Page is
printed on the first page, followed by an image of
• Be sure to affix stabilizer material to the back
each pattern section and its sewing information
of the fabric and tightly stretch the fabric
(dimensions of the embroidery, the hoop position,
within the hoop. When embroidering on thin
the sewing color order and the stitch count), so the
or stretch fabrics, use two layers of stabilizer
number of pages depends on your pattern.
material. If no stabilizer material is used, the
fabric may become over-stretched or • If a 130 × 300 mm or 300 × 130 mm Design
wrinkled or the embroidery may not be sewn Page is selected, the pattern is divided into
correctly. sections of 130 × 180 mm or 180 × 130 mm

Advanced Opreation
Layout & Editing
with each section printed on a separate
• See page 63 “Attaching stabilizer to the
page.
fabric” for more ways to stabilize large
designs. • If a 100 × 172 mm or 172 × 100 mm Design
Page is selected, the pattern is divided into
• Use the zigzag stitch for sewing the outlines
sections of 100 × 100 mm with each section
in order to prevent embroidering outside the
printed on a separate page.
outlines.
The Design Page is printed as described below.
When Actual Size is selected:
On the first page, the entire Design Page is print-
ed at actual size. (However, for a 130 × 300 mm
or 300 × 130 mm Design Page, a reduced image
of the Design Page is printed.) Afterwards, the
pattern in each section of the Design Page is
printed, starting with that sewn with the first hoop
• For patterns that require the hoop to be installation position, and is followed by the sew-
installed at different installation positions, ing information for that pattern on separate pag-
design the embroidery pattern so that the es.
various parts of the pattern overlap in order
When Reduced Size is selected:
to prevent misalignment while embroidering.
On the first page, the entire Design Page is print-
ed at actual size. (However, for a 130 × 300 mm
or 300 × 130 mm Design Page, a reduced image
of the Design Page is printed.) Afterwards, the
pattern in each section of the Design Page is
printed, starting with that sewn with the first hoop
installation position, on the same page as the
sewing information for that pattern.

b Memo:
When the menu command File – Print
Preview is selected, each section of the
pattern is displayed as described above.

207
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 208 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Programmable Stitch Creator

Programmable Stitch Creator allows you to design your own fill/stamp and motif stitch patterns that can be
applied to a programmable fill stitch or motif stitch, both in Design Center and Layout & Editing. When applied
to enclosed regions, the fill/stamp or motif stitch pattern fills the region in a tile-like manner, resulting in more
decorative embroidery patterns. In addition, the fill/stamp stitch patterns can be applied as an individual stamp
to enclosed regions in Design Center and Layout & Editing. You can create your own fill/stamp and motif stitch
patterns or use the many stitch patterns provided with this application, with or without editing them.

Main Window
1 0
2
9
3
8
4

1 Title bar 5 Status bar

2 Menu bar Provides helpful information.
Provides access to the functions. 6 Preview window
3 Toolbar Shows how the stitch pattern will be sewn.
Provides shortcuts for the menu commands. 7 Work area
4 Tool Box 8 Minimize button
Used to select and create fill and motif stitch pat- 9 Maximize button
terns and stamps.
(The bottom four buttons do not appear in Motif 0 Close button
mode.)

208
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 209 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Programmable Stitch Creator

Opening a Pattern File

2. Select the drive and the folder.
Creating a new pattern
You can begin with a blank work area in order to
b Memo:
• If the Preview check box is selected, the
design a new stitch pattern.
contents of the selected file will appear in
the Preview box.
Toolbar button: • To quit the operation and close the dialog
box, click Cancel.
1. Click , or click File, then New.

→ If the current work area has already been a Note:

saved or has not been edited, a new work To open a fill/stamp stitch pattern, be sure to
area appears immediately. select a folder that contains .pas file. To
open a motif stitch pattern, be sure to select
→ If the current work area has not been
a folder that contains .pmf files.
saved, you will be asked whether you
want to save the changes.
3. To view the contents of the .pas and .pmf files
in the currently selected folder, click Browse.

Advanced Opreation
Programmable
Stitch Creator
→ A Browse dialog box similar to the one
shown below appears.

b Memo:
• To save the work area, click Yes.
• To abandon the work area, click No.
• To return to the work area, for example, to
modify it or save it with another file name,
click Cancel.

c “Opening a pattern file” on this page,

“Overwriting” on page 221 and “Saving
with a new name” on page 221

Opening a pattern file b Memo:

• To return to the Open dialog box, click
A previously saved programmable stitch file can be Cancel.
opened to be edited. • A green arrow through the middle of the
stitch pattern indicates motif stitch patterns
(.pmf). Otherwise, the data is a fill/stamp
Toolbar button: stitch pattern (.pas).
• Stamps are identified by the red-
1. Click , or click File, then Open. (engraving effect sewn with the fill stitch)
and blue-filled areas (embossing effect
→ An Open dialog box similar to the one sewn with satin stitching).
shown below appears.
4. To open a file, select it, and then click Open,
or double-click the file’s icon.
→ If the current work area has already been
saved or has not been edited, the con-
tents of the selected file immediately ap-
pear in the work area.

209
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 210 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Programmable Stitch Creator

→ An Open template file dialog box similar

b Memo: to the one shown below appears.
The mode will automatically change to match
that of the selected pattern (Fill/Stamp for
.pas files or Motif for .pmf files).

→ If the current work area has not been

saved, you will be asked whether you
want to save the changes.

2. Select the drive, the folder and the desired file.

b Memo:
If the Preview check box is selected, the
contents of the selected file will appear in the
b Memo: Preview box.
• To save the work area, click Yes.
• To abandon the work area, click No.
3. Click Open to open the file.
• To return to the work area, for example, to
modify it or save it with another file name, → The image fills the work area.
click Cancel.
b Memo:
c “Creating a new pattern” on page 209,
“Overwriting” on page 221 and “Saving
• Double-clicking the file name also opens
the file and closes the dialog box.
with a new name” on page 221 • To quit the operation, click Cancel.
• To display, hide, or display a faded copy of
the image that remains in the work area,
Opening an image in the click Image, then Display Image, and
then click the desired display setting.
background • To display the original image, click
On.
You can open a background image that can be used
• To display a faded copy of the image,
as a guide to draw a new fill/stamp and motif stitch click Faded.
pattern. The file name extension must be one of the • To hide the original image, click Off.
following: Windows bitmap (.bmp), Exif (.tif, .jpg),
ZsoftPCX (.pcx), Windows Meta File (.wmf),
Portable Network Graphics (.png), Encapsulated
PostScript (.eps), Kodak PhotoCD (.pcd), FlashPix
a Note:
• With .pcd and .fpx files containing many
(.fpx), JPEG2000 (.j2k).
pages, only the first page can be opened.
1. Click File, then Template Open. Tiff files with LZW compression cannot be
opened.
• Only one image can be added to the work
area. If you try to display a different image,
it will replace the previous one.

Selecting a Pattern To Be Created

You can use Programmable Stitch Creator to create patterns for programmable fill stitches, stamps, motif fill
stitches, motif line stitches. The method and work area are slightly different for each. Use the commands on
the Mode menu to select the type of pattern that you want to create.

1. To enter Fill/Stamp mode, click Mode, then → If the current work area has already been
Fill/Stamp. saved or has not been edited, a blank
To enter Motif mode, click Mode, then Motif. work area immediately appears in the se-
lected mode.

210
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 211 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Programmable Stitch Creator

→ If the current work area has not been ■ Motif mode

saved, you will be asked whether you
In Motif mode, you can create original stitch patterns
want to save the changes.
by changing the shape of a single line. These stitch
patterns can be applied in line sewing and region
sewing in Layout & Editing, and region sewing in
Design Center.
A green arrow appears at the center of the work
area, showing the direction that the pattern (stitch)
will be sewn.
b Memo:
A single pink line appears along with the green
• To save the work area, click Yes.
arrow. This line indicates the base for the motif
• To abandon the work area, click No.
• To return to the work area, for example, to stitch, which can be altered by inserting points with
modify it or save it with another file name, the Edit Point tool, and then moving them to form
click Cancel. original designs.
The blue square at the left edge of the work area
indicates the start point of that line and the red
■ Fill/Stamp mode square at the right edge indicates the end point of
In Fill/Stamp mode, you can make a stitch pattern the stitch.
out of a single line or sets of lines, and you can then The start and end points cannot be deleted, and
choose to fill the areas enclosed by the lines to they must be aligned vertically. Therefore, if you

Advanced Opreation
Programmable
Stitch Creator
create an embossing/engraving effect. Both types of move one point up or down, the other point will
stitch patterns can be set as a programmable fill automatically move in the same direction.
stitch in addition to being applied as individual
stamps to regions of patterns in Design Center as
well as Layout & Editing.
The Line tool in the Tool Box allows you to draw the
lines of a fill stitch pattern or a stamp, and the
Region (engrave), the Region (emboss) and the
Region (reset) tools allow you to fill and edit the
enclosed areas of the stitch or stamp that you draw.
The sewing method for a programmable fill stitch is
different from the regular fill stitch, where the thread
is constantly sewn in a set direction. Instead, the
pattern will be sewn in such a way that the needle
drops directly over the created pattern. Example of a pattern Region sewing
Line sewing

Example of a pattern

211
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 212 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Programmable Stitch Creator

Viewing the Stitch Pattern While Creating It

You can display the Preview window to view a repeating image of the stitch pattern as you create it.

1. If the Preview window isn’t displayed, click

Display, then Preview.
The Preview window for the selected Mode
setting appears, as shown in the examples
below, and a check mark appears to the left of Motif mode
the menu command Display – Preview.
The image in the Preview window is updated
as you enter the changes in the work area.

2. To close the Preview window, click its close

button, or click the menu command Display –
Preview to remove the check mark.

b Memo:
• The Preview window can be resized.
• The setting for displaying the Preview
window is retained, until it is changed.
Fill/Stamp mode

Drawing a Stitch Pattern in Fill/Stamp

Mode
The Line tool allows you to draw broken lines to create your fill/stamp stitch pattern. A broken line is made of
one or more connected straight lines with the end point of one straight line being the start point of the next line.
The horizontal and vertical lines that you draw on the work area always follow the grid. The points that you
create by clicking the mouse button are inserted at the intersection of the horizontal and vertical lines of the
grid, enabling you to draw diagonal lines as well. Regardless of where you click, a point will automatically be
inserted at the nearest intersection.
Depending on the stitch pattern that you want to draw, you may need to select a grid of a different size. In
addition, by selecting None, the point will no longer be inserted at the nearest intersection, allowing you to
create curved patterns. For details on the grids and adjusting them, refer to “Changing the grid settings” on
page 222.

2. Click in the work area to specify the start point.

1. Click on the Tool Box.

→ When the pointer is moved over the work

area, the shape of the pointer changes to

a Note:
This tool can only be used in Fill/Stamp
mode.

212
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 213 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Programmable Stitch Creator

3. Click in the work area to specify the next point. 4. Continue clicking to specify every point, and
then double-click the last point.

b Memo:
To remove the last point that was entered,
5. Repeat the entire procedure until the fill/stamp
click the right mouse button. stitch pattern is completed.

Editing a Stitch Pattern in Fill/Stamp

Advanced Opreation
Mode

Programmable
Stitch Creator
3. To select an additional pattern, hold down the
Selecting patterns Ctrl key and click the other pattern.

1. Click on the Tool Box. b Memo:

• You can also select patterns by dragging
→ The shape of the pointer changes to the pointer across the pattern that you
want to select. As you drag the pointer, a
. selection frame is drawn. All patterns that
are contained in that selection frame are
2. Click the pattern that you want to select. selected when the mouse button is
released.
→ Handles appear around the pattern to show • If you selected patterns that you did not
that it is selected. want, click a blank area of the work area to
deselect all patterns, and start again.

■ Selecting all patterns

1. Make sure that on the Tool Box is

selected.

2. Click Edit, then Select All.

a Note:
A pattern will not be selected if you do not
click one of its lines.
Moving patterns
b Memo: 1. Move the pointer over a selected pattern or
To deselect the pattern, select a different group of selected patterns.
one, click a blank area of the work area, or → The shape of the pointer changes to
click a button in the Tool Box other than
.
.

213
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 214 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Programmable Stitch Creator

2. Drag the pattern to the desired location. → The selected patterns are removed from
the work area.
b Memo:
• To move the pattern horizontally or b Memo:
Since the removed patterns are saved on the
vertically, hold down the Shift key while
Clipboard, you can paste them back using
dragging it.
the menu command Edit – Paste.
• Pressing the arrow keys moves the
selected pattern one grid mark in the
direction of the arrow on the key. If the grid
is not displayed, the pattern moves a
c “Copying patterns” on this page, “Pasting
a cut or copied pattern” on this page and
distance smaller than the smallest grid “Deleting patterns” on this page
interval in the direction of the arrow on the
key.
Copying patterns
Selected pattern(s) can be saved on the Clipboard
Scaling patterns without being removed from the work area.

1. Move the pointer over one of the handles of a Toolbar button:

selected pattern or group of patterns.
1. Select one or more patterns.
→ The shape of the pointer changes to
, , or , depending on 2. Click , or click Edit, then Copy.
the handle that the pointer is over.
→ The selected patterns are copied onto the
b Memo:
Clipboard and are ready to be pasted.

• is for scaling the width. c “Cutting out patterns” on this page,

“Duplicating patterns” on this page and
• is for scaling the height. “Pasting a cut or copied pattern” on this
page
• and are for scaling both
dimensions at the same time.
Duplicating patterns
2. Drag the handle to adjust the selected A copy of the selected pattern(s) can be added to
pattern(s) to the desired size. the work area.

1. Select one or more patterns.

Deleting patterns 2. Click Edit, then Duplicate.

1. Select the pattern to be deleted. → A copy of the pattern(s) are added to the
work area.
2. Press the Delete key, or click Edit, then
c “Copying patterns” on this page and
Delete. “Pasting a cut or copied pattern” on this
page

Cutting out patterns

Pasting a cut or copied pattern
Selected pattern(s) can be removed from the screen
while saving a copy in the Clipboard. The patterns on the Clipboard can be pasted into
the work area.
Toolbar button:
Toolbar button:
1. Select one or more patterns.
1. Click , or click Edit, then Paste.
2. Click , or click Edit, then Cut.

214
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 215 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Programmable Stitch Creator

→ The patterns saved on the Clipboard (us-

ing the Cut or Copy command) are past- Rotating patterns
ed into the work area.
You can manually rotate the selected pattern(s) by
c “Cutting out patterns” on page 214,
“Copying patterns” on page 214 and
an arbitrary angle.
“Duplicating patterns” on page 214
Toolbar button:
1. Select one or more patterns.
Flipping patterns vertically
You can flip the selected pattern(s) vertically (up/
down).

Toolbar button:
1. Select one or more patterns.
2. Click , or click Edit, then Rotate.
2. Click , or click Edit, then Mirror, then
→ The handles around the selected pattern
Horizontal. are replaced by empty squares at the four
→ The selected pattern(s) are replaced by corners of the selected pattern.

Advanced Opreation
Programmable
their horizontal mirror image (top and bot-

Stitch Creator
tom inverted).

b Memo:
To restore the image to its original
orientation, select the menu command Edit –
Mirror – Horizontal again.
3. Move the pointer over one of the four rotation
handles.
c “Flipping patterns horizontally” on this
page and “Rotating patterns” on this page → When the pointer is moved over a rotation
handle, the shape of the pointer changes

to .
Flipping patterns horizontally
You can flip the selected pattern(s) horizontally (left/
right).

Toolbar button:
1. Select one or more patterns.
4. Drag the rotation handle clockwise or
counterclockwise to rotate the pattern to the
2. Click , or click Edit, then Mirror, then
desired angle.
Vertical.
→ The selected pattern(s) are replaced by
their vertical mirror image (left and right
inverted).

b Memo:
To restore the image to its original
orientation, select the menu command Edit – b Memo:
Mirror – Vertical again. • Simply dragging the pointer rotates the
pattern in 1° increments.
• To rotate the pattern in 15° increments,
c “Flipping patterns vertically” on this page
and “Rotating patterns” on this page hold down the Shift key while dragging
the rotation handle.

215
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 216 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Programmable Stitch Creator

Editing Points in Fill/Stamp Mode

The points that you move or insert are positioned at the intersection of the horizontal and vertical lines of the
grid. Regardless of where you drag a point to or insert a point on the line, it will automatically be positioned at
the nearest intersection.
Depending on the stitch that you want to create, you may need to select a grid of a different size. For details
on the grids and adjusting them, refer to “Changing the grid settings” on page 222.

4. Drag the point to the new location.

Moving points → All of the selected points move in the
same direction.
1. Click on the Tool Box.
bMemo:
→ The shape of the pointer changes to • To move the point horizontally or vertically,
hold down the Shift key while dragging
.
it.
• Pressing the arrow keys moves the
2. Click the broken line that you want to edit. selected point one grid mark in the
→ The points in the broken line appear as direction of the arrow on the key. If the grid
is not displayed, the point moves a
small empty squares.
distance smaller than the smallest grid
interval in the direction of the arrow on the
key.

Inserting points
1. Click on the Tool Box.

→ The shape of the pointer changes to

.
b Memo:
You can only select one broken line at a time. 2. Click the broken line that you want to edit.
→ The points in the broken line appear as
3. Click the point that you want to move. small empty squares.
→ The selected point appears as a small
black square. b Memo:
You can only select one broken line at a time.
bMemo:
• To select additional points, hold down the 3. Click the line to add a new point.
Ctrl key and click each point, or drag
the pointer over the points that you want to → A new point appears selected (as a small
select. black square).
• To select the previous (or next) point in the
line, hold down the Ctrl key and press
the → (or ←) key.

a Note:
If you click the line of the pattern instead of a
point, a new point is inserted.

216
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 217 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Programmable Stitch Creator

3. Click the point that you want to delete.

Deleting points → The selected point appears as a small
black square.
1. Click on the Tool Box.
bMemo:
→ When the pointer is moved over the work To select additional points, hold down the
area, the shape of the pointer changes to Ctrl key and click each point, or drag the
pointer over the points that you want to
. select.

2. Click the broken line that you want to edit.

4. Click Edit, then Delete, or press the
b Memo: Delete key to remove the point.
You can only select one broken line at a time.
bMemo:
→ The points in the broken line appear as If a line is composed of two points and you
small empty squares. delete one of them, the entire line is deleted.

Creating a Stamp

Advanced Opreation
Programmable
Stitch Creator
Stamps are composed of line stitches that, when they form enclosed areas or regions, the regions can be filled
with different types of stitching in order to create a pattern with an embossing/engraving effect. Stamps can be
applied to regions of patterns with the Stamp tool, and they can be used as a fill pattern for a programmable
fill stitch in both Design Center and Layout & Editing. In Layout & Editing, the regions of patterns where stamps
can be applied are those created with the Circle or Arc, Rectangle, Outline, Text or Manual Punch tools.

1. Open an existing fill/stamp pattern file (.pas → The shape of the pointer changes to .
file) or draw a new stitch pattern with the Line
tool in the Fill/Stamp mode.
3. Click each region where you want to apply the
engraving setting.

a Note: → The regions appear in red, which is the

color for the tool.
In order to apply the stamp settings
(embossing/engraving effects), make sure
that the lines of the stitch pattern form an
enclosed area.
The edge of the work area does enclose
regions. In order to use the edge of the work
area as a limit for regions, lines must be
drawn over it first.

b Memo:
This type of region will be sewn with the fill
stitch set to a pitch of 2.0 mm (0.16 in) and a
frequency of 30%, and the needle drop point
will be set on the outline.

4. To create an embossing effect, click

2. To create an engraving effect, click
(Region (emboss)).
(Region (engrave)). → The shape of the pointer changes to .

217
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 218 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Programmable Stitch Creator

5. Click each region where you want to apply the → The shape of the pointer changes to .
embossing setting.
7. Click each region where you want to remove
→ The regions appear in blue, which is the the engraving or embossing setting.
color for the tool, and will be sewn with
→ The region appears in white, which is the
stitching that appears like satin stitching.
color for the tool, and will be sewn in the
direction set for the base stitch.

a Note:
• If you edit stitch lines after a region has been
filled, make sure that the lines still form a
region, otherwise the embossing/engraving
effects are canceled.
• Stamp files cannot be used with versions of
the software earlier than version 6, but .pas
files created with an earlier version can be
used as a base to create stamp files.
6. To remove the stamp effect applied to a

region, click (Region (reset)).

Creating a Stitch Pattern in Motif Mode

In Motif mode, stitch patterns are created by inserting points on the base line of the motif stitch, then moving
them in order to change the shape of the stitch and give it the look of a single-stroke drawing.
The points you move or insert are positioned at the intersection of the horizontal and vertical lines of the grid.
Regardless of where you drag a point to or insert a point on the line, it will automatically be positioned at the
nearest intersection.
Depending on the stitch you want to create, you may need to select a grid of a different size. For details on the
grids and adjusting them, refer to “Changing the grid settings” on page 222.

3. Drag the point that you want to move to a new

1. Click on the Tool Box.
position.
→ The shape of the pointer changes to → The stitch line moves with the newly cre-
ated point.
.

bMemo:
The Point Edit tool is selected automatically
when Motif mode is entered.

2. Click the base line between the start point

(blue square) and end point (red square).
→ A new point appears selected (as a small
black square). The new point can be edit-
ed.

218
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 219 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Programmable Stitch Creator

4. Repeat steps 2. and 3. until the motif stitch

b Memo:
pattern is completed.
• To move the point horizontally or vertically,
hold down the Shift key while dragging
it.
bMemo:
• If you move the start point (blue square) or
• Pressing the arrow keys moves the the end point (red square), the other point
selected point one grid mark in the will automatically move in the same
direction of the arrow on the key. If the grid direction.
is not displayed, the pattern moves a
• The start and end points cannot be moved
distance smaller than the smallest grid
closer together than a certain fixed
interval in the direction of the arrow on the
distance.
key.
• To delete a selected point, press the
Delete key.

Editing a Stitch Pattern in Motif Mode

After creating a stitch pattern, or after opening an existing motif file, you may want to change its shape or
position. To do so, you can proceed in the same way as described above, but in addition, you can select and
move or delete several points at the same time.

Advanced Opreation
Programmable
Stitch Creator
3. To move the point(s), drag them to the desired
Moving and deleting location.
several points at a time → All of the selected points move in the
same direction.

1. Click on the Tool Box. 4. To delete the selected points, press the

→ The shape of the pointer changes to Delete key.

→ All of the selected points are deleted.
.

a Note:
bMemo: The start point (blue square) and end point
The Point Edit tool is selected automatically (red square) can not be deleted.
when Motif mode is entered.

2. Click the base line between the start point

(blue square) and end point (red square).
→ The selected point appears as a small
black square.

bMemo:
• To select additional points, hold down the
Ctrl key and click each point, or drag
the pointer over the points that you want to
select.
• To select the previous (or next) point in the
line, hold down the Ctrl key and press
the → (or ←) key.

a Note:
If you click the line of the pattern instead of a
point, a new point is inserted.

219
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 220 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Programmable Stitch Creator

Scaling patterns Flipping a pattern

horizontally or vertically
1. Click on the Tool Box.
You can flip selected patterns horizontally (up/
→ The motif stitch is selected. down) or vertically (left/right).

2. Move the pointer over one of the handles of 1. Click on the Tool Box.
the pattern.
→ The shape of the pointer changes to
→ The motif stitch is selected, and and
, , or , depending on
the handle that the pointer is over. are available in the Toolbar.

b Memo: 2. To replace the stitch pattern by its horizontal

mirror image (top and bottom inverted), select
• is for scaling the width.
Edit, then Mirror, then Horizontal, or click
• is for scaling the height.
in the Toolbar.
• and are for scaling both
To replace the stitch pattern by its vertical
dimensions at the same time. mirror image (left and right inverted), select

3. Drag the handle to adjust the selected Edit, then Mirror, then Vertical, or click
pattern(s) to the desired size. in the Toolbar.

b Memo:
To restore the image to its original
orientation, select the same menu command
again, or select the menu command Edit –
Undo.

220
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 221 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Programmable Stitch Creator

Saving
3. Click Save to save the pattern.
Overwriting
Once the stitch pattern has been saved, changes
b Memo:
• To quit the operation, click Cancel.
can easily be saved so that the latest version can be
• If a file already exists with the name
retrieved later. specified in the Save As dialog box, the
following message appears.
Toolbar button:

1. Click , or click File, then Save.

→ If the pattern has already been saved at

least once, the file is saved immediately.
• To overwrite the file, click Yes.
→ If no file name has been specified or if the
• If you do not want to overwrite the
file cannot be found, the Save As dialog existing file, click No. You can then
box appears. enter a different file name.
c “Saving with a new name” on this page
c

Advanced Opreation
“Overwriting” on this page

Programmable
Stitch Creator
Saving with a new name a Note:
The current file can be saved with a different file Stamp files cannot be used with versions of
name in order to keep the original unchanged or to the software earlier than version 6, but .pas
keep various versions of the same image or pattern. files created with an earlier version can be
The files are saved as.pas files in Fill/Stamp mode, used as a base to create stamp files.
and as .pmf files in Motif mode.

1. Click File, then Save As.

→ A Save As dialog box similar to the one
shown below appears.

2. Select the drive and the folder, and then type

in the file name.

b Memo:
The correct extension is automatically
selected.

221
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 222 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Programmable Stitch Creator

Changing the Settings

Changing the display of the Example 1: Wide grid

background image
The template image that remains in the work area
can be displayed or hidden, or a faded copy of the
image can be displayed.

1. Click Display, then Template, and then select

the desired setting.
To display the template image, click On.
To display a faded copy of the image, click
Faded.
Example 2: Medium grid
To hide the template image, click Off.

b Memo:
• This function is not available if no template
image has been imported into the work
area.
• Press the shortcut key ( F6 ) to switch
between displaying the image to
displaying it faded to hiding the image.

c “Opening an image in the background” on

page 210
Example 3: Narrow grid
Changing the grid settings
The line spacing in the grid displayed in the work
area can be adjusted.

1. Click Display, then Grid.

→ A submenu showing the current grid set-
ting appears.

2. Click the grid setting that you need for the

stitch pattern that you are creating or editing.
To select a grid interval of 1/8 of a work area’s The horizontal and vertical lines that you draw in the
edge, click Wide. work area always follow the grid. The points you
To select a grid interval of 1/16 of a work create by clicking in the work area are inserted at the
area’s edge, click Medium. intersection of the horizontal and vertical lines of the
grid, enabling you to draw diagonal lines as well.
To select a grid interval of 1/32 of a work Regardless of where you click, a point will
area’s edge, click Narrow. automatically be inserted at the nearest intersection.
To hide the grid, click None. Select a different grid size according to the type of
stitch that you want to draw. Select a narrower grid
b Memo: for drawing finer details or to give a curved or
• You can also change the grid setting while circular appearance to your stitch lines, and select a
you are working on a stitch pattern. wider grid if you want to draw a simpler stitch
• The setting for the grid setting is retained, pattern. Select None to turn off the snap to grid
until it is changed. feature, allowing you to create curved patterns.

222
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 223 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Database

Design Database is used to organize the embroidery pattern files on your computer so that you can easily
preview and search for the desired pattern. In addition, embroidery patterns can be opened with or imported
into Layout & Editing or converted into other file formats (.pes, .dst., .exp., .pcs or .hus). Images of the
embroidery patterns in a selected folder can be printed or outputted as an HTML file for quick reference. The
sewing information for the embroidery patterns in a selected folder can be outputted as a CSV file (the data in
each category is separated with a comma) for use in other database applications, such as Microsoft Excel.

Main Window
1
2
3

4 5

Advanced Opreation
1 Title bar Design Database

2 Menu bar
Gives access to the functions.
3 Toolbar
Provides shortcuts for the menu commands.
4 Folder pane
Provides access to the folders on the computer
and the results of any searches that were per-
formed.
5 Contents pane
Displays thumbnails of all embroidery patterns in
the selected folder.

223
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 224 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Database

Starting Up Design Database

1. Click , select All Programs, then 2. Click a folder in the folder pane.
PE-DESIGN Ver 6. Select Design Database → All embroidery files in the folder are dis-
to open the Design Database window. played in the contents pane.

b Memo:
If a shortcut for Design Database was
created, for example, on the desktop,
double-click it to start up the application.

→ The Design Database window appears.

b Memo:
b Memo: Only .pes, .dst, .exp, .pcs, .hus and .phc files
To fill the entire screen with the Design are displayed.
Database window, click the maximize button
on the right end of the title bar.

Organizing Embroidery Patterns

You can move your embroidery patterns to different folders in order to organize them. In addition, you can
choose to display the embroidery patterns by thumbnails or by the pattern details.

Creating new folders Moving/copying embroidery

New folders can be created in order to better patterns to a different folder
organize the embroidery patterns.
From Design Database, embroidery patterns can
1. In the folder pane, select the folder where you easily be moved from one folder to another.
want to create a new folder. 1. In the folder pane, display the folder where
2. Click File, then Create New Folder. you want to move the embroidery pattern.

→ A new folder appears as a sub-folder of 2. In the folder pane, click the folder that contains
the one that was selected. the embroidery pattern that you want to move.

3. Drag the embroidery pattern in the contents

pane to the desired folder in the folder pane.

3. Type in the name of the new folder, and then

press the Enter key.
→ The name of the folder changes to the one
that was typed in.
224
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 225 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Database

→ If the two folders are on the same drive, → The name of the embroidery pattern is
the selected embroidery pattern is moved highlighted.
to the other folder.
→ If the two folders are on separate drives,
the selected embroidery pattern is copied
into the other folder.

b Memo:
• To copy the file from one folder to another
on the same drive, hold down the Ctrl
key while dragging the embroidery pattern.
• To move the file from one folder to another
on different drives, hold down the Shift 4. Type in the new name of the embroidery
key while dragging the embroidery pattern.
pattern, and then press the Enter key.
• The file can also be removed from the
current folder (or copied) by selecting the
menu command Edit – Cut (or Edit – b Memo:
Copy).Then, the file can be added to the The file extension cannot be changed.
new folder by selecting it in the folder
pane, then selecting the menu command
Edit – Paste.
Deleting an embroidery
pattern
Changing the name of the From Design Database, embroidery patterns can
embroidery pattern easily be deleted.

From Design Database, the names of embroidery 1. In the folder pane, select the folder containing

Advanced Opreation
Design Database
patterns can easily be changed. the embroidery pattern that you want to
delete.
a Note: 2. In the contents pane, select the name of the
The names of embroidery patterns can be
embroidery pattern that you want to delete.
changed from Design Database only when
the sewing information (menu command
Display – Details) is displayed. (Refer to 3. Press the Delete key.
“Changing the contents pane display” on this → The file is moved to the Recycle Bin.
page.)
b Memo:
1. In the folder pane, select the folder containing • You can also delete embroidery pattern by
the embroidery pattern that you want to using the menu command File – Delete.
rename. • To immediately remove the file without first
moving it to the Recycle Bin, hold down the
2. In the contents pane, select the embroidery Shift key before pressing the Delete
pattern that you want to rename. key.
→ The embroidery pattern is highlighted.

3. Click the name of the embroidery pattern that

you want to rename.

225
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 226 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Database

Changing the contents pane b Memo:

You can also display the sewing information
display
for the embroidery patterns by clicking
The embroidery patterns in the contents pane can
be displayed as large thumbnails or small in the Toolbar.
thumbnails, or they can be listed by their sewing
information.

1. Click Display, and then click the display

setting from the menu that appeared.
To display the embroidery patterns as large
images, click Large Thumbnails.

b Memo:
You can also display the embroidery patterns

as large thumbnails by clicking in the

Toolbar.

To display the embroidery patterns as small

images, click Small Thumbnails.

b Memo:
You can also display the embroidery patterns

as small thumbnails by clicking in the

Toolbar.

To display the sewing information for the

embroidery patterns, click Details.

226
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 227 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Database

Opening Embroidery Patterns

Opening embroidery patterns b Memo:
• To save the work area, click Yes.
with Layout & Editing • To abandon the work area, click No.
• To return to the work area, for example, to
You can easily open any selected .pes file with modify it or save it with another file name,
Layout & Editing. click Cancel.
1. In the folder pane, select the folder containing
the embroidery pattern that you want to open c “Overwriting” on page 194 and “Saving
with a new name” on page 194
in Layout & Editing.

2. In the contents pane, select the embroidery

pattern that you want to open. Importing embroidery
patterns into Layout & Editing
a Note:
Be sure to select a folder that contains .pes You can easily import any selected embroidery
files. pattern into Layout & Editing.

1. In the folder pane, select the folder containing

3. Click File, then Open in Layout & Editing. the embroidery pattern that you want to import
into Layout & Editing.
b Memo:
Double-clicking the file name also opens the 2. In the contents pane, select the embroidery
embroidery pattern in a new Design Page of pattern that you want to import.
the Layout & Editing window.

Advanced Opreation
Design Database
3. Click File, then Import Into Layout & Editing.
→ If the current Layout & Editing work area → The selected embroidery pattern appears
has already been saved or has not been in the Layout & Editing window.
edited, the selected embroidery pattern
immediately appears in a new Design b Memo:
Page of the Layout & Editing window. Double-clicking the file name also imports
→ If the current Layout & Editing work area the embroidery pattern into the Design Page
has not been saved, you will be asked in the Layout & Editing window.
whether you want to save the changes.

Checking Embroidery Patterns

1. In the folder pane, select the folder containing
Previewing embroidery the embroidery pattern that you want to
preview.
patterns
A preview of the embroidery pattern can be 2. In the contents pane, select the embroidery
displayed. pattern that you want to preview.

Toolbar button: 3. Click , or click Display, then Preview.

227
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 228 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Database

→ A Preview dialog box similar to the one

shown below appears. b Memo:
• The thread colors are displayed as basic
colors. Thread colors in .pes files are
displayed according to the thread colors
set when the file was read by Layout &
Editing.
• To close the dialog box, click Close.

→ If the Design Page was set to Custom

Size, a Property dialog box similar to the
one shown below appears.

b Memo:
To close the dialog box, click Close.

Checking embroidery pattern

information
Sewing information such as the file name, size,
stitch count, color count and modification date can
be checked in the File Property dialog box. With
.pes file, additional information about the
embroidery pattern can be viewed. b Memo:
• The first line of the dialog box shows the
Toolbar button: position of the displayed pattern section
within the embroidery hoop installation
1. In the contents pane, select the embroidery order.
pattern corresponding to the information that • To display information for other pattern
you want to view. sections, click or .
• The pattern sections are displayed in order
2. Click , or click Display, then File from left to right, top to bottom. Pattern
sections that do not contain any stitching
Property. will not be displayed.
→ The Property dialog box appears. • To close the dialog box, click Close.
Non-PES files

a Note:
cannot be clicked when the design
corresponding to the first hoop is already

displayed. In addition, cannot be

clicked when the design corresponding to
the last hoop is already displayed.
PES files

228
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 229 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Database

Searching for an Embroidery Pattern

The Search function allows you to quickly search for the desired embroidery pattern (.pes, .phc, .dst., .exp.,
.pcs or .hus file) within the selected folder according to the various search conditions that you can specify.

1. In the folder pane, select the folder that you To search for a .pes file with a category that
want to search. contains specific characters, select the
Category check box, and then type the desired
2. Click Edit, then Search. characters in the box beside Category.
→ The Search dialog box appears. To search for a .pes file with an author name
that contains specific characters, select the
Author check box, and then type the desired
characters in the box beside Author.
To search for a .pes file with a keyword that
contains specific characters, select the
Keywords check box, and then type the desired
characters in the box beside Keywords.
To search for a .pes file with a comment that
contains specific characters, select the
Comment check box, and then type the desired
3. Specify the search conditions.
characters in the box beside Comment.
To search for a file with a specific file name,
select the File Name check box, and then type b Memo:
the file name in the box beside File Name. • To also search through the subfolders
(folders within the selected folder), select
b Memo: the Search Subfolders check box.
The wildcard characters “*” and “?” can be • All characters entered in the box beside

Advanced Opreation
Design Database
used to represent one or multiple characters. File Name will be considered as a single
set of characters. However, you can
search for files matching multiple words in
To search for a file with a specific format,
the boxes below Search Conditions
select the Format check box, and then select (only for PES files) by separating the
the check box beside the desired format. words with a space.
To search for a file with a number of stitches • With search conditions that contain a
within a specified range, select the Stitches range, values must be entered for the start
check box, and then type the range in the and end of the range.
boxes beside Stitches.
To clear the search conditions, click Clear all.
To search for a file with a number of colors
within a specified range, select the Colors 4. Click Search Now.
check box, and then type the range in the
boxes beside Colors. → A list of files matching the specified
search conditions appears.
To search for a file with a width within a specified
range, select the Width check box, and then type
the range in the boxes beside Width.
To search for a file with a height within a specified
range, select the Height check box, and then type
the range in the boxes beside Height.
To search for a file with a modification date
within a specified range, select the Date
Modified check box, and then type or select
the range in the boxes beside Date Modified.
To search for a .pes file with a design name that b Memo:
contains specific characters, select the Design To quit the search, click Search Cancel in
Name check box, and then type the desired the message box that appeared during the
characters in the box beside Design Name. search.

229
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 230 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Database

Converting Embroidery Patterns to

Different Formats
Embroidery files can easily be converted to a file of one of the other formats (.pes, .dst., .exp., .pcs or .hus).

1. In the folder pane, select the folder containing • To change the folder where the new file
the embroidery pattern that you want to
will be added, click .
convert.

2. In the contents pane, select the embroidery

file that you want to convert.

3. Click File, then Convert Format.

→ The Convert Format dialog box appears.

In the Browse for Folder dialog box that

appeared, click the folder, and then click
OK (or double-click the folder) to select it
4. From the Format selector, select the format and to close the Browse for Folder dialog
box.
that you want to convert the file to.
• To create a new folder, click New Folder,
and then type in the name of the new
b Memo: folder.
With the DST format, jump codes are used to
indicate when the thread must be cut in order
to change the thread color. Since the number 6. Click Convert.
of codes differ depending on the sewing
→ The file is converted, and the new file is
machine being used, type or select the
appropriate value in the Number of jumps added to the specified folder.
for trim box. (This setting can only be
specified if the .dst format is selected.) b Memo:
• If the file is converted to a .pes file, the
thread colors are converted as if the file
5. Under Output, select whether the new file is was imported into Layout & Editing.
added to the same folder as the original file • If the path to a folder that does not exist
(Same folder) or to a specified folder was typed in, a message appears, asking
(Following folder). if you want to create the folder.
• If a file with the same name already exists,
b Memo: a message appears, asking if you want to
• If multiple files with different formats are overwrite the original file.
selected to be converted while Same • The name of the file after the conversion is
folder is selected, any file with the same the same as the name before the
format as the new one will not be conversion, except the extension is
converted. However, if the files are being changed to the one corresponding to the
added to a different folder than the original selected file format.
one, any file with the same format as the
new one will be copied to the different
folder, instead of being converted. a Note:
Files cannot be converted to the .phc format.

230
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 231 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Database

Outputting a Catalog of Embroidery

Patterns
Printing Outputting as an HTML file
Images of all embroidery patterns in the selected Instead of being printed, the catalog of embroidery
folder can be printed as a catalog. patterns can be outputted as an HTML file.

1. In the folder pane, select the folder containing 1. In the folder pane, select the folder containing
the embroidery patterns that you want to the embroidery patterns that you want to
catalog. catalog.

2. Click File, then Print Setup. 2. Click File, then Create HTML.
→ A Print Setup dialog box similar to the → A Save As dialog box similar to the one
one shown below appears. shown below appears.

Advanced Opreation
Design Database
3. Select the drive and the folder, and then type
in the name of the HTML file.
3. Under Print Layout, select whether each
pattern is printed on a separate page, 4 4. To add a title at the top of the file and in the title
patterns are printed on a page or 12 patterns bar, type the title in the Page Title box.
are printed on a page.
5. Under Page Layout, select how the patterns
4. Click Print. appear on the page.
→ Images of the selected patterns are print-
ed. 6. Click Save.
→ The HTML file and a folder containing im-
b Memo: ages of the embroidery patterns are out-
• If one or more embroidery patterns were putted to the selected folder.
selected in the contents pane, only the
selected patterns are printed.
• The catalog can be printed immediately by
clicking the menu command File – Print.
The embroidery patterns are printed
according to the settings already selected
in the Print Setup dialog box.

231
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 232 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Database

Outputting as a CSV file

A .csv file containing the sewing information (file
name, dimensions, number of stitches, number of
colors, file path, file properties (.pes files only) and
the names of thread colors) for selected embroidery
patterns can be outputted.

1. In the folder pane, select the folder containing

the embroidery patterns that you want to
catalog.

2. Click File, then Create CSV.

→ A Save As dialog box similar to the one
shown below appears.

3. Select the drive and the folder, and then type

in the name of the .csv file.

4. Click Save.
→ A CSV file containing the sewing informa-
tion for the embroidery patterns is output-
ted to the selected folder.

232
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 233 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Chapter 3
Reference

233
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 234 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Center

List of Tool Box Buttons

Stage 2 (Line Image stage)
In stage 2 (Line Image stage), the Tool Box is used to modify the line image generated from the original image
or to create a line image from scratch.
Selecting a button on the Tool Box changes the pointer mode and shape. A description of each tool appears
at the left side of the status bar.

Tool Box Purpose See page

p. 32

The five first buttons are used as pens and erasers of different thicknesses.
Pointer shape when moved or dragged over the work area:
for the pens and for the erasers (when the right mouse button is held down).
When you start up the application, the second Pen tool is selected.

p. 102
Sets the pointer in zoom-in mode.
Pointer shape:

p. 34
Maximizes the selected Design Page to fit in the window.

p. 102
Sets the pointer in zoom-out mode.
Pointer shape:

Stage 3 (Figure Handle stage)

In stage 3 (Figure Handle stage), outline data that has been generated automatically can be edited using the
Tool Box.
Selecting a button on the Tool Box changes the pointer mode and shape. A description of each tool appears
at the left side of the status bar.

Tool Box Purpose See page

p. 78
Sets the pointer in selection mode.When you start up the application, the selection mode is
selected. Pointer shape:

234
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 235 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Center

Tool Box Purpose See page

p. 81
Sets the pointer in point edit mode.
Pointer shape:

p. 82
Sets the pointer in line drawing mode.
Pointer shape:

p. 102
Sets the pointer in zoom-in mode.
Pointer shape:

p. 32
Maximizes the selected Design Page to fit in the window.

p. 102
Sets the pointer in zoom-out mode.
Pointer shape:

Fills the display with the selected objects.

Stage 4 (Sew Setting stage)

In stage 4 (Sew Setting stage), outline data from stage 3 (Figure Handle stage) are assigned line and region
sewing attributes. This is done by using the Tool Box and the Sewing Attributes bar.
Selecting a button on the Tool Box changes the pointer mode and shape. A description of each tool appears
at the left side of the status bar.

Design Center
Tool Box Purpose See page

Reference
Sets the pointer in region sewing mode. p. 84
When you start up the application, this tool is selected.
Pointer shape:

p. 85
Sets the pointer in line (all) sewing mode.
Pointer shape:

p. 86
Sets the pointer in line (part) sewing mode.
Pointer shape:

p. 97
Sets the pointer in hole sewing mode.
Pointer shape:

p. 102
Sets the pointer in zoom-in mode.
Pointer shape:

p. 32
Maximizes the selected Design Page to fit in the window.

235
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 236 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Center

Tool Box Purpose See page

p. 102
Sets the pointer in zoom-out mode.
Pointer shape:

p. 98
Sets the pointer in stamp input mode.
Pointer shape:

p. 99
Sets the pointer in stamp edit mode.
Pointer shape:

List of Menus
b Memo:
Many menu commands are available as buttons on the Toolbar or in the menu that appears when the right
mouse button is clicked.

File menu
The File menu contains commands for handling file input/output, such as opening and saving.

Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key See page

Creates a new Design Page and switches to stage 2 Ctrl + N p. 71

New Line Image
(Line Image stage).

New Figure Data

Creates a new Design Page and switches to stage 3 p. 71
(Figure Handle stage).

Wizard
Gives a step-by-step guide for creating pattern data, F3 p. 71
according the type of data you want to create.

Opens a previously saved file (.pem, .pel) or image file Ctrl + O p. 31

(Windows bitmap (.bmp), Exif (.tif, .jpg), ZSoftPCX (.pcx),
Windows Meta File (.wmf), Portable Network Graphics
(.png), Encapsulated PostScript (.eps), Kodak PhotoCD
(.pcd), FlashPix (.fpx), JPEG2000 (.j2k).

Open
a Note:
For .pcd and .fpx files containing many
pages, only the first page can be displayed.
Tiff files that have used LZW compression
cannot be opened.

Select TWAIN device

Selects which TWAIN device installed in the computer p. 72
to use.

Input from TWAIN Operates a TWAIN standardized scanner or other p. 72

device device to import an image.

Input from Clipboard

Opens a new Design Page in stage 1 (Original Image p. 72
stage), and imports the image data on the Clipboard.

236
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 237 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Center

Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key See page

Output to Clipboard
Copies the stage 1 (Original Image stage) image data p. 114
to the Clipboard.

Adds a .pem file to your Design Page (available only F8

Import Figure
in stage 3 (Figure Handle stage)).

Saves your Design Page on the disk as latest version Ctrl + S p. 104
Save
file (default).

Saves the current file under a new file name. Savable p. 104
files are: in stage 1 (Original Image stage), Bitmap
Save As files (.bmp); in stage 2 (Line Image stage), .pel files;
and in stage 3 (Figure Handle stage) and stage 4
(Sew Setting stage), .pem files.

Exit Exits the application. Alt + F4

Edit menu
The Edit menu contains commands for performing simple actions on selected patterns, such as cutting and
pasting.

Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key See page

Ctrl + Z
Undo Undoes the last operation.

Ctrl + A
Redo Cancels the effect of the last Undo.

Ctrl + X p. 214

Design Center
Removes the selected data from the screen while
Cut

Reference
saving a copy in the Clipboard.

Saves the selected data in the Clipboard without Ctrl + C p. 214

Copy
removing them from the screen.

Duplicate Makes a copy of the selected data. Ctrl + D p. 214

Ctrl + V p. 214
Paste Pastes the contents of the Clipboard on the screen.

Delete
Removes the selected data from the screen without Delete p. 214
saving them in the Clipboard.

Horizon- Ctrl + H p. 79
Flips the selected data up/down.
tal
Mirror
Ctrl + J p. 79
Vertical Flips the selected data left/right.

Ctrl + Y p. 79
Rotate Allows you to change the direction of the pattern.

237
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 238 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Center

Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key See page

Size Resizes the selection numerically.

p. 79
Numerical
Setting
Rotate Rotates the selected pattern numerically. p. 80

Select All Selects all of the data.

Ctrl + E p. 130

Sew menu
The Sew menu contains commands for controlling the way the pattern will be sewn.

Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key See page

Ctrl + W p. 89
Sewing Attributes Sets the sewing attributes for outlines and regions.

Allows you to check and modify the sewing order of F10 p. 100
Sewing Order the different colors of a pattern as well as the sewing
order of each color individually.

Display menu
The Display menu contains commands for modifying the appearance of the screen.

Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key See page

Allows you to set up the grid, to switch it on or off, and p. 105

Grid Setup to display it with or without the horizontal and vertical
lines.

Specifies whether the patterns appear as stitches or F9 p. 102

Preview
in the normal view.

Displays a realistic image of how the patterns will look Shift + F9 p. 102
Realistic Preview
after being embroidered.

Refresh Window Updates the screen. Ctrl + R

p. 101
Stitch Simulator Displays a simulation of the machine stitching.

Reference Window Hides/displays the Reference window. F11 p. 103

Realistic Preview
Sets the preview attributes for Realistic Preview.
p. 102
Attribute Setting

Toolbar Hides/displays the Toolbar.

p. 70

Status Bar Hides/displays the status bar. p. 70

238
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 239 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Center

Option menu
The Option menu contains commands for selecting the Design Page size and the unit system.

Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key See page

Layout & Editing

Starts up Layout & Editing and displays its window up F5 p. 39
front.

Programmable Stitch Starts up Programmable Stitch Creator and displays p. 54

Creator its window up front.

Design Page Property

Allows you to change the size of the Design Page and p. 77
the color of the Design Page and the background.

mm Allows you to change the system units to millimeters.

p. 105
Select
System
Unit inch Allows you to change the system units to inches. p. 105

Stage menu
The Stage menu contains commands for moving from one stage to the next or to a previous one.

Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key See page

Moves back to stage 1 (Original Image stage). p. 71

a Note:
This function can only be used if there is
image data in stage 1 (Original Image
To Original Image stage), for example, if image data was
opened or if image data was pasted from the
Clipboard. If you have started with a new file

Design Center
Reference
from stage 2 (Line Image stage), for
example, the function is not available.

Moves to stage 2 (Line Image stage). p. 73

a Note:
To Line Image If you have started with a new figure handle
file from stage 3 (Figure Handle stage), this
function is not available.

p. 76
To Figure Handle Moves to stage 3 (Figure Handle stage).

Moves from stage 3 (Figure Handle stage) to stage 4 p. 83

To Sew Setting
(Sew Setting stage).

239
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 240 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Center

Help menu
The Help menu contains commands for accessing the on-screen help information system.

Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key See page

Contents
Starts up the on-screen help information for this F1
application.

Opens the FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions) page

on our Web site.

Customer Support
a Note:
This function cannot be used if there is no
Internet browser correctly installed in the
computer.

About Design Center Gives information about the version of this application.

240
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 241 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing

List of Tool Box Buttons

Tool Box Purpose See page

p. 130
Sets the pointer in selection mode. When you start up the application, the selection mode
is selected. Pointer shape:

p. 135
Sets the pointer in point edit mode.
p. 139
Pointer shape: or

p. 186
Sets the pointer in zoom mode.
Pointer shape: or

p. 153
Sets the pointer in text and monogram input mode.
Pointer shape:

p. 145
Sets the pointer in circle, arc, fan shape and arc & string drawing mode.
Pointer shape:

p. 148
Sets the pointer in rectangle drawing mode.
Pointer shape:

p. 149
Sets the pointer in outline drawing mode.
Pointer shape: , or

p. 152
Sets the pointer in manual punching mode.
Pointer shape: , , , or

p. 182
Layout & Editing
Sets the pointer in measure mode.
Pointer shape:
Reference

p. 143
Sets the pointer in split stitch mode.
Pointer shape:

p. 165
Sets the pointer in stamp input or stamp edit mode.
Pointer shape:

241
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 242 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing

List of Menus
b Memo:
Many menu commands are available as buttons on the Toolbar or in the menu that appears when the right
mouse button is clicked.

File menu
The File menu contains commands for handling file input/output, such as opening, saving and printing.

Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key See page

Ctrl + N p. 108
New Creates a new Design Page.

Ctrl + O p. 109
Open Opens a previously saved embroidery pattern.

Imports embroidery patterns from embroidery cards F8 p. 127

(.pec), original cards (.pes) and files created in the
from File Tajima (.dst), Melco (.exp), Pfaff (.pcs), Husqvarna
(.hus) and embroidery sewing machine (.phc) formats
and adds them to your current Design Page.
Import
from F7 p. 128
Design Imports an embroidery pattern from Design Center.
Center

from Imports an embroidery pattern from an embroidery p. 128

Card card.

Saves your embroidery pattern on the computer’s Ctrl + S p. 194

Save
hard disk as a latest version file (default).

Save As
Saves your embroidery pattern on the computer’s p. 194
hard disk under a new file name.

Export
Exports the data shown in the Design Page as a file of p. 195
a different format (.dst, .hus, .exp, and .pcs).

Current F4 p. 195
Writes your embroidery pattern to an original card.
Design
Write to
Card
Other Writes multiple .pes files to an original card at the Shift + F4 p. 196
PES files same time.

Property Used to enter comments in the .pes file being edited.

p. 199

Print Setup
Allows you to change the printing settings for p. 200
previewed embroidery.

Allows you to preview the contents of the Design Page p. 201

Print Preview and check the sewing color order, the dimensions and
the needle count before printing.

Print
Prints your Design Page and some sewing Ctrl + P p. 201
information.

242
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 243 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing

Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key See page

Exit Exits the application.

Alt + F4 p. 24

Edit menu
The Edit menu contains commands for performing simple actions on selected patterns, such as cutting and
pasting.

Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key See page

Ctrl + Z
Undo Undoes the last operation.

Ctrl + A
Redo Cancels the effect of the last Undo.

Group Turns several selected objects into one object. Ctrl + G p. 134

Ungroup Cancels the grouping for grouped objects. Shift+ G p. 134

Removes the selected pattern(s) from the screen Ctrl + X

Cut
while saving a copy in the Clipboard.

Saves the selected pattern(s) in the Clipboard without Ctrl + C

Copy
removing them from the screen.

Duplicate Makes a copy of the selected pattern(s). Ctrl + D

Ctrl + V
Paste Pastes the contents of the Clipboard on the screen.

Removes the selected pattern(s) from the screen Delete p. 114

Delete
without saving them in the Clipboard. p. 137

Straightens the two rounded lines that meet at a p. 137

Layout & Editing

Change to Straight
smooth point.
Reference

Change to Curve
Rounds off the two straight lines that meet at a corner p. 137
point.

Horizon- Ctrl + H p. 133

Flips the selected pattern(s) up/down.
tal
Mirror
Ctrl + J p. 133
Vertical Flips the selected pattern(s) left/right.

Allows you to manually rotate the selected pattern(s) Ctrl + Y p. 133

Rotate
by an arbitrary angle.

243
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 244 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing

Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key See page

Size Resizes the selected pattern numerically.

p. 132
Numerical
Setting
Rotate Rotates the selected pattern numerically. p. 134

Center
Moves the selected pattern to the center of the Design Ctrl + M p. 131
Page.

Left Aligns the selected patterns on their left sides. p. 131

Center Aligns the selected patterns on their left/right centers. p. 131

Right Aligns the selected patterns on their right sides. p. 131

Align
Top Aligns the selected patterns on their top edges. p. 131

Middle
Aligns the selected patterns on their top/bottom p. 131
centers.

Bottom Aligns the selected patterns on their bottom edges. p. 131

Select All Selects all of the patterns. Ctrl + E p. 130

244
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 245 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing

Image menu
The Image menu contains commands for importing and exporting image data and creating embroidery data
from image data.

Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key See page

Imports image data from an existing file so that it can be p. 111

used as a guide for creating embroidery data.

a Note:
The file name extension must be one of the
from File following: Windows bitmap (.bmp), Exif (.tif,
.jpg), ZSoftPCX (.pcx), Windows Meta File
(.wmf), Portable Network Graphics (.png),
Encapsulated PostScript (.eps), Kodak
PhotoCD (.pcd), FlashPix (.fpx), JPEG2000
Input (.j2k).

from
Operates a TWAIN standardized scanner or other
p. 111
TWAIN
device to import an image.
device

from Combine images of facial features that are provided p. 112

Portrait with the application to create an original portrait.

from
Import image data from the Clipboard.
p. 113
Clipboard

to File Saves the image data as a file. p. 114

Output
to
Copies the image data onto the Clipboard.
p. 114
Clipboard

Select TWAIN device

Selects which TWAIN device installed in the computer p. 111
to use.

Modify Adjusts the size and position of the image data. p. 114

Image to Stitch Wiz- Gives step-by-step instruction for creating embroidery p. 115 Layout & Editing

ard data from image data.

Reference

On Displays the template image.

F6 p. 113

Display F6 p. 113
Faded Displays a faded copy of the template image.
Image

Off Hides the template image.

F6 p. 113

245
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 246 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing

Text menu
The Text menu contains commands for performing actions on text patterns, such as fitting text to a curved
path.

Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key See page

Edit Letters Allows you to edit entered text. Ctrl + L p. 156

Ctrl + K p. 157
Text Attribute Setting Allows for precise control of character attributes.

Fit Text to Path Ctrl + T p. 158

Fits a line of text along a path.
Setting

Release Text from Ctrl + Q p. 160

Releases the text from the path.
Path

F2 p. 160
Transform Text Applies a preset transformation to text.

F3 p. 160
Clear Transformation Restores the original shape of the text.

TrueType Font Sets the attributes, such as the style, for TrueType p. 161
Attribute Setting fonts that are converted to embroidery data.

Convert to Outline Creates outline data from text data converted from a p. 161
Object TrueType font.

Sew menu
The Sew menu contains commands for controlling the way each pattern will be sewn.

Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key See page

Sewing Attribute Sets the sewing attributes of the regions and the Ctrl + W p. 171
Setting outlines of a pattern.

Allows you to check and change the sewing order of F10 p. 184
Sewing Order/Color
pattern colors and individual patterns.

Sets a pair of patterns for hole sewing (to avoid p. 180

Set hole sewing sewing twice at the same place when a pattern
encloses another one).

Cancel hole sewing Cancels hole sewing. p. 180

Converts imported stitch patterns into blocks (manual p. 142

Stitch to Block punching data), allowing you to set sewing attributes
and to keep the stitching quality when scaling.

Convert to Stitch Converts a shape object to a stitch object.

p. 140

246
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 247 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing

Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key See page

Applique Wizard
Provides step-by-step instructions for easily creating p. 181
appliqués.

Select Sewing Area Sets the sewing area. p. 183

Optimizes the sewing order of patterns in a Design p. 204

Optimize hoop Page for multi-position embroidery frames (100 × 172
change mm, 172 × 100 mm, 130 × 300 mm, or 300 × 130
mm).

Optimize Entry/ Optimizes the positions of the entry points and the exit p. 139
Exit points points for the sewing data.

Display menu
The Display menu contains commands for modifying the appearance of the screen.

Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key See page

Grid Setup Controls the display and characteristics of the grid. p. 202

Specifies whether the patterns appear as stitches or F9 p. 187

Preview
in the normal view.

Displays a realistic image of how either selected patterns Shift + F9 p. 187

or all patterns will look after being embroidered.

a Note:
Realistic Preview The Realistic Preview function cannot display a
clean preview of the pattern if the monitor is set
to 256 colors or less. The monitor should be set
to at least 16-bit High Color (65536 colors).

Realistic Preview Sets the preview attributes for the Realistic Preview p. 187
Attribute Setting function.

Ctrl + R
Layout & Editing
Refresh Window Updates the screen.
Reference

p. 188
Stitch Simulator Displays a simulation of the machine stitching.

Reference Window Hides/displays the Reference window. F11 p. 193

Toolbar Hides/displays the Toolbar.

p. 107

Status Bar Hides/displays the status bar. p. 107

247
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 248 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Layout & Editing

Option menu
The Option menu contains commands for providing additional options.

Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key See page

Design Center
Starts up Design Center and displays its window up F5 p. 30
front.

Programmable Stitch Starts up Programmable Stitch Creator and displays p. 54

Creator its window up front.

Design Property
Displays a dialog box containing sewing information p. 189
for the selected pattern(s).

Design Page Property

Allows you to change the size of the Design Page, and p. 108
the color of the Design Page and the background.

Edit User Thread

Allows original thread charts to be created and edited.
p. 190
Chart

mm Allows you to change the system units to millimeters. p. 202

Select
System
Unit inch Allows you to change the system units to inches. p. 202

Help menu
The Help menu contains commands for accessing the on-screen help information system.

Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key See page

Contents
Starts up the on-screen help information for this F1
application.

Opens the FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions) page

on our Web site.

Customer support
a Note:
This function cannot be used if there is no
Internet browser correctly installed in the
computer.

Displays the online registration page from our Web p. 13

site.

a Note:
Online Registration This function is available only if the Internet
browser is correctly installed and an Internet
connection can be established. *Online
registration is not possible in certain
countries and regions.

About
Gives information about the version of this application.
Layout & Editing

248
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 249 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Programmable Stitch Creator

List of Tool Box Buttons

Tool Box Purpose See page

p. 213
Sets the pointer in selection mode.
Pointer shape:

p. 216
Sets the pointer in point edit mode.
Pointer shape:

Sets the pointer in line drawing mode. When you start up the application, the drawing p. 212
mode is selected.
Pointer shape:

p. 218
Sets the pointer in region (reset) mode.
Pointer shape:

p. 217
Sets the pointer in region (engrave) mode.
Pointer shape:

p. 217
Sets the pointer in region (emboss) mode.
Pointer shape:

List of Menus
b Memo:
Many menu commands are available as buttons on the Toolbar or in the menu that appears when the right
mouse button is clicked.

File menu
The File menu contains commands for handling files, such as opening and saving.

Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key See page

Programmable
Stitch Creator
Reference

Ctrl + N p. 209
New Creates a new work area.

Ctrl + O p. 209
Open Opens a previously saved programmable stitch file.

249
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 250 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Programmable Stitch Creator

Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key See page

Opens a background image file that can be used as a guide p. 210

to draw a new pattern for a programmable fill or motif stitch.

a Note:
The following file formats can be opened:
Template Open Windows bitmap (.bmp), Exif (.tif, .jpg),
ZsoftPCX (.pcx), Windows Meta File (.wmf),
Portable Network Graphics (.png),
Encapsulated PostScript (.eps), Kodak
PhotoCD (.pcd), FlashPix (.fpx), JPEG2000
(.j2k).

Ctrl + S p. 221
Save Saves your work area on the disk.

Save As
Saves the current stitch pattern under a new file p. 221
name.

Exit Exits the application. Alt + F4 p. 58

Mode menu
You can use Programmable Stitch Creator to create patterns for programmable fill stitches, motif fill or motif
line stitches, and stamps. However, the method and work area are different for each. Use the Mode menu to
select the mode for the pattern that you want to create.

Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key See page

Fill/Stamp
Enters Fill/Stamp mode for creating stitch patterns for p. 210
programmable fill stitches and stamps.

Motif
Enters Motif mode for creating stitch patterns for motif p. 210
stitches.

Edit menu
The Edit menu contains commands for performing simple actions on selected lines and patterns, such as
cutting and pasting.

Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key See page

Ctrl + Z
Undo Undoes the last operation.

Ctrl + A
Redo Cancels the effect of the last Undo.

Removes the selected line(s) from the screen while Ctrl + X p. 214
Cut
saving a copy in the Clipboard.

250
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 251 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Programmable Stitch Creator

Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key See page

Saves the selected line(s) in the Clipboard without Ctrl + C p. 214

Copy
removing them from the screen.

Duplicate Adds a copy of the selected line(s) to the work area. Ctrl + D p. 214

Ctrl + V p. 214
Paste Pastes the lines of the Clipboard on the screen.

Removes the selected line(s) from the screen without Delete p. 214,
Delete
saving them in the Clipboard. p. 217

Horizon- Ctrl + H p. 215

Flips the selected line(s) up/down.
tal
Mirror
Ctrl + J p. 215
Vertical Flips the selected line(s) left/right.

Allows you to manually rotate the selected line(s) by Ctrl + Y p. 215

Rotate
an arbitrary angle.

Select All Selects all of the patterns. Ctrl + E p. 213

Display menu
The Display menu contains commands for modifying the appearance of the screen.

Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key See page

Grid Selects the work grid. p. 222

On Displays the template image.

F6 p. 210

Template Faded Displays a faded copy of the template image. F6 p. 210

Off Hides the template image.

F6 p. 210

Preview
Hides/displays the repeating image display of the p. 212
pattern being created.

p. 208
Programmable
Stitch Creator

Toolbar Hides/displays the Toolbar.

Reference

Status Bar Hides/displays the status bar. p. 208

251
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 252 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Programmable Stitch Creator

Help menu
The Help menu contains commands for accessing the on-screen help information system.

Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key See page

Contents
Starts up the on-screen help information for this F1
application.

Opens the FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions) page

on our Web site.

Customer support a Note:

This function cannot be used if there is no
Internet browser correctly installed in the
computer.

About Programmable
Gives information about the version of this application.
Stitch Creator

252
Ver6_Reference_04.fm Page 253 Friday, July 9, 2004 1:54 PM

Design Database

List of Menus
b Memo:
Many menu commands are available as buttons on the Toolbar or in the menu that appears when the right
mouse button is clicked.

File menu
The File menu contains commands for handling files, such as opening, importing and converting, and for
creating catalogs.

Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key See page

Opens the embroidery file with Layout & Editing. p. 227

Open in Layout &
Editing
a Note:
Only .pes files can be opened.

Imports the embroidery pattern into Layout & Editing. p. 227

a Note:
Import into Layout & The following file formats can be imported.: .pes,
Editing Tajima (.dst), Melco (.exp), Pfaff (.pcs),
Husqvarna (.hus), and embroidery sewing
machine (.phc).

Create Folder Creates a new folder in the selected folder. p. 224

Convert Files
Converts the embroidery file to one of a different p. 230
format.

Delete Deletes the selected embroidery file. p. 225

Print Setup
Allows you to change the printing settings for catalogs p. 231
of embroidery patterns.

Allows you to preview the catalog of embroidery

Print Preview
patterns before printing.

Print Prints the catalog of embroidery patterns. Ctrl + P p. 231

Create HTML
Outputs the catalog of embroidery patterns as an p. 231
HTML file.

Create CSV
Outputs the catalog of embroidery pattern sewing p. 232
information as a CSV file.
Design Database
Reference

Exit Exits the application. Alt + F4

253
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 254 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Database

Edit menu
Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key See page

Removes the selected embroidery pattern(s) from the Ctrl + X p. 225

Cut
folder while saving a copy in the Clipboard.

Saves the selected embroidery pattern(s) in the Ctrl + C p. 225

Copy
Clipboard without removing them from the folder.

Pastes the embroidery patterns from the Clipboard Ctrl + V p. 225

Paste
into the selected folder.

Search Allows the desired embroidery file to be searched for.

Ctrl + F p. 229

Display menu
Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key See page

Lists the embroidery patterns in the contents pane as p. 226

Large Thumbnails
large thumbnails.

Lists the embroidery patterns in the contents pane as p. 226

Small Thumbnails
small thumbnails.

Lists the embroidery patterns in the contents pane by p. 226

Details
their sewing information.

Displays a preview of the selected embroidery p. 227

Preview
pattern.

Displays the sewing information for the selected p. 228

File Property
embroidery pattern.

Refresh
Refreshes the display of embroidery patterns in the Ctrl + R
contents pane.

Toolbar Hides/displays the Toolbar. p. 223

Status Bar Hides/displays the status bar. p. 223

254
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 255 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Design Database

Option menu
The Option menu contains a command for changing the units of measure.

Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key See page

mm Allows you to change the system units to millimeters. p. 202

Select
System
Unit inch Allows you to change the system units to inches. p. 202

Help menu
The Help menu contains commands for accessing the on-screen help information system.

Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key See page

Contents
Starts up the on-screen help information for this F1
application.

About Design Data-

Gives information about the version of this application.
base

Design Database
Reference

255
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 256 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Index

A user thread list ...................................................190

combining
adding pattern colors ....................................................185
text ..............................................................43, 153 commands
thread colors .....................................................191 Design Center ...................................................236
thread colors to charts .......................................191 Design Database ...............................................253
aligning Layout & Editing ................................................242
embroidery patterns ..........................................131 Programmable Stitch Creator ............................249
hole sewing .......................................................132 computer .......................................................................8
text ....................................................................131 concentric circle stitch .................................................16
Alignment ..................................................................158 center point .................................................97, 139
applications ...................................................................4 sewing attributes .........................................95, 177
APPLIQUE ................................................................170 Conversion Priority ............................................118, 121
APPLIQUE MATERIAL .............................................170 converting
APPLIQUE POSITION ..............................................170 embroidery pattern formats ...............................230
appliques ...................................................................181 image to embroidery pattern ...............................21
Arc shape selector ...............................................41, 147 copying
Arrange ......................................................................173 embroidery patterns to folders ..........................224
arranging text ............................................................158 images ...............................................................114
attaching stabilizer .......................................................63 stitch patterns ....................................................214
Auto Generate ...........................................120, 122, 124 creating
Auto Punch function ............................................21, 115 catalogs
Auto Select Setting ............................................119, 123 CSV files ...................................................232
HTML files .................................................231
new folders ........................................................224
B new thread color chart .......................................190
Cross size ..................................................................126
Base Sew ............................................................94, 176 cross stitch ..................................................................16
Beginner mode ....................................................90, 171 sewing attributes .........................................95, 177
blocks from stitch data ...............................................142 Cross Stitch function .................................................125
curves to straight lines ...............................................137
C custom Design Page ...................................................60
cutting
cancelling patterns .............................................................143
hole sewing .......................................................180 stitch patterns ....................................................214
text arrangement ...............................................160
text transformation ............................................160
card slot .........................................................................6 D
card writer ..................................................................5, 6 deleting
upgrading ............................................................12 embroidery patterns ..........................................225
catalogs outlines ................................................................80
CSV files ...........................................................232 points ...........................................81, 137, 217, 219
HTML files .........................................................231 stitch patterns ....................................................214
printing ..............................................................231 stitch points .......................................................141
CD-ROM ........................................................................8 thread color charts ............................................190
center points ........................................................97, 139 thread colors from charts ..................................192
centering ....................................................................131 Density ......91, 92, 93, 95, 172, 173, 174, 175, 177, 178
Change Color ....................................................121, 125 Design Center ...................................................4, 30, 69
changing commands .........................................................236
embroidery pattern names ................................225 menus ...............................................................236
stitch data colors ...............................................142 Tool Box buttons ...............................................234
thread color order ..............................................192 window ................................................................70
Character Spacing .....................................................158 Design Database ...................................................5, 223
checking commands .........................................................253
line sewing attributes ...........................................86 menus ...............................................................253
region sewing attributes ......................................84 window ..............................................................223
sewing order ................................................61, 184 Design Page Color ....................................................118
stitching .....................................................101, 188 Design Page size ................................................77, 108
closed paths ................................................................48 custom .................................................................60
Color button .........................................................89, 169 multi-position hoops ..........................................203
Color Count ...............................................................119 Detail .................................................................118, 121
Color Set ...................................................................123 Direction ..........................................................................
colors .............91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 158, 173, 174, 175, 176, 177
stitch data ..........................................................142 direction of offset .................................................94, 176

256
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 257 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Index

Display Right ..................................................131, 244

Details .......................................................226, 254 Top ....................................................131, 244
File Property ..............................................228, 254 Center .......................................................131, 244
Grid ...................................................................251 Change to Curve .......................................137, 243
Grid Setup .........................105, 202, 222, 238, 247 Change to Straight ....................................137, 243
Large Thumbnails .....................................226, 254 Copy ..................................214, 237, 243, 251, 254
Preview ................................................................... Cut .....................................214, 237, 243, 250, 254
.22, 37, 51, 102, 187, 212, 227, 238, 247, 251, 254 Delete ................................137, 214, 237, 243, 251
Realistic Preview .....23, 38, 52, 102, 187, 238, 247 Duplicate ...................................214, 237, 243, 251
Realistic Preview Attribute Setting .......................... Group ........................................................134, 243
...................................................102, 187, 238, 247 Mirror
Reference Window ....................................238, 247 Horizontal ....79, 133, 215, 220, 237, 243, 251
Refresh ..............................................................254 Vertical ........79, 133, 215, 220, 237, 243, 251
Refresh Window ........................................238, 247 Numerical Setting
Small Thumbnails ......................................226, 254 Rotate ..................................80, 134, 238, 244
Status Bar .................................238, 247, 251, 254 Size .....................................79, 132, 238, 244
Stitch Simulator .........................101, 188, 238, 247 Paste .................................214, 237, 243, 251, 254
Template ...........................................................222 Redo ..................................................237, 243, 250
Faded ........................................................251 Rotate ..........................79, 133, 215, 237, 243, 251
Off .............................................................251 Search ...............................................................229
On .............................................................251 Search Files ......................................................254
Toolbar ......................................238, 247, 251, 254 Select All ...................................130, 238, 244, 251
display ...........................................................................8 To Curve ...........................................................137
display area frame To Straight .........................................................137
enlarging ...........................................................193 Undo ..................................................237, 243, 250
moving .......................................................103, 193 Ungroup ....................................................134, 243
redrawing ..................................................103, 193 Edit List ..............................................................119, 123
reducing ............................................................193 Edit menu ..................................................................250
resizing ......................................................104, 193 Design Center ...................................................237
scaling .......................................................104, 193 Design Database ...............................................254
zooming .....................................................103, 193 Layout & Editing ................................................243
Display menu editing
Design Center ...................................................238 embroidery patterns ..........................................130
Design Database ...............................................254 grouped objects .................................................134
Layout & Editing ................................................247 images ...............................................................114
Programmable Stitch Creator ............................251 lines .....................................................................32
displaying monogram characters .......................................164
background images ...........................................222 monogram pattern .............................................164
embroidery patterns ..........................................226 monograms .......................................................163
images ...............................................................113 outlines ................................................................78
drawing pattern colors ....................................................185
arc & string ........................................................147 points ...................................................81, 135, 216
arcs ...................................................................145 sewing order ......................................................185
broken lines ...................................................48, 82 stamps .........................................................99, 166
circles ..........................................................45, 145 stitch patterns ............................................213, 219
closed paths ................................................48, 149 stitch points .......................................................140
curves ................................................................149 text ....................................................................156
display area frame .....................................103, 193 thread color charts ............................................190
fan shapes .........................................................146 thread colors .....................................................192
open paths ........................................................149 embossing effects .......................................................57
outlines ................................................................74 embroidering .........................................................63, 65
ovals ............................................................41, 145 embroidery patterns
portrait ...............................................................112 adding comments ..............................................199
rectangles ..........................................................148 aligning ..............................................................131
stitch patterns ..............................................56, 212 centering ...........................................................131
straight lines ......................................................149 changing names ................................................225
duplicating stitch patterns ..........................................214 converting formats .............................................230
copying to folders ..............................................224
deleting ..............................................................225
E displaying ..........................................................226
E stitch .......................................................................173 editing ................................................................130
E/V stitch .....................................................................15 exporting ...........................................................195
flipping ...............................................................133
sewing attributes ...............................................173
from images ....................................19, 25, 27, 115
Edge radius selector ..................................................148
grouping ............................................................134
Edit
importing ...........................................................227
Align information ................................................189, 228
Bottom ...............................................131, 244 moving ...............................................................131
Center ...............................................131, 244 moving to folders ...............................................224
Left ....................................................131, 244 multi-position hoops ..................................204, 205
Middle ................................................131, 244

257
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 258 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Index

printing ......................................................207 Template Open .........................................210, 250

opening .............................................................227 Wizard .........................................................71, 236
organizing ..........................................................224 Write to Card
outputting catalogs Current Design ........24, 52, 62, 195, 206, 242
CSV files ...................................................232 Other PES files ..........................196, 206, 242
HTML files .................................................231 File menu
previewing .........................................102, 187, 227 Design Center ...................................................236
printing ..............................................................201 Design Database ...............................................253
catalogs .....................................................231 Layout & Editing ................................................242
resizing ..............................................................132 Programmable Stitch Creator ............................249
rotating ..............................................................133 fill stitch ........................................................................15
saving ........................................................104, 194 sewing attributes .........................................92, 174
scaling ...............................................................132 Fill/Stamp mode ........................................................211
searching ...........................................................229 fitting text to object ......................................................44
selecting ............................................................130 flipping
engraving effects .........................................................57 embroidery patterns ..........................................133
enlarging ..............................................................32, 186 outlines ................................................................79
display area frame .............................................193 stitch patterns ............................................215, 220
tips .......................................................................14 folders ........................................................................224
entry/exit points Font selector ........................................................43, 154
moving ...............................................................138 Frequency .....................................93, 94, 175, 176, 178
optimizing ..................................................138, 139
selecting ............................................................141
erasers ..................................................................32, 75 G
exiting
geometric attributes ...................................................167
Layout & Editing ......................................24, 53, 63
arc & string ........................................................147
Programmable Stitch Creator ..............................58
arcs ...................................................................147
Expert mode ........................................................90, 171
circles ................................................................147
exporting embroidery patterns ...................................195
closed paths ......................................................150
curves ................................................................149
F fan shapes .........................................................146
open paths ........................................................150
Feathered edge .........................................................178 ovals ..................................................................145
features .........................................................................1 rectangles ..........................................................148
Figure Handle stage ....................................4, 33, 69, 76 straight lines ......................................................149
Tool Box buttons ...............................................234 Gradation ...................91, 92, 93, 96, 173, 174, 175, 179
File grid ............................................................105, 202, 222
Convert Files .....................................................253 grouping embroidery patterns ...................................134
Convert Format .................................................230
Create CSV .......................................................232
Create CSV File ................................................253 H
Create HTML .....................................................231 Half Stitch ................................91, 92, 93, 172, 174, 175
Create HTML File ..............................................253
hard disk free space ......................................................8
Create New Folder ............................................224
H-Arrange ....................................................95, 172, 177
Delete ................................................................253
Help
Exit ....................24, 53, 58, 63, 237, 243, 250, 253
Export ........................................................195, 242 About Design Center .........................................240
Import About Design Database ....................................255
from Card ..................................................128 About Layout & Editing ......................................248
from Design Center .....................40, 128, 242 About Programmable Stitch Creator .................252
from File ......................................60, 127, 242 Contents ....................................240, 248, 252, 255
Import Figure .....................................................237 Customer Support .............................................240
Import into Layout & Editing ..............................253 Customer support ......................................248, 252
Input from Clipboard ..........................................236 Online Registration ......................................13, 248
Input from TWAIN device ............................72, 236 Help menu .................................................................255
New ...........................................108, 209, 242, 249 Design Center ...................................................240
New Figure Data .........................................78, 236 Layout & Editing ................................................248
New Line Image ..........................................74, 236 Programmable Stitch Creator ............................252
Open .....................40, 55, 109, 209, 236, 242, 249 hole sewing ...................................................50, 97, 180
Open in Layout & Editing ..................................227 aligning ..............................................................132
Open with Layout & Editing ...............................253 hoop changes ............................................................204
Output to Clipboard ...........................................237 hooping ........................................................................65
Print ...................................................201, 242, 253 Horizontal Alignment .................................................159
Print Preview .....................................201, 242, 253
Print Setup ................................200, 231, 242, 253
Property .....................................................199, 242 I
Save ........................................................................ Image
...23, 53, 58, 61, 104, 194, 206, 221, 237, 242, 250 Display Image ...................................................113
Save As .......38, 104, 194, 206, 221, 237, 242, 250 Faded ........................................................245
Select TWAIN device ..................................72, 236

258
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 259 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Index

Off .............................................................245 Max. Density ......................................................123, 125

On .............................................................245 Max. Number of Colors .............................................126
Image to Stitch Wizard ..................21, 27, 115, 245 maximize button ..........................19, 25, 30, 54, 59, 224
Input measurement units ............................................105, 202
from Clipboard ...................................113, 245 measuring ..................................................................182
from File ................................20, 26, 111, 245 memory .........................................................................8
from Portrait ......................................112, 245 menus
from TWAIN device ...........................112, 245 Design Center ...................................................236
Modify ............................................21, 27, 114, 245 Design Database ...............................................253
Output Layout & Editing ................................................242
to Clipboard .......................................114, 245 Programmable Stitch Creator ............................249
to File ................................................114, 245 Mode
Select TWAIN device ................................111, 245 Fill/Stamp ..................................................210, 250
Image menu ..............................................................245 Motif ..........................................................210, 250
Image Tune .........................................................74, 117 Mode menu ...............................................................250
Image Type .......................................................118, 121 monitor ..........................................................................8
images monogram attributes .................................................163
converting to embroidery patterns ...19, 25, 27, 115 Monogram Font selector ...........................................163
moving ...............................................................114
Monogram Size selector ............................................163
outputting ..........................................................114
monograms ...............................................................162
resizing ..............................................................114
Motif mode .................................................................211
saving ................................................................114
scaling ...............................................................114 motif stitch .............................................................15, 16
importing patterns ...............................................95, 172, 177
.pem files .............................................................71 sewing attributes .................................95, 172, 177
background images ...........................................210 moving
Clipboard images ........................................72, 113 broken lines .........................................................50
embroidery patterns ............................60, 127, 227 center points ................................................97, 139
from Design Center ...............................39, 40, 128 display area frame .....................................103, 193
from embroidery cards ......................................128 embroidery patterns ....................................40, 131
images .......................................20, 26, 71, 72, 111 embroidery patterns to center ...........................131
TWAIN images ............................................72, 112 embroidery patterns to folders ..........................224
indicator .........................................................................6 entry/exit points .................................................138
inserting images ...................................................21, 27, 114
objects .................................................................41
points ...................................................81, 136, 216
outlines ................................................................78
stitch points .......................................................141
points ...................................................81, 135, 216
installing
stitch patterns ....................................................213
driver ...................................................................10
stitch points .......................................................141
overview ................................................................7
text ......................................................................45
software .................................................................8
multi-position hoops ..................................................203
Design Page size ..............................................203
K embroidery patterns ..........................................204
hoop changes ....................................................204
Kerning ......................................................................158 pattern information ............................................205
saving patterns ..................................................206
L
large-sized embroidery patterns ..................................59 N
Layout & Editing ..........................................4, 19, 25, 59 naming embroidery patterns ......................................225
commands .........................................................242 NOT DEFINED ..........................................................170
menus ...............................................................242
Tool Box buttons ...............................................241
window ..............................................................107 O
LED ...............................................................................6
objects converted to stitch data .................................140
Line color button ................................35, 45, 48, 88, 168
Offset ...................................................................94, 176
Line Image stage .........................................4, 31, 69, 73
opening
Tool Box buttons ...............................................234
.pem files .............................................................71
Line Interval .......................................................123, 125
.pes file ..............................................................109
Line sew button .................................42, 45, 48, 88, 168 background images ...........................................210
Line sew type selector .......................35, 45, 48, 88, 168 Clipboard images ........................................72, 113
line sewing attributes .....................................86, 91, 172 embroidery patterns ............................40, 127, 227
Line Spacing ..............................................................158 images .................................20, 26, 31, 71, 72, 111
Layout & Editing file ..........................................109
new Design Page ..............................................108
M new figure handle images .............................71, 78
manual punching ...............................................151, 178 new line images ............................................71, 74
marking embroidering position ....................................63 new stitch pattern ..............................................209
masks ........................................................120, 122, 124 stitch patterns ....................................................209
TWAIN images ............................................72, 112

259
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 260 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Index

operating system ...........................................................8 printer ............................................................................8

optimizing printing
entry/exit points .........................................138, 139 catalogs .............................................................231
hoop changes ....................................................204 settings ......................................................231
Option embroidery patterns ..........................................201
Design Center ...................................................248 multi-position hoops ..................................207
Design Page Property ...60, 77, 108, 203, 239, 248 preview ..............................................................201
Design Property ..........................61, 189, 205, 248 settings ..............................................................200
Edit User Thread Chart .............................190, 248 processor .......................................................................8
Layout & Editing ..........................................40, 239 programmable fill stitch
Programmable Stitch Creator ..............54, 239, 248 patterns ...........................................47, 55, 94, 176
Select System Unit ....................................105, 202 sewing attributes .........................................93, 175
inch ............................................239, 248, 255 Programmable Stitch Creator ..........................5, 54, 208
mm ............................................239, 248, 255 commands .........................................................249
Option menu menus ...............................................................249
Design Center .............................................30, 239 Tool Box buttons ...............................................249
Design Database ...............................................255 window ..............................................................208
Layout & Editing ................................................248 Pull Compensation ........................92, 93, 174, 175, 176
options ...........................................................................6
organizing embroidery patterns .................................224
Original Image stage ...............................................4, 69 Q
outlines quitting
converted from text ...........................................161 Layout & Editing ......................................24, 53, 63
deleting ................................................................80 Programmable Stitch Creator ..............................58
editing ..................................................................78
flipping .................................................................79
moving .................................................................78 R
resizing ................................................................79
rotating ................................................................79 radial stitch ..................................................................16
scaling .................................................................79 center point .................................................97, 139
selecting ..............................................................78 sewing attributes .........................................95, 177
sewing attributes .................................................85 realistic previewing ..........................23, 38, 52, 102, 187
outputting settings ......................................................102, 187
catalogs reducing ...............................................................14, 186
CSV files ...................................................232 display area frame .............................................193
HTML files .................................................231 Reference Window ............................................103, 193
Region color button ...........................36, 46, 48, 88, 169
Region sew button .............................42, 46, 48, 87, 169
P Region sew type selector ..................36, 46, 48, 88, 169
pasting stitch patterns ...............................................214 region sewing attributes ................................84, 91, 173
Path shape selector .............................................48, 150 registration ...................................................................13
pattern information ............................................189, 228 resizing
adding comments ..............................................199 display area frame .....................................104, 193
multi-position hoops ..........................................205 embroidery patterns ....................................40, 132
patterns images ...................................................21, 27, 114
objects .................................................................42
colors .................................................................185
outlines ................................................................79
combining colors ...............................................185
stitch patterns ............................................214, 220
selecting ............................................................184
Rotate angle ..............................................................158
PC .................................................................................8
pens .......................................................................32, 74 rotating
Photo Stitch 1 (Color) function ..................................116 embroidery patterns ..........................................133
outlines ................................................................79
Photo Stitch 1 (Mono) function ..................................120
stitch patterns ....................................................215
Photo Stitch 2 (Color) function ..................................122
Row Offset ...........................................................95, 177
Photo Stitch 2 (Mono) function ..................................124
Run Pitch ...............91, 95, 118, 121, 172, 173, 177, 178
Photo Stitch function ...................................................27
Run times ............................................................91, 172
Photo/Cartoon ...................................................118, 121
running stitch ...............................................................15
piping stitch .................................................................16
sewing attributes .........................................91, 172
sewing attributes ...............................................178 Running Stitch Path ...............................92, 93, 174, 175
points
deleting ........................................81, 137, 217, 219
editing ..................................................81, 135, 216
inserting ...............................................81, 136, 216
S
moving .................................................81, 135, 216 satin stitch ...................................................................15
selecting ............................................................135 sewing attributes .........................................91, 173
port ................................................................................8 saving
portraits .....................................................................112 different formats ................................................195
Preview window .........................................................212 embroidery patterns ..........23, 38, 53, 61, 104, 194
previewing ...............................22, 37, 51, 102, 187, 227 multi-position hoops ..................................206
stitch patterns ....................................................212 images ...............................................................114

260
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 261 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Index

on card ............................24, 52, 62, 195, 196, 206 Sewing Option ...................................118, 121, 123, 125
stitch patterns ..............................................58, 221 sewing order ..........................................49, 61, 100, 184
scaling editing ................................................................185
display area frame .....................................104, 193 tips .......................................................................14
embroidery patterns ....................................40, 132 sewing wide areas .......................................................14
images ...................................................21, 27, 114 Size .....................................................................95, 177
objects .................................................................42 slot .................................................................................6
outlines ................................................................79 special colors .............................................................170
stitch patterns ............................................214, 220 spiral stitch ..................................................................16
searching ...................................................................229 sewing attributes .........................................95, 177
selecting splitting stitching ........................................................143
all embroidery patterns ......................................130 stabilizer ......................................................................63
all stitch patterns ...............................................213 Stage
characters .........................................................157 To Figure Handle ..................................33, 76, 239
colors .................................................................119 To Line Image .......................................31, 73, 239
embroidery patterns ..........................................130 To Original Image ..............................................239
in sewing order ..........................................130 To Sew Setting ............................................34, 239
entry/exit points .................................................141 stage 1 .....................................................................4, 69
monogram characters .......................................164
stage 2 .........................................................4, 31, 69, 73
outlines ................................................................78
Tool Box buttons ...............................................234
patterns .............................................................184
stage 3 .........................................................4, 33, 69, 76
points .................................................................135
sewing area .......................................................183 Tool Box buttons ...............................................234
stitch patterns ....................................................213 stage 4 ...............................................................4, 34, 69
Sew Tool Box buttons ...............................................235
Applique Wizard ........................................181, 247 Stage menu ...............................................................239
Cancel Hole Sewing ....................................51, 180 stamp attributes .........................................................165
Cancel hole sewing ...........................................246 stamps .........................................................98, 165, 217
Convert to Stitch ........................................140, 246 editing ..................................................................99
Optimize Entry/Exit points .................138, 139, 247 starting
Optimize hoop change ..............................204, 247 Design Center .....................................................30
Select Sewing Area ...................................183, 247 Design Database ...............................................224
Set Hole Sewing ..........................................51, 180 Layout & Editing ......................................19, 25, 59
Set hole sewing .................................................246 Programmable Stitch Creator ..............................54
Setting Attribute ...........................................89, 171 Step Pitch ..............................................92, 94, 175, 176
Sewing Attribute Setting ..............................46, 246 stitch
Sewing Attributes ..............................................238 interval ...............................................................173
Sewing Order ......................................49, 100, 238 run pitch ............................................................173
Sewing Order/Color ...........................142, 184, 246 stroke width .......................................................173
Stitch to Block ...........................................142, 246 stitch data
Sew menu from objects .......................................................140
Design Center ...................................................238 to blocks ............................................................142
Layout & Editing ................................................246 stitch patterns
Sew Page Color ........................................................118 copying ..............................................................214
Sew Setting stage .............................................4, 34, 69 creating .............................................................218
Tool Box buttons ...............................................235 cutting ................................................................214
Sew type selector ................................................89, 170 deleting ..............................................................214
sew types ....................................................................15 drawing ..............................................................212
sewing attributes .......................................................167 duplicating .........................................................214
concentric circle stitch .................................95, 177 editing ........................................................213, 219
cross stitch ..................................................95, 177 feathered edge ..................................................178
E/V stitch ...........................................................173 flipping .......................................................215, 220
fill stitch .......................................................92, 174 height ............................................94, 95, 172, 177
lines .....................................................................86 motif stitch ...........................................95, 172, 177
motif stitch ...........................................95, 172, 177 moving ...............................................................213
outline ..................................................................85 pasting ...............................................................214
piping stitch .......................................................178 previewing .........................................................212
programmable fill stitch ...............................93, 175 programmable fill stitch ...................47, 55, 94, 176
radial stitch ..................................................95, 177 resizing ......................................................214, 220
regions ................................................................84 rotating ..............................................................215
running stitch ...............................................91, 172 saving ................................................................221
satin stitch ...................................................91, 173 scaling .......................................................214, 220
setting ....................................................34, 89, 171 selecting ............................................................213
spiral stitch ..................................................95, 177 width ......................................94, 95, 172, 176, 177
zigzag stitch ................................................91, 172 stitch points
Sewing Attributes bar ..................................................87 deleting ..............................................................141
sewing direction .......................36, 47, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95 editing ................................................................140
programmable fill stitch ...............................96, 178 inserting .............................................................141
stamp ................................................................178 moving ...............................................................141
tips .......................................................................14 stitch simulator ..................................................101, 188

261
 PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 262 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Index

Stitch times ................................................................126

Stitch Type ............................................92, 94, 174, 176
U
straight lines to curves ...............................................137 Under sewing ..........................91, 92, 93, 173, 174, 175
Stroke times ..............................................................173 uninstalling ..................................................................13
support ........................................................................13 units of measure ................................................105, 202
system requirements .....................................................8 USB card writer module ............................................5, 6
upgrading ............................................................12
USB port ........................................................................8
T Use Color ..........................................................121, 125
technical support .........................................................13 Use Color List ....................................................119, 123
techniques ...................................................................14 user thread color list ..................................................190
Text
Clear Transformation ................................161, 246
Convert to Outline Object ..........................161, 246
V
Edit Letters ................................................156, 246 V-Arrange ....................................................95, 172, 177
Fit Text to Path Setting ........................44, 158, 246 Vertical Alignment .....................................................159
Release Text from Path ............................160, 246 Vertical Offset ............................................................158
Text Attribute Setting .................................157, 246
Transform Text ..........................................160, 246
TrueType Font Attribute Setting ................161, 246 W
text .......................................................................43, 153 window
aligning ..............................................................131
Design Center .....................................................70
arranging ...........................................................158
Design Database ...............................................223
cancelling arrangement .....................................160
Layout & Editing ................................................107
cancelling transformation ..................................161
Programmable Stitch Creator ............................208
convert to outlines .............................................161
Writing data to original card .......................................206
fitting to object .....................................................44
transforming ......................................................160
text attributes .............................................154, 157, 167
Text body color button .................................................43
Z
Text body sew type selector ........................................43 zigzag stitch .................................................................15
Text menu .................................................................246 sewing attributes .........................................91, 172
Text Orientation .........................................................159 Zigzag width ........................................................91, 172
Text Size selector ................................................43, 156 zooming .....................................................................186
The other side ...........................................................159 Design Page ......................................................186
Thread Chart .............................................119, 123, 126 display area frame .....................................103, 193
out .....................................................................186
thread colors
to actual size .....................................................186
adding to charts .................................................191
to selected objects ............................................186
APPLIQUE ........................................................170
APPLIQUE MATERIAL .....................................170
APPLIQUE POSITION ......................................170
creating new colors ...........................................191
deleting charts ...................................................190
deleting from charts ...........................................192
editing ................................................................192
editing charts .....................................................190
new charts .........................................................190
NOT DEFINED ..................................................170
order ..................................................................192
user list ..............................................................190
Times ...................................................................95, 177
tips ...............................................................................14
Tool Box buttons
Design Center ...................................................234
Layout & Editing ................................................241
Programmable Stitch Creator ............................249
stage 2 (Line Image stage) ...............................234
stage 3 (Figure Handle stage) ...........................234
stage 4 (Sew Setting stage) ..............................235
transferring to card ..................24, 52, 62, 195, 196, 206
Transform level selector ............................................160
transforming
cancelling ..........................................................161
text ....................................................................160
TrueType text attributes ............................................161

262
PeDesignV6Eng.book Page 1 Thursday, July 8, 2004 11:59 AM

Read the following before opening the

CD-ROM package
Thank you for purchasing this software. Before opening the CD-ROM package for this software, carefully read
the following Product Agreement, which has been provided for this product. Use this software only if you agree
to the terms of this agreement. By opening the CD-ROM package, you agree to the conditions of its use. This
product cannot be returned after it has been opened.

Product Agreement
1) General terms
This is an agreement between you (the end-user) and our company for this product.
2) Use of this product
You may install and use this product on only one computer.
3) Limitations on duplications
You may not duplicate this product, except for backup purposes.
4) Limitations on modifications
You may not modify or disassemble this product in any way.
5) Limitations on transfer
This software may not be transferred to or used in any other way by a third party.
6) Warranty
We accept no responsibility for your choice or use of this product or for any damages that may arise
out of its use.
7) Others
This product is protected by copyright laws.

Portions of this product were created using technology from Softfoundry International Pte. Ltd.
 PE-DESIGN
Ver.
6
Instruction Manual
PE-DESIGN
Personal Embroidery Design Software System

Instruction Manual
Manual
Ver. 6
Instruction

ENGLISH
XC8871-001
Printed in Japan

<< PE-Design Ver.6.0 >> cover 1-4